IBM Printer S544 5750 00 User Manual
ꢀꢁꢂ  
IBM Printing Systems: Printer Information  
S544-5750-00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢀꢁꢂ  
IBM Printing Systems: Printer Information  
S544-5750-00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note  
Before using this information and the products it supports, be sure to read the general information in “Notices” on page xiii.  
First Edition (March 2001)  
This edition applies to Release 1.0 of the IBM Printing Systems: Printer Information, and applies to all subsequent  
releases of this product until otherwise indicated in new releases or technical newsletters.  
The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any country where such provisions are  
inconsistent with local law: INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS MANUAL  
“AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT  
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR  
PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions. Therefore,  
this may not apply to you.  
IBM does not warrant that the contents of this publication or the accompanying source code examples, whether  
individually or as one or more groups, will meet your requirements or that the publication or the source code is  
error-free.  
Requests for copies of this publication and for technical information about IBM® products should be made to your  
IBM authorized Dealer, your IBM Marketing Representative, or your IBM Printing Systems Marketing Representative.  
IBM Printing Systems welcomes your comments. For your convenience, a form for reader’s comments is provided at  
the back of this publication. If the form has been removed, you may send your comments to the following address:  
INFORMATION DEVELOPMENT  
IBM PRINTING SYSTEMS  
DEPARTMENT 588 BUILDING 003G  
PO BOX 1900  
BOULDER CO 80301-9191  
If you prefer to send your comments electronically, use one of the following methods:  
v
Internet: [email protected]  
Fax: 1-800-524-1519  
v
Internet: Visit our home page at http://www.ibm.com/printers  
When you send information to IBM, you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or distribute the information in any  
way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.  
However, the following copyright notice protects this documentation under the Copyright laws of the United States  
and other countries which prohibit such actions as, but not limited to, copying, distributing, modifying, and making  
derivative works.  
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 2001. All rights reserved.  
US Government Users Restricted Rights – Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract  
with IBM Corp.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
List of Figures .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. vii  
. ix  
List of Tables .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Notices .  
Trademarks  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. xiii  
. xiii  
Chapter 1. Introducing IBM Printing Systems Printers .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 1  
. 1  
. 1  
. 1  
. 2  
Printers Described in This Publication  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Finding Additional Information About Printing .  
Advanced Function Common Control Unit (AFCCU) .  
Printer Characteristics and PSF-Supported Functions.  
Printer Characteristics .  
AFP Font Collection  
IPDS Functions .  
Data Streams .  
Attachment Modes for Supported Printers  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 2  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 11  
. 14  
. 18  
. 18  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 2. Network Printer 12 (4312)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 25  
. 26  
. 26  
. 27  
Printable Area.  
Media Specifications .  
Attachments  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 3. Network Printer 17 (4317)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 29  
. 30  
. 30  
. 31  
Printable Area.  
Media Specifications .  
Attachments  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 4. Infoprint Color 8 Printer (4308)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 33  
. 34  
. 34  
. 34  
. 35  
. 35  
Printable Area.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Selecting the Printing Medium .  
Media Size and Configuration .  
Media Specifications .  
Attachments  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 5. Infoprint 12 Printer (4912)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 37  
. 38  
. 38  
. 38  
. 39  
Printable Area.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Media Size and Configuration .  
Media Specifications .  
Attachments  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 6. Infoprint 20 Printer (4320)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 41  
. 42  
. 42  
. 43  
Printable Area.  
Media Specifications .  
Attachments  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 7. Infoprint 21 Printer (4322)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 45  
. 46  
. 46  
. 47  
Printable Area.  
Media Specifications .  
Attachments  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 8. Infoprint 32 and Infoprint 40 Printers (4332) .  
Printable Area.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 51  
. 53  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Media Specifications .  
Attachments  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 53  
. 54  
.
.
.
.
Chapter 9. Infoprint 60 Printer (3160–002)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 57  
. 58  
. 59  
. 59  
Printable Area.  
Media Specifications .  
Attachments  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 10. Infoprint 70 Printer (2770) .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 61  
. 62  
. 62  
. 63  
Printable Area.  
Media Specifications .  
Attachments  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 11. Infoprint 2000 NP1 and RP1 Printers (2710–NP1, 2710–RP1)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 65  
. 66  
. 66  
. 66  
. 67  
Printable Area.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Media Size and Configuration .  
Media Specifications .  
Attachments  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 12. Infoprint 2000–DP1 Printer (2710–DP1) .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 69  
. 70  
. 70  
. 71  
Printable Area.  
Media Specifications .  
Attachments  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 13. Infoprint 3000–ES1 and –ED1/ED2 Printers (3300)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 73  
. 74  
. 75  
. 75  
Printable Area.  
Media Specifications .  
Attachments  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 14. Infoprint 4000 IS1– and –IS2 Printers (4000–IS1 and –IS2)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 79  
. 81  
. 82  
. 82  
Printable Area.  
Media Specifications .  
Attachments  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 15. Infoprint 4000–IR1/IR2 and –IR3/IR4 Printers (4000–IR1/IR2 and –IR3/IR4) .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 85  
. 86  
. 87  
. 87  
Printable Area.  
Media Specifications .  
Attachments  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 16. Infoprint 4000–ID1/ID2 and –ID3/ID4 Printers (4000–ID1/ID2 and –ID3/ID4) .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 89  
. 90  
. 92  
. 93  
Printable Area.  
Media Specifications .  
Attachments  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 17. Infoprint 4000–ID5/ID6 Printer (4000–ID5/ID6)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 95  
. 96  
. 98  
. 98  
Printable Area.  
Media Specifications .  
Attachments  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 18. InfoColor 70 Printer (3170–002) .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 101  
. 102  
. 103  
. 103  
Printable Area .  
Media Specifications .  
Attachments .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 19. Infoprint Color 100 Printer (3170–003).  
Printable Area .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 105  
. 106  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
iv Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Media Specifications .  
Attachments .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 107  
. 107  
.
.
.
Chapter 20. Infoprint Color 130 Printer (3170–004).  
Printable Area .  
Media Specifications .  
Attachments .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 109  
. 110  
. 111  
. 111  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 21. Infoprint Color 130 Plus Printer (3170–005).  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 113  
. 114  
. 115  
. 115  
Printable Area .  
Media Specifications .  
Attachments .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 22. 4230 Printer (4230) .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 119  
. 120  
. 120  
. 120  
. 122  
. 122  
. 122  
. 124  
Printable Area .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Media Specifications .  
Attachments .  
Fonts  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Operator-Adjustable Forms  
Print-Quality Levels .  
Printer Capabilities  
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 23. 4232 Impact Printer (4232) .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 125  
. 126  
. 126  
. 126  
. 127  
Printable Area .  
Media Specifications .  
Attachments .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Operator-Adjustable Forms  
Chapter 24. 4247 Printer (4247) .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 129  
. 130  
. 130  
. 130  
. 130  
. 130  
. 131  
. 131  
. 134  
. 134  
. 135  
. 135  
. 135  
. 135  
. 137  
Printable Area .  
Selecting the Printing Medium .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Specifying the Source of the Medium for a 4247-001 Printer .  
Identifying the Paper Source (Media IDs) .  
Selecting Paper Sources Compatible with Other Printers  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Media Specifications .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Attachments .  
Using PSF  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Selecting AS/400 Media  
Using GDDM .  
.
.
.
Using ‘forms’ parameters .  
Operator-Adjustable Forms  
.
Print-Quality Levels for IPDS Models .  
Printer Capabilities  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 25. 4400 Thermal Label Printer (4400) .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 139  
. 140  
. 140  
. 141  
Printable Area .  
Media Specifications .  
Attachments .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 26. 6400 Line Matrix Printer (6400)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 145  
. 146  
. 146  
. 147  
. 148  
. 149  
. 150  
Printable Area .  
Media Specifications .  
Attachments .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Operator-Adjustable Forms  
Print-Quality Levels in IPDS Mode .  
Printer Capabilities  
.
.
.
.
.
.
Table of Contents  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 27. Infoprint 62 Printer (4370)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 151  
. 153  
. 153  
. 153  
Printable Area .  
Media Specifications .  
Attachments .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Appendix A. Migrating Your 3800 Printer Applications .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 157  
. 157  
. 157  
. 163  
. 164  
. 165  
. 165  
. 166  
. 166  
. 166  
. 167  
. 168  
. 168  
. 168  
. 169  
Compatibility among PSF-Supported Printers .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Page Presentation.  
3800 AFP Mode  
3800 Compatibility Mode .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Hardware RPQ for 3800 Compatibility  
Performance Considerations .  
RPQ Installation Considerations.  
PSF/MVS Line Mode Function .  
.
.
.
.
.
How PSF/MVS Line Mode Works .  
Invoking PSF/MVS Line Mode Function .  
Considerations for Line-Merge Jobs .  
.
Printers Supported by PSF/MVS Line Mode .  
Implementing PSF/MVS Line Mode  
3900 or 4000 Installation Considerations  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Appendix B. Font Information for IPDS Printers.  
Font Terminology, Names of Font Groups, and Font Structure  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 171  
. 171  
. 171  
. 176  
. 176  
. 177  
IBM Font Structure and Terminology .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Tables Listing Printer-Resident Fonts .  
Abbreviations Used in the Tables .  
.
.
Fonts Resident in the AFCCU Printers .  
Appendix C. Related Publications .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 185  
Glossary .  
Glossary .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 193  
. 193  
. 193  
. 193  
Source Identifiers .  
References .  
.
.
Index  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 207  
vi Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
List of Figures  
1. Network Printer 12 Printer  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 25  
. 26  
. 29  
. 30  
. 33  
. 34  
. 37  
. 38  
. 41  
. 42  
. 45  
. 46  
. 51  
. 52  
. 53  
. 57  
. 59  
. 61  
. 62  
. 65  
. 66  
. 69  
. 70  
. 73  
. 75  
. 79  
2. Printable Area on the Network Printer 12 .  
3. Network Printer 17 Printer  
4. Printable Area on the Network Printer 17 .  
5. Infoprint Color 8 Printer  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
6. Printable Area on the Infoprint Color 8 printer .  
7. Infoprint 12 Printer .  
8. Printable Area on the Infoprint 12 .  
9. Infoprint 20 Printer .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
10. Printable Area on the Infoprint 20 Printer .  
11. Infoprint 21 Printer .  
12. Printable Area on the Infoprint 21 Printer .  
13. Infoprint 32 Printer .  
14. Infoprint 40 Printer with Optional Finisher .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
15. Printable Area on the Infoprint 32 and Infoprint 40 Printers  
16. Infoprint 60 Printer . .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
17. Recommended Printable Area for an 8.5 x 11 Inch Sheet on the Infoprint 60 Printer .  
18. Infoprint 70 Printer .  
19. Recommended Printable Area for an 8.5 x 11-Inch Sheet on the Infoprint 70 Printer .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
20. Infoprint 2000–NP1 and –RP1 Printer .  
21. Printable Area in IPDS Mode on the Infoprint 2000 NP1 and RP1 Printers.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
22. Infoprint 2000–DP1 Printer .  
23. Printable Area in IPDS Mode on the Infoprint 2000–DP1 Printer  
24. Infoprint 3000–ED1/ED2 Printer  
25. Printable Area on the Infoprint 3000–ES1 and –ED1/ED2 Printers .  
26. Infoprint 4000–IS1 and –IS2 Printers  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
27. Printable Area for 9.5 by 11-Inch (Narrow) and a 12 by 8.5-Inch (Wide) Roll Forms on Infoprint  
4000–IS1 and –IS2 printers .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 81  
28. Printable Area for 9.5 by 11-Inch (Narrow) and a 12 by 8.5-Inch (Wide) Folded Forms on Infoprint  
4000–IS1 and –IS2 printers .  
29. Infoprint 4000–IR1/IR2 and –IR3/IR4 Printers  
30. Printable Area in IPDS Mode on the Infoprint 4000–IR1/IR2 and –IR3/IR4 Printers.  
31. Infoprint 4000–ID1/ID2 and –ID3/ID4 Printers  
32. Recommended printable areas.  
33. Folded Forms on the Infoprint 4000–ID1/ID2 and –ID3/ID4 Printers .  
34. Folded Forms on the Infoprint–4000 ID1/ID2 and –ID3/ID4 Printers .  
35. Infoprint 4000–ID5/ID6 Printer .  
36. Recommended Printable Areas on the Infoprint 4000–ID5/ID6 Printer  
37. Folded Forms on the Infoprint 4000–ID5/ID6 Printer .  
38. Folded Forms on the Infoprint 4000–ID5/ID6 Printer .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 82  
. 85  
. 87  
. 89  
. 91  
. 92  
. 92  
. 95  
. 97  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 97  
. 98  
39. InfoColor 70 Printer  
40. Printable Area in IPDS Mode on the InfoColor 70  
41. Infoprint Color 100 Printer .  
42. Printable Area on the Infoprint Color 100 Printer .  
43. Infoprint Color 130 printer .  
44. Printable Area on the Infoprint Color 130 Printer .  
45. Infoprint Color 130 Plus Printer .  
46. Printable Area on the Infoprint Color 130 Plus Printer .  
47. 4230 Printer .  
48. 4232 Impact Printer .  
49. 4247 Printer .  
50. 4400 Model 004 Thermal Label Printer with Validator Option Attached .  
51. 6400 Printer .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 101  
. 103  
. 105  
. 107  
. 109  
. 111  
. 113  
. 115  
. 119  
. 125  
. 129  
. 139  
. 145  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
52. Infoprint 62 Printer .  
53. Printable Area in IPDS Mode on the Infoprint 62 .  
54. Media Origins and Print Directions for PSF-Supported Printers  
55. PSF-Supplied Form Definitions. .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 151  
. 153  
. 158  
. 160  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
56. Valid-Printable-Area Error: AFCCU Continuous Forms Printer Output with Incorrect Form  
Definition .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 161  
. 161  
57. Using PSF Form Definition F10101LA to Prevent Valid-Printable-Area Errors .  
58. Upside-Down Printing: AFCCU Continuous Forms Printers Output with Incorrect Form Definition 162  
59. Using PSF Form Definition F1C10110 to Prevent Presentation Errors .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 162  
. 163  
. 171  
. 172  
. 173  
. 174  
60. No Compatibility Form Definition Required .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
61. Font Components .  
62. Composition of a Font Character Set .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
63. Translation of a Keyboard Character into a Printed Character .  
64. Part of IBM Code Page T1V10037 .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
viii Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
List of Tables  
1. Workgroup Laser Printer Characteristics.  
2. Workgroup Laser Printer Characteristics (continued) .  
3. Cut Sheet Production Printer Characteristics .  
4. Continuous Form Production Printer Characteristics (1 of 2)  
5. Production/System Printer Characteristics (2 of 2) .  
6. Enterprise Color Printer Characteristics .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 2  
. 3  
. 4  
. 4  
. 6  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 8  
. 9  
7. Industrial / Impact and Non-Impact Printer Characteristics (1 of 2) .  
8. Industrial / Impact and Non-Impact Printer Characteristics (2 of 2).  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 10  
. 12  
. 12  
. 13  
. 13  
. 14  
. 15  
. 17  
. 18  
. 19  
. 19  
9. Font Support with PSF.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
10. Font Technologies Supported by IPDS Printers.  
11. Font Technologies Supported by PCL Printers .  
12. Font Technologies Supported by PostScript Printers .  
13. Supported IPDS Functions (1 of 2) .  
14. Supported IPDS Functions (2 of 2) .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
15. Bar Codes supported by IPDS Printers.  
16. Data Stream Transforms .  
.
.
.
.
.
17. Attachment Modes for the Infoprint Color 8 .  
18. Attachment Modes for the Infoprint 12 Printer .  
19. Attachment Modes for the Network Printer 12, Network Printer 17, Infoprint 20, Infoprint 32, and  
Infoprint 40 Printers .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 19  
. 19  
. 20  
. 20  
. 20  
. 20  
. 20  
. 20  
. 21  
21  
20. Attachment Modes for the Infoprint 21 Printer .  
21. Attachment Modes for the Infoprint 60 Printer .  
22. Attachment Modes for the Infoprint 70 Printer .  
23. Attachment Modes for the Infoprint 2000–NP1 and Infoprint 2000–RP1 Printers.  
24. Attachment Modes for the Infoprint 2000–DP1 Printer .  
25. Attachment Modes for the Infoprint 2000–DP1 Printer with AFCCU Feature .  
26. Attachment Modes for the Infoprint 3000 Printers .  
27. Attachment Modes for the Infoprint 4000 Printers .  
28. Attachment Modes for the InfoColor 70, Infoprint Color 100, and Infoprint Color 130 Printers  
29. Attachment Modes Infoprint Color 130 Plus Printer .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 21  
. 21  
. 22  
. 22  
. 22  
. 22  
. 23  
. 25  
. 27  
. 27  
. 27  
. 28  
. 29  
. 31  
. 31  
. 31  
. 32  
. 33  
. 35  
. 35  
. 37  
. 39  
. 41  
. 43  
30. Attachment Modes for the 4230 Printer.  
31. Attachment Modes for the 4232 Printer.  
32. Attachment Modes for the 4247 Printer.  
33. Attachment Modes for the 4400 Thermal Printer .  
34. Attachment Modes for the 6400 Printer.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
35. Attachment Modes for the Infoprint 62 Printer .  
36. Network Printer 12 Characteristics  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
37. PC Parallel and RS-232 Serial Interface .  
38. Optional Token-Ring and Ethernet  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
39. Optional Coax Interface .  
40. Optional Twinax Interface.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
41. Network Printer 17 Characteristics  
42. PC Parallel and RS-232 Serial Interface .  
43. Optional Token-Ring and Ethernet  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
44. Optional Coax Interface .  
45. Optional Twinax Interface.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
46. Infoprint Color 8 Printer Characteristics.  
47. Supported Drivers on the Infoprint Color 8 Printer.  
48. Supported Network Operating Systems on the Infoprint Color 8 Printer .  
49. Infoprint 12 Characteristics .  
50. Attachment and Operating System Support for the Infoprint 12 Printer .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
51. Infoprint 20 Printer Characteristics  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
52. PC Parallel Interface  
.
.
.
.
.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
53. Optional Token-Ring and Ethernet  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 43  
. 44  
. 44  
. 45  
. 47  
. 48  
. 48  
. 49  
. 52  
. 54  
. 54  
. 55  
. 56  
. 58  
. 59  
. 61  
. 63  
. 65  
. 69  
. 73  
. 79  
. 85  
. 89  
. 95  
54. Optional Coax Interface .  
55. Optional Twinax Interface.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
56. Infoprint 21 Printer Characteristics  
57. Attachment/Operating System Support for the Infoprint 21 Printer .  
58. Optional Coax Interface for the Infoprint 21 Printer  
59. Optional Twinax Interface for the Infoprint 21 Printer .  
60. Printer Drivers for the Infoprint 21 Printer .  
61. Infoprint 32 and Infoprint 40 Printer Characteristics .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
62. PC Parallel Interface  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
63. Optional Token-Ring and Ethernet  
64. Optional Coax Interface .  
65. Optional Twinax Interface.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
66. Infoprint 60 Printer Characteristics  
67. Attachments for the Infoprint 60 Printer.  
68. Infoprint 70 Printer Characteristics  
69. Software Supported on the Infoprint 70 Printer .  
70. Infoprint 2000 NP1 and RP1 Printers’ Characteristics  
71. Infoprint 2000–DP1 Printer Characteristics  
72. Infoprint 3000–ES1 and –ED1/ED2 Printer Characteristics  
73. Infoprint 4000–IS1 and –IS2 Printer Characteristics .  
74. Infoprint 4000–IR1/IR2 and –IR3/IR4 Printer Characteristics .  
75. Infoprint 4000–ID1/ID2 and –ID3/ID4 Printer Characteristics .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
76. Infoprint 4000–ID5/ID6 Printer Characteristics .  
.
.
.
.
.
77. InfoColor 70 Printer Characteristics  
78. InfoColor 100 Printer Characteristics .  
79. InfoColor 130 Printer Characteristics .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 101  
. 105  
. 109  
. 113  
. 119  
. 122  
. 123  
. 125  
. 127  
. 127  
. 129  
. 132  
. 132  
. 133  
. 133  
. 135  
. 136  
. 139  
. 141  
. 141  
. 142  
. 143  
. 146  
. 147  
. 147  
. 148  
. 149  
. 149  
. 151  
. 175  
. 175  
. 175  
80. InfoColor 130 Plus Printer Characteristics .  
81. 4230 Impact Printers .  
82. 4230 Printer Print-Quality Selection Values .  
83. 4230 Printer Symbol Sets and Corresponding Coded Fonts.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
84. 4232 Impact Printers .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
85. Caption .  
86. Caption .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
87. 4247 Printer .  
88. System Support Through Parallel Attachments for the 4247 Printer .  
89. Network Operating System Support through Parallel Attachments for the 4247 Printer .  
90. Coax Software Support for the 4247 Printer  
91. Twinax Software Support for the 4247 Printer .  
92. 4247 Printer Print-Quality Selection Values .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
93. 4247 Printer Symbol Sets and Corresponding Coded Fonts.  
94. 4400 Thermal Label Printers .  
95. Attachments for the 4400 Thermal Label Printer .  
96. IPDS Support for the 4400 Thermal Printer.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
97. IPDS Support with Infoprint Manager for the 4400 Thermal Printer .  
98. Ethernet Support for the 4400 Thermal Printer  
99. 6400 Line Matrix Printers .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
100. System, Controller, and Processors Attachments for the 6400 Printer .  
101. ASCII Support for the 6400 Printer .  
102. Caption .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
103. 6400 Printer Print-Quality Selection Values .  
104. 6400 Printer Symbol Sets and Corresponding Coded Fonts.  
105. Infoprint 62 Printer Characteristics .  
106. Font Width Calculation for Uniformly Spaced Fonts.  
107. Font Width Calculation for Mixed-Pitch Character Sets  
108. Font Width Calculation for Proportionally Spaced Fonts .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
x
Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
109. Resource Type and Resource ID Formats .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 177  
. 178  
. 178  
. 179  
. 179  
. 179  
. 180  
. 180  
. 181  
. 181  
. 185  
. 185  
. 185  
. 186  
. 186  
. 186  
. 186  
. 186  
. 186  
. 187  
. 187  
. 187  
. 187  
. 188  
. 188  
. 188  
. 188  
. 188  
. 189  
. 189  
. 189  
. 189  
. 189  
. 189  
. 189  
. 190  
. 190  
. 190  
. 190  
. 190  
. 190  
. 191  
. 191  
110. Arabic Expanded Core Fonts .  
111. Hebrew Expanded Core Fonts  
112. Latin1 Expanded Core Fonts .  
113. Latin2/3/5 Expanded Core Fonts  
114. Latin4 Expanded Core Fonts .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
115. Symbols Expanded Core Fonts .  
116. Cyrillic Greek Expanded Core Fonts .  
117. OCR, APL, and Katakana Fonts Resident in the AFCCU Printers  
118. Code Pages for the Expanded Core Fonts .  
119. Advanced Function Presentation Publications .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
120. Data Stream and Object Architectures  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
121. IBM AFP Fonts Publications .  
.
.
.
.
122. IBM AFP DBCS Fonts Publications.  
123. IBM Infoprint Manager for AIX Publications .  
124. IBM Infoprint Manager for Windows NT and Windows 2000 Publications .  
125. IBM Infoprint Server for OS/390 V2R8- V2R10  
126. IBM Infoprint Server for OS/390 V2R8- V2R10  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
127. Network Printer 12 Publications .  
128. Network Printer 17 Publications .  
129. Infoprint Color 8 Printer Publications .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
130. InfoPrint 12 Publications.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
131. Infoprint 20 Printer Publications .  
132. Infoprint 21 Printer Publications .  
133. Infoprint 32 and Infoprint 40 Printer Publications .  
134. Infoprint 60 Printer Publications .  
135. Infoprint 70 Printer Publications .  
136. Infoprint 2000–DP1 Printer Publications .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
137. Infoprint 62 Publications.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
138. Infoprint 3000 Printer Publications .  
139. Infoprint 4000 Printer Publications .  
140. Infoprint Color 100 Printer Publications .  
141. Infoprint Color 130 Plus Printer Publications  
142. 4230 Printer Publications  
143. 4232 Printer Publications  
144. 4247 Printer Publications  
145. 4400 Printer Publications  
146. 6400 Line Matrix Printer.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
147. Print Services Facility for OS/390 Publications  
148. Print Services Facility/VM Publications  
149. Print Services Facility/VSE Publications .  
.
.
.
.
.
150. Print Services Facility for AS/400 Publications.  
151. Other AFP Products Publications  
.
.
.
.
.
List of Tables xi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xii Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notices  
References in this publication to products or services of IBM do not suggest or imply that IBM will make  
them available in all countries where IBM does business or that only products or services of IBM may be  
used. Noninfringing equivalents may be substituted, but the user must verify that such substitutes, unless  
expressly designated by IBM, work correctly. No license, expressed or implied, to patents or copyrights of  
IBM is granted by furnishing this document. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to the IBM Director  
of Licensing, IBM Corporation, 500 Columbus Avenue, Thornwood, NY 10594, USA.  
Licensees of this program who wish to have information about it for the purpose of enabling: (1) the  
exchange of information between independently created programs and other programs (including this one)  
and (2) the mutual use of the information, which has been exchanged, should contact: IBM Corporation,  
Printing Systems Company Legal Department, Mail Drop 001W, Boulder, Colorado 80301 USA. Such  
information may be available, subject to appropriate terms and conditions, including in some cases,  
payment of a fee.  
This publication is intended to help you identify differences between IBM printers and the software used to  
drive the printers.  
Trademarks  
The following terms are trademarks of the IBM Corporation in the United States or other countries:  
IBM®  
Infoprint®  
InfoColor®  
AIX®  
AS/400®  
VM/ESA®  
RISC System/6000®  
RS/6000®  
Advanced Function Common Control Unit®  
AFCCU®  
Advanced Function Presentation™ (AFP)  
Print Services Facility™  
Print Services Facility for OS/390™  
Print Services Facility/VM™  
Print Services Facility/VSE™  
Print Services Facility/400™  
Print Services Facility/6000™  
The following terms are trademarks of other companies as follows:  
Netscape®  
Netscape Navigator®  
Netscape Navigator is a registered trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation  
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft, Corp.  
Internet Explorer™  
Internet Explorer is a trademark of Microsoft, Corp.  
Netscape is a registered trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation  
Windows®  
UNIX™  
UNIX is a trademark of System Laboratories, licensed exclusively by X/Open Company,  
Ltd.  
PostScript®  
TrueType®  
PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.  
TrueType is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001  
xiii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PCL®  
PCL is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.  
HP-UX is a trademark of Hewlett Packard Company.  
Sun Solaris is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.  
HP-UX  
Sun Solaris  
xiv Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1. Introducing IBM Printing Systems Printers  
IBM Printing Systems offers printing hardware and software technology. Printing Systems specializes in  
print solutions for the enterprise delivering customized, comprehensive solutions that go beyond the  
printed page. Printing Systems provides innovative, efficient, and cost-effective printing solutions that link  
information with output across any enterprise, large or small, worldwide.  
This publication is intended to help you identify differences between IBM printers and the software used to  
drive the printers.  
Printers Described in This Publication  
This publication describes the following printers:  
v Chapter 2. Network Printer 12 (4312)  
v Chapter 3. Network Printer 17 (4317)  
v Chapter 4. Infoprint Color 8 Printer (4308)  
v Chapter 5. Infoprint 12 Printer (4912)  
v Chapter 6. Infoprint 20 Printer (4320)  
v Chapter 7. Infoprint 21 Printer (4322)  
v Chapter 8. Infoprint 32 and Infoprint 40 Printers (4332)  
v Chapter 9. Infoprint 60 Printer (3160–002)  
v Chapter 10. Infoprint 70 Printer (2770)  
v Chapter 11. Infoprint 2000 NP1 and RP1 Printers (2710–NP1, 2710–RP1)  
v Chapter 12. Infoprint 2000–DP1 Printer (2710–DP1)  
v Chapter 13. Infoprint 3000–ES1 and –ED1/ED2 Printers (3300)  
v Chapter 14. Infoprint 4000 IS1– and –IS2 Printers (4000–IS1 and –IS2)  
v Chapter 15. Infoprint 4000–IR1/IR2 and –IR3/IR4 Printers (4000–IR1/IR2 and –IR3/IR4)  
v Chapter 16. Infoprint 4000–ID1/ID2 and –ID3/ID4 Printers (4000–ID1/ID2 and –ID3/ID4)  
v Chapter 17. Infoprint 4000–ID5/ID6 Printer (4000–ID5/ID6)  
v Chapter 18. InfoColor 70 Printer (3170–002)  
v Chapter 19. Infoprint Color 100 Printer (3170–003)  
v Chapter 20. Infoprint Color 130 Printer (3170–004)  
v Chapter 21. Infoprint Color 130 Plus Printer (3170–005)  
v Chapter 22. 4230 Printer (4230)  
v Chapter 23. 4232 Impact Printer (4232)  
v Chapter 24. 4247 Printer (4247)  
v Chapter 25. 4400 Thermal Label Printer (4400)  
v Chapter 26. 6400 Line Matrix Printer (6400)  
v Chapter 27. Infoprint 62 Printer (4370)  
Finding Additional Information About Printing  
For more information about IBM printers and printing software, visit the IBM Printing Systems Internet  
page at:  
http://www.ibm.com/printers  
Advanced Function Common Control Unit (AFCCU)  
The Advanced Function Common Control Unit (AFCCU) is the printer controller used in IPDS production  
printers. The heart of the AFCCU is a RISC System/6000 processor devoted to controlling printer functions  
and interpreting the IPDS data stream, and a set of microcode that runs on this processor. The same  
microcode is used across printer models, providing common IPDS functionality. However, since new  
functions are continually added to IPDS, newer printer models may have functions that were not shipped  
on older models. For details on IPDS functions available on AFCCU printers, see the IPDS Handbook for  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Printers that Use the AFCCU, G544-3895. For a summary of IPDS functions available on AFCCU and  
non-AFCCU printers, see Table 13 on page 14 and Table 14 on page 15. The AFCCU printers described in  
this publication are:  
v Chapter 9. Infoprint 60 Printer (3160–002)  
v Chapter 12. Infoprint 2000–DP1 Printer (2710–DP1)  
v Chapter 27. Infoprint 62 Printer (4370)  
v Chapter 13. Infoprint 3000–ES1 and –ED1/ED2 Printers (3300)  
v Chapter 14. Infoprint 4000 IS1– and –IS2 Printers (4000–IS1 and –IS2)  
v Chapter 15. Infoprint 4000–IR1/IR2 and –IR3/IR4 Printers (4000–IR1/IR2 and –IR3/IR4)  
v Chapter 16. Infoprint 4000–ID1/ID2 and –ID3/ID4 Printers (4000–ID1/ID2 and –ID3/ID4)  
v Chapter 17. Infoprint 4000–ID5/ID6 Printer (4000–ID5/ID6)  
v Chapter 21. Infoprint Color 130 Plus Printer (3170–005)  
Printer Characteristics and PSF-Supported Functions  
When you prepare an application to be printed on a PSF-supported printer, you should consider certain  
printer characteristics. Although the printers have many capabilities and functions in common, some  
differences exist. This publication describes printer characteristics and functions that are important when  
you are:  
v Preparing an application for use on only one type of printer  
v Deciding which printer to use for an application  
v Preparing an application for use on more than one type of printer  
This publication describes the differences among printers that may affect using the printer with PSF. For  
more information about a specific printer or for information about other printer characteristics, refer to the  
printer publications.  
The printer characteristics as shown in Table 1 through Table 7 are supported similarly by PSF programs  
on different operating systems. An example of a printer characteristic is the medium on which the printer  
prints: continuous forms or cut-sheet. The printer hardware determines the medium, and PSF uses what is  
provided.  
In contrast, other PSF-supported functions can differ across operating systems and releases. For example,  
current releases of the PSF licensed programs support graphics and bar codes, whereas earlier releases  
do not.  
Printer Characteristics  
Table 1 through Table 7 on page 9 summarize some of the printer characteristics described in this  
publication.  
Workgroup Laser Printers  
IBM Printing Systems’ workgroup laser printers are cut-sheet printers designed to support the printing  
needs of small to medium-sized organizations. Table 1 and Table 2 on page 3 list the characteristics of  
these printers.  
Table 1. Workgroup Laser Printer Characteristics  
Printer Characteristics  
Network Printer 12 Network Printer 17 Infoprint Color 8  
Infoprint 12  
(4912)  
(4312)  
(4317)  
17 ppm  
Laser  
(4308)  
Maximum printing rate  
Print technology  
Datastreams  
* Pages and ESC/P support DSE, PostScript,  
is available only in Japan.  
12 ppm  
8 ppm  
12 ppm  
Laser  
Laser  
Laser  
IPDS, SCS, DSC,  
IPDS, SCS, DSC,  
DSE, PostScript,  
PCL, Pages*,  
ESC/P*  
PCL, PostScript  
PCL, PostScript  
PCL, Pages*,  
ESC/P*  
2
Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 1. Workgroup Laser Printer Characteristics (continued)  
Printer Characteristics  
Network Printer 12 Network Printer 17 Infoprint Color 8  
Infoprint 12  
(4912)  
(4312)  
(4317)  
(4308)  
Form type  
Cut Sheet  
Cut Sheet  
Cut Sheet  
Cut Sheet  
Number of input bins  
2 standard  
1 optional  
2 standard  
1 optional  
2 standard  
1 optional  
2 standard  
2 optional  
Number of output bins  
1 standard  
1 optional  
1 standard  
2 optional  
1 standard  
1 optional  
2 standard  
Manual forms feed  
Envelope printing  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
no  
yes  
yes  
MICR printing  
*IBM Business Partners may  
have MICR solutions for  
these printers.  
no*  
no*  
no*  
no*  
Duplex printing  
yes  
(manual)  
yes  
(manual)  
yes  
no  
yes  
no  
Color  
yes  
no  
Printhead resolution  
300 dpi  
600 dpi  
1,200 dpi  
600 dpi  
35,000  
600 dpi  
65,000  
600 dpi  
Maximum impressions per  
month (duty cycles)  
25,000  
20,000  
Table 2. Workgroup Laser Printer Characteristics (continued)  
Printer Characteristics  
Infoprint 32  
(4332–001)  
(4332–002)  
(4332–003)  
Infoprint 40  
(4332–004)  
(4332–005)  
(4332–006)  
Infoprint 20  
(4320)  
Infoprint 21  
(4322)  
Maximum printing rate  
Print technology  
Datastreams  
* Pages and ESC/P support is DSE, PostScript,  
available only in Japan.  
20 ppm  
Laser  
21 ppm  
Laser  
32 ppm  
Laser  
40 ppm  
Laser  
IPDS, SCS, DSC,  
IPDS, SCS, DSC,  
DSE, PostScript,  
PCL  
IPDS, SCS, DSC,  
DSE, PostScript,  
PCL, Pages*,  
ESC/P*  
IPDS, SCS, DSC,  
DSE, PostScript,  
PCL, Pages*,  
ESC/P*  
PCL, Pages*,  
ESC/P*  
Form type  
Cut Sheet  
Cut Sheet  
Cut Sheet  
Cut Sheet  
Number of input bins  
2 standard  
2 optional  
2 standard  
2 optional  
3 standard  
3 optional  
3 standard  
3 optional  
Number of output bins  
1 standard  
1 optional  
1 standard  
2 optional  
1 standard  
4 optional  
1 standard  
4 optional  
Manual forms feed  
Envelope printing  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
MICR printing  
*IBM Business Partners may  
have MICR solutions for these  
printers.  
no*  
no*  
no*  
no*  
Duplex printing  
Color  
yes  
no  
yes  
no  
yes  
no  
yes  
no  
Printhead resolution  
600 dpi  
1200 dpi  
600 dpi  
600 dpi  
Chapter 1. Introducing IBM Printing Systems Printers  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
 
Table 2. Workgroup Laser Printer Characteristics (continued) (continued)  
Printer Characteristics  
Infoprint 32  
(4332–001)  
(4332–002)  
(4332–003)  
Infoprint 40  
(4332–004)  
(4332–005)  
(4332–006)  
Infoprint 20  
(4320)  
Infoprint 21  
(4322)  
Maximum impressions per  
month (duty cycles)  
75,000  
100,000  
150,000  
150,000  
Cutsheet Production Printers  
IBM Printing Systems’ cut sheet production printers are heavy-duty, full-function printers with multiple  
connectivity options. Table 3 lists the characteristics for these printers.  
Table 3. Cut Sheet Production Printer Characteristics  
Printer Characteristics  
Infoprint 2000  
(2710–NP1)  
(2710–RP1)  
Infoprint 60  
(3160–002)  
Infoprint 70  
(2770)  
Infoprint 2000  
(2710–DP1)  
Maximum printing rate  
Print technology  
Datastreams  
60 ppm  
Laser  
70 ppm  
Laser  
110 ppm  
Laser  
110 ppm  
Laser  
PostScript 3,  
PCL6, PDF  
IPDS,  
LCDS/Metacode,  
PCL6, PostScript  
3, PDF  
IPDS, PCL  
IPDS  
Form type  
Cut Sheet  
Cut Sheet  
Cut-Sheet  
3 standard  
Cut-Sheet  
3 standard  
Number of input bins  
3 standard  
1 optional  
4 standard  
1 optional  
Number of output bins  
2 standard  
2 optional  
2 standard  
1 optional  
1 standard  
1 standard  
Manual forms feed  
Envelope printing  
no  
no  
no  
no  
no  
no  
no  
no  
MICR printing  
*IBM Business Partners may have  
MICR solutions for these printers.  
no*  
no*  
no  
no  
Duplex printing  
Color  
yes  
no  
yes  
no  
yes  
no  
yes  
no  
Printhead resolution  
240 dpi  
300 dpi  
600 dpi  
600 dpi  
400,000  
600 dpi  
600 dpi  
Maximum impressions per month (duty  
cycles)  
750,000  
2,000,000  
2,000,000  
Continuous Form Production Printers  
IBM Printing Systems’ continuous form production printers are high-speed, high capacity printers. Table 4  
and Table 5 on page 6 lists the characteristics for these printers.  
Table 4. Continuous Form Production Printer Characteristics (1 of 2)  
Printer Characteristics  
Infoprint 4000  
Simplex  
(4000–IS1)  
Infoprint 4000  
Simplex  
Infoprint 3000  
(3300–ES1)  
Infoprint 3000  
(3300–ED1/ED2)  
(4000–IS2)1  
Print technology  
Datastreams  
Laser  
IPDS  
Laser  
IPDS  
Laser  
IPDS  
Laser  
IPDS  
4
Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 4. Continuous Form Production Printer Characteristics (1 of 2) (continued)  
Printer Characteristics  
Infoprint 4000  
Simplex  
(4000–IS1)  
Infoprint 4000  
Simplex  
Infoprint 3000  
(3300–ES1)  
Infoprint 3000  
(3300–ED1/ED2)  
(4000–IS2)1  
Form type  
Continuous  
1 standard  
1 standard  
n/a  
Continuous  
1 standard  
1 standard  
n/a  
Continuous  
1 standard  
1 standard  
n/a  
Continuous  
1 standard  
1 standard  
n/a  
Number of input bins  
Number of output bins  
Manual forms feed  
Envelope printing  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
MICR printing  
*With either RPQ 8B4013 or  
8B4018 installed  
no  
no  
no  
no  
yes  
no  
yes*  
no  
yes*  
no  
Duplex printing  
Color  
*With the IBM 4005 Infoprint  
yes*  
yes*  
Hi-Lite Color printer attached2  
Printhead resolution  
480 dpi  
600 dpi  
480 dpi  
600 dpi  
240 dpi  
300 dpi  
240 dpi  
300 dpi  
Maximum printing rates for letter (8.5 x 11)  
inches per second  
inches per minute  
15.9  
954  
15.9  
954  
32.5  
46  
1,950  
2,760  
Maximum printing rates for letter in pages per minute3  
1–up landscape (8.5 inches  
long) simplex  
112  
n/a  
172  
n/a  
112  
224  
172  
344  
229  
n/a  
324  
n/a  
1–up landscape (8.5 inches  
long) duplex  
2–up portrait (11 inches  
long) simplex  
354  
n/a  
501  
n/a  
2–up portrait (11 inches  
long) duplex  
Maximum printing rates for A4 (210 x 297 mm)  
mm per second  
mm per minute  
404  
404  
825  
1168  
24,231  
24,231  
49,530  
70,104  
Maximum printing rates for A4 in pages per minute3  
1–up landscape (210 mm  
long) simplex  
115  
n/a  
162  
n/a  
115  
230  
162  
324  
235  
n/a  
333  
n/a  
1–up landscape (210 mm  
long) duplex  
2–up portrait (297 mm long)  
simplex  
333  
n/a  
472  
n/a  
2–up portrait (297 mm long)  
duplex  
Maximum usage in pages per month (duty cycles)4  
Letter: 1–up landscape (8.5  
2,800,000 simplex  
inches long)  
5,800,000 duplex  
8,800,000 duplex  
5,600,000 simplex 8,000,000 simplex  
8,700,000 simplex 12,300,000 simplex  
Letter: 2–up portrait (11 inches  
4,400,000 simplex  
long)  
Chapter 1. Introducing IBM Printing Systems Printers  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Table 4. Continuous Form Production Printer Characteristics (1 of 2) (continued)  
Printer Characteristics  
Infoprint 4000  
Simplex  
(4000–IS1)  
Infoprint 4000  
Simplex  
Infoprint 3000  
(3300–ES1)  
Infoprint 3000  
(3300–ED1/ED2)  
(4000–IS2)1  
A4: 1–up landscape (210 mm  
long)  
3,000,000 simplex  
4,000,000 simplex  
6,000,000 duplex  
8,000,000 duplex  
5,700,000 simplex 8,100,000 simplex  
8,200,000 simplex 11,500,000 simplex  
A4: 2–up portrait (297 mm  
long)  
1. The 4000–IS2 printer was originally shipped with a print speed of 44 inches per second. All 4000–IS2 printers  
shipped after February 17, 1998 (or with upgrades 9324 or 4260 installed) have a print speed of 46 inches per  
second.  
2. The IBM Infoprint 4005 Hi-Lite Color post-processor provides a high-speed, high quality, all-points-addressable  
(APA) color printing system to complement the industry-leading quality and reliability the IBM Infoprint 4000 Wide  
or Wide Duplex printers (240 dpi models). Visit the IBM Printing Systems Internet page at  
http://www.ibm.com/printers for more information about the Infoprint 4005.  
3. Maximum printing rate is the maximum number of pages of the indicated size and configuration that can be  
printed at the constant speed of paper movement shown for each printer. Rates for pages of different sizes and  
configuration can be calculated by dividing the form length into the printer speed. Actual printing rate will be less  
if the printer cannot reach this rate due to complexity or density of the data or the ability of the system to deliver  
data at this rate.  
4. Maximum usage is based on operating 7 days a week, 24 hours a day, at maximum printing rate with normal  
maintenance and operations activity. IBM does not recommend reaching this monthly maximum on consistent  
basis.  
Table 5. Production/System Printer Characteristics (2 of 2)  
Printer Characteristics  
Infoprint 4000 Infoprint 4000 Infoprint 4000 Infoprint 4000 Infoprint 4000  
(4000 IR1/IR2) (4000 IR3/IR4) (4000 ID1/ID2) (4000 ID3/ID4) (4000 ID5/ID6)  
Print technology  
Datastreams  
Laser  
IPDS  
Laser  
IPDS  
Laser  
IPDS  
Laser  
IPDS  
Laser  
IPDS  
Form type  
Continuous  
1 standard  
1 standard  
n/a  
Continuous  
1 standard  
1 standard  
n/a  
Continuous  
1 standard  
1 standard  
n/a  
Continuous  
1 standard  
1 standard  
n/a  
Continuous  
1 standard  
1 standard  
n/a  
Number of input bins  
Number of output bins  
Manual forms feed  
Envelope printing  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
MICR printing  
*With either RPQ 8B4013 or  
8B4018 installed  
no  
yes  
no  
no  
yes  
no  
yes*  
yes  
no  
yes  
yes*  
yes*  
yes  
Duplex printing  
Color  
*With the IBM 4005 Infoprint  
yes*  
yes*  
Hi-Lite Color printer attached1  
Printhead resolution  
480 dpi  
600 dpi  
480 dpi  
600 dpi  
240 dpi  
300 dpi  
240 dpi  
300 dpi  
480 dpi  
600 dpi  
Maximum printing rates for letter (8.5 x 11 inches)  
inches per second  
inches per minute  
21.3  
32.5  
32.5  
46  
46  
1,278  
1,950  
1,950  
2,760  
2,760  
Maximum printing rates for letter in pages per minute2  
1–up landscape (8.5 inches  
150  
229  
229  
324  
324  
long) simplex  
6
Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 5. Production/System Printer Characteristics (2 of 2) (continued)  
Printer Characteristics  
Infoprint 4000 Infoprint 4000 Infoprint 4000 Infoprint 4000 Infoprint 4000  
(4000 IR1/IR2) (4000 IR3/IR4) (4000 ID1/ID2) (4000 ID3/ID4) (4000 ID5/ID6)  
1–up landscape (8.5 inches  
long) duplex  
300  
232  
464  
458  
354  
708  
458  
354  
708  
648  
648  
2–up portrait (11 inches long)  
simplex  
501  
501  
2–up portrait (11 inches long)  
1,002  
1,002  
duplex  
Maximum printing rates for A4 (210 x 297 mm)  
mm per second  
mm per minute  
541  
825  
825  
1168  
1168  
32,461  
49,530  
49,530  
70,104  
70,104  
Maximum printing rates for A4 in pages per minute2  
1–up landscape (210 mm long)  
simplex  
154  
308  
218  
436  
235  
470  
333  
666  
235  
470  
333  
666  
333  
666  
472  
944  
333  
666  
472  
944  
1–up landscape (210 mm long)  
duplex  
2–up portrait (297 mm long)  
simplex  
2–up portrait (297 mm long)  
duplex  
Maximum usage in pages per month (duty cycles)3  
Letter: 1–up landscape (8.5  
inches long)  
7,300,000  
(duplex)  
11,200,000  
(duplex)  
11,200,000  
(duplex)  
16,000,000  
(duplex)  
16,000,000  
(duplex)  
Letter: 2–up portrait (11 inches  
long)  
11,300,000  
(duplex)  
17,400,000  
(duplex)  
17,400,000  
(duplex)  
24,600,000  
(duplex)  
24,600,000  
(duplex)  
A4: 1–up landscape (210 mm  
long)  
7,500,000  
(duplex)  
11,600,000  
(duplex)  
11,600,000  
(duplex)  
16,300,000  
(duplex)  
16,300,000  
(duplex)  
A4: 2–up portrait (297 mm long)  
10,700,000  
(duplex)  
16,700,000  
(duplex)  
16,700,000  
(duplex)  
23,000,000  
(duplex)  
23,000,000  
(duplex)  
1. The IBM Infoprint 4005 Hi-Lite Color post-processor provides a high-speed, high quality, all-points-addressable  
(APA) color printing system to complement the industry-leading quality and reliability the IBM Infoprint 4000 Wide  
or Wide Duplex printers (240 dpi models). Visit the IBM Printing Systems Internet page at  
http://www.ibm.com/printers for more information about the Infoprint 4005.  
2. Maximum printing rate is the maximum number of pages of the indicated size and configuration that can be  
printed at the constant speed of paper movement shown for each printer. Rates for pages of different sizes and  
configuration can be calculated by dividing the form length into the printer speed. Actual printing rate will be less  
if the printer cannot reach this rate due to complexity or density of the data or the ability of the system to deliver  
data at this rate.  
3. Maximum usage is based on operating 7 days a week, 24 hours a day, at maximum printing rate with normal  
maintenance and operations activity. IBM does not recommend reaching this monthly maximum on consistent  
basis.  
Enterprise Color Printers  
IBM Printing Systems’ enterprise color printers are web-fed, full-color printers. Table 6 on page 8 lists the  
characteristics for these printers.  
Chapter 1. Introducing IBM Printing Systems Printers  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 6. Enterprise Color Printer Characteristics  
Printer Characteristics  
InfoColor 70  
(3170–002)  
(3170–02D)  
Infoprint Color  
100  
(3170–03D)  
Infoprint Color  
130  
(3170–004)  
Infoprint Color  
130 Plus  
(3170–005)  
Print technology  
Electro-  
Electro-  
Electro-  
Electro-  
photographic  
photographic  
photographic  
photographic  
Datastreams  
PostScript  
Continuous  
1 standard  
1 standard  
n/a  
PostScript  
Continuous  
1 standard  
1 standard  
n/a  
PostScript  
Continuous  
1 standard  
1 standard  
n/a  
IPDS  
Continuous  
1 standard  
1 standard  
n/a  
Form type  
Number of input bins  
Number of output bins  
Manual forms feed  
Envelope printing  
MICR printing  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
no  
no  
no  
no  
Duplex printing  
yes  
yes  
no  
no  
Color selection  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
Printhead resolution  
600 dpi  
600 dpi  
600 dpi  
600 dpi  
Maximum printing rates for letter (8.5 x 11 inches)  
inches per second  
inches per minute  
3.4  
4.8  
6.3  
6.3  
204  
289  
378  
378  
Maximum printing rates for letter in pages per minute1  
1–up landscape (8.5 inches  
long) simplex  
35  
34  
68  
44  
138  
68  
44  
138  
68  
1–up landscape (8.5 inches  
long) duplex  
70  
2–up portrait (11 inches long)  
simplex  
n/a  
52  
2–up portrait (11 inches long)  
duplex  
n/a  
105  
136  
136  
Maximum printing rates for A4 (210 x 297 mm)  
mm per second  
86  
122.5  
7350  
160  
160  
mm per minute  
5160  
9,600  
9,600  
Maximum printing rates for A4 in pages per minute1  
1–up landscape (210 mm  
long) simplex  
35  
34  
68  
44  
138  
n/a  
n/a  
44  
138  
n/a  
n/a  
1–up landscape (210 mm  
long) duplex  
70  
2–up portrait (297 mm long)  
simplex  
n/a  
52  
2–up portrait (297 mm long)  
duplex  
n/a  
105  
Maximum usage in pages per month (duty cycles)2  
Letter: 1–up landscape (8.5  
680,000 duplex  
680,000 duplex  
680,000 duplex  
680,000 duplex  
inches long)  
Letter: 2–up portrait (11  
inches long)  
n/a  
1,050,000 duplex  
1,050,000 duplex  
1,050,000 duplex  
8
Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 6. Enterprise Color Printer Characteristics (continued)  
Printer Characteristics  
InfoColor 70  
(3170–002)  
(3170–02D)  
Infoprint Color  
100  
(3170–03D)  
Infoprint Color  
130  
(3170–004)  
Infoprint Color  
130 Plus  
(3170–005)  
A4: 1–up landscape (210 mm  
long)  
700,000 duplex  
n/a  
700,000 duplex  
700,000 duplex  
700,000 duplex  
A4: 2–up portrait (297 mm  
long)  
1,000,000 duplex  
1,000,000 duplex  
1,000,000 duplex  
1. Maximum printing rate is the maximum number of pages of the indicated size and configuration that can be  
printed at the constant speed of paper movement shown for each printer. Rates for pages of different sizes and  
configuration can be calculated by dividing the form length into the printer speed. Actual printing rate will be less  
if the printer cannot reach this rate due to complexity or density of the data or the ability of the system to deliver  
data at this rate.  
2. Maximum usage is based on operating 7 days a week, 24 hours a day, at maximum printing rate with normal  
maintenance and operations activity. IBM does not recommend reaching this monthly maximum on consistent  
basis.  
Industrial Impact and Non-Impact Printers  
IBM Printing Systems’ industrial impact and non-impact printers are cost-effective, rugged impact and  
non-impact printers that print on a wide variety of media. Table 7 and Table 8 on page 10 lists the  
characteristics for these printers.  
Table 7. Industrial / Impact and Non-Impact Printer Characteristics (1 of 2)  
Printer Characteristics  
4230–xx1  
4230–xx2  
4230–xx3  
4247–A00/001  
4247–002  
4232  
Maximum printing rate: characters per  
second (cps)  
Maximum printing rate: lines per minute  
(lpm)  
Maximum printing rate: inches per second  
(ips)  
375 cps (-xx1)  
480 cps (-xx1)  
600 cps (-xx1)  
700 cps (A00/001)  
400 (002)  
600 cps  
Print technology  
Datastreams  
Impact Dot Matrix  
Impact Dot Matrix  
Impact Dot Matrix  
PPDS, Epson, ASCII,  
SCS, IPDS  
PPDS, Epson, ASCII PPDS, Epson, ASCII,  
SCS, IPDS  
Form type  
Continuous  
Cut-Sheet  
Continuous  
Cut-Sheet  
Continuous  
Cut-Sheet  
Number of input bins  
Number of output bins  
3 standard  
3 optional  
1 standard  
1 standard  
1 standard  
1 standard  
1 standard  
Manual forms feed  
*An Automatic Sheet Feed Device is  
available.  
yes  
yes  
yes*  
Envelope printing  
MICR printing  
n/a  
no  
n/a  
no  
n/a  
no  
Duplex printing  
no  
no  
no  
Color  
no  
no  
no  
Operator-adjustable forms  
Printhead resolution (pels per inch)  
yes  
yes  
yes  
144 X 144  
144 X 144  
144 X 144  
Maximum characters per second (cps) per  
month (duty cycles)  
16,000,000  
16,000,000  
20,000,000  
Chapter 1. Introducing IBM Printing Systems Printers  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9
 
Table 8. Industrial / Impact and Non-Impact Printer Characteristics (2 of 2)  
Printer Characteristics  
6400–050/P50  
6400–010/P10  
6400–015  
4400 Thermal  
Printer  
4400–004  
4400–006  
4400–008  
Infoprint 62  
(4370–002)  
(4370–003)  
Maximum printing rate: characters per second  
(cps)  
Models 004/006  
8 ips at 300 dpi  
10 ips at 203 dpi  
Model 008  
6 ips at 300 dpi  
8 ips at 203 dpi  
500 lpm (050/P50)  
Maximum printing rate: lines per minute (lpm)  
1000 lpm (010/P10)  
n/a  
Maximum printing rate: inches per second (ips)  
1500 lpm (015)  
Print technology  
Datastreams  
Line Matrix  
Thermal  
Light Emitting Diode  
IPDS  
PPDS, Epson, ASCII, ASCII, Code V and  
SCS, IPDS  
IGP, IPDS, SCS  
Form type  
Continuous  
Continuous  
Continuous  
1 standard  
Number of input bins  
Number of output bins  
1 standard  
1 standard  
1 standard  
1 standard  
1 optional  
1 standard  
n/a  
Manual forms feed  
*An Automatic Sheet Feed Device is available.  
n/a  
n/a  
Envelope printing  
MICR printing  
n/a  
no  
n/a  
no  
n/a  
no  
no  
no  
n/a  
Duplex printing  
no  
no  
Color  
no  
no  
Operator-adjustable forms  
Printhead resolution (pels per inch)  
yes  
yes  
203 dpi  
300 dpi  
240 dpi (4370–002)  
300 dpi (4370–003)  
120 X 144  
n/a  
Maximum characters per second (cps) per  
month (duty cycles)  
n/a  
n/a  
Maximum printing rates for letter (8.5 x 11)  
inches per second  
8.8  
n/a  
inches per minute  
528  
Maximum printing rates for letter in pages per minute1  
1–up landscape (8.5 inches long) simplex  
1–up landscape (8.5 inches long) duplex  
2–up portrait 11 inches long (simplex)  
2–up portrait 11 inches long (duplex)  
Maximum printing rates for A4 (210 mm x 297 mm)  
mm per second  
62  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
1574  
mm per minute  
13,411  
Maximum printing rates for A4 in pages per minute1  
10 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 8. Industrial / Impact and Non-Impact Printer Characteristics (2 of 2) (continued)  
Printer Characteristics  
4400 Thermal  
6400–050/P50  
6400–010/P10  
6400–015  
Printer  
Infoprint 62  
(4370–002)  
(4370–003)  
4400–004  
4400–006  
4400–008  
1–up landscape (210 mm long) simplex  
1–up landscape (210 mm long) duplex  
2–up portrait (297 mm long) simplex  
2–up portrait (297 mm long) duplex  
Maximum usage in pages per month (duty cycles)2  
Letter: 1–up landscape (8.5 inches long)  
Letter: 2–up portrait (11 inches long)  
A4: 1–up landscape (210 mm long)  
A4: 2–up portrait (297 mm long)  
64  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
600,000 simplex  
n/a  
600,000 simplex  
n/a  
1. Maximum printing rate is the maximum number of pages of the indicated size and configuration that can be  
printed at the constant speed of paper movement shown for each printer. Rates for pages of different sizes and  
configuration can be calculated by dividing the form length into the printer speed. Actual printing rate will be less  
if the printer cannot reach this rate due to complexity or density of the data or the ability of the system to deliver  
data at this rate.  
2. Maximum usage is based on operating 7 days a week, 24 hours a day, at maximum printing rate with normal  
maintenance and operations activity. IBM does not recommend reaching this monthly maximum on consistent  
basis.  
AFP Font Collection  
The AFP Font Collection provides a comprehensive set of fonts and utility programs that enable you to  
optimize font usage on Advanced Function Printing devices. The fonts provided by this product, or  
transformed using its utilities, can be installed on any IBM operating system, providing consistency across  
platforms and AFP printers. Resident IPDS fonts are supplied for the printers marketed by IBM Printing  
Systems. The single-byte raster and outline fonts shipped with the AFP Font Collection are already marked  
correctly for activating resident fonts and for capturing fonts.  
A raster font is a sequence of dots that form the character. The number of dots per inch that a printer  
generates is called the print resolution, or density. A resolution of 240 pels means that a printer prints 240  
pels per inch both vertically and horizontally, or 57,600 pels per square inch (240 x 240). The ability to  
print at a given pel density is determined by the type of printer. Because IBM fonts are provided for  
specific resolutions, different fonts are available for printers with different resolutions (for example, 240–pel  
and 300–pel printers).  
Outline fonts describe their characters by mathematical formulas rather than by pels. These formulas are  
used by rasterizing software to create bitmap characters based on two variables: resolution and point size.  
This means that a single outline font can offer many print resolutions and point sizes.  
The Font Collection Version 2 product numbers are: 5648-B33 (MVS, VM, and VSE) and 5648-B45 (AIX,  
OS/400, and OS/2). For more information, see the Printing Systems web site at:  
http://www.ibm.com/printers  
Font Technologies  
Resident fonts are installed in the printer and are always available. Their use can significantly decrease  
the amount of data that must be sent to the printer across communication lines. A list of which resident  
fonts are available on the printer can usually be obtained from the printer’s menu.  
Chapter 1. Introducing IBM Printing Systems Printers 11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Downloaded fonts are sent from the print server and generally disappear after the job has finished printing.  
Downloaded fonts can also be “captured” by the printer. Captured fonts automatically become new  
temporary resident fonts, which improves performance on future jobs that use the same fonts. The printer  
manages the captured font library, not the print server.  
Font Support with PSF and Infoprint Manager: Outline, raster, SBCS and DBCS fonts are supported  
by Print Services Facility and Infoprint Manager on most operating systems as download, resident, or  
captured fonts. Table 9 list the font technologies supported by PSF.  
Table 9. Font Support with PSF  
Operating System  
PSF for OS/390  
PSF/MVS  
Download  
yes  
Resident  
yes  
Captured  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
PSF/VSE  
yes  
yes  
yes  
PSF/VM  
yes1  
yes  
no  
PSF/400  
yes  
yes  
yes  
Infoprint Manager for  
Windows NT and Windows  
2000  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
no  
no  
Infoprint Manager for AIX  
1. PSF/VM does not download outline fonts.  
Font Support with IPDS Printers: The following table summarizes the font technologies supported by  
Printing System IPDS printers.  
Table 10. Font Technologies Supported by IPDS Printers  
Printer  
Single-Byte Raster  
Downloaded  
Single-Byte Outline Double-Byte Raster Double-Byte Outline  
Network Printer 12  
Network Printer 17  
Infoprint 20 printer  
Downloaded  
Downloaded  
Downloaded  
Downloaded  
Resident  
Downloaded  
Resident1  
Downloaded  
Downloaded  
Downloaded  
Downloaded  
Downloaded  
Downloaded  
Infoprint 21 printer  
Downloaded  
Resident  
Downloaded  
Resident1  
Infoprint 32 printer  
Infoprint 40 printer  
Downloaded  
Resident  
Downloaded  
Resident1  
Infoprint 60 printer  
Downloaded  
Resident  
Downloaded  
Resident  
Downloaded  
Resident  
Downloaded  
Resident  
Capture  
Capture  
Capture  
Capture  
Infoprint 62 printer  
Downloaded  
Resident  
Capture  
Downloaded  
Resident  
Capture  
Downloaded  
Resident  
Capture  
Downloaded  
Capture  
Infoprint 2000–DP1  
printer  
Downloaded  
Resident  
Capture  
Downloaded  
Resident  
Capture  
Downloaded  
Resident  
Capture  
Downloaded  
Capture  
Infoprint 3000 printers  
Downloaded  
Resident  
Capture  
Downloaded  
Resident  
Capture  
Downloaded  
Resident  
Capture  
Downloaded  
Capture  
12 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 10. Font Technologies Supported by IPDS Printers (continued)  
Printer  
Single-Byte Raster  
Single-Byte Outline Double-Byte Raster Double-Byte Outline  
Infoprint  
4000–IR1/IR2 printer  
Infoprint  
Downloaded  
Resident  
Capture  
Downloaded  
Resident  
Capture  
Downloaded  
Resident  
Capture  
Downloaded  
Capture  
4000–IR3/IR4 printer  
Infoprint 4000–IS1  
printer  
Infoprint 4000–IS2  
printer  
Infoprint  
4000–ID1/ID2 printer  
Infoprint  
Downloaded  
Resident  
Capture  
Downloaded (240 dpi)  
Resident  
Downloaded  
Resident  
Capture  
Downloaded  
Capture  
Capture  
4000–ID3/ID4 printer  
Infoprint  
4000–ID5/ID6 printer  
Infoprint Color 130  
Plus printer  
Downloaded  
Resident  
Capture  
Downloaded  
Resident  
Capture  
Downloaded  
Resident  
Capture  
Downloaded  
Capture  
4230 Printer  
4247 Printer  
6400 Printer  
Resident  
Resident  
Resident  
Resident  
1. With the IPDS DBCS font feature.  
Font Support with PCL Printers: The following table summarizes the font technologies supported by  
Printing System PCL printers.  
Table 11. Font Technologies Supported by PCL Printers  
Printer  
Internal (resident)  
Disk (additional)  
Downloadable (Soft)  
Infoprint Color 8  
Infoprint 12 printer  
Network Printer 12  
Network Printer 17  
Infoprint 20 printer  
Infoprint 21 printer  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
no  
no  
no  
no  
no  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
Infoprint 32 printer  
Infoprint 40 printer  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
Infoprint 60 printer  
Infoprint 2000–NP1/RP1  
printers  
Infoprint 3000 printers  
Font Support with PostScript Printers: The following table summarizes the font technologies supported  
by Printing System PostScript printers.  
Table 12. Font Technologies Supported by PostScript Printers  
Printer  
Internal  
yes  
Downloadable (Soft)  
Infoprint Color 8  
Network Printer 12  
no  
no  
yes  
Chapter 1. Introducing IBM Printing Systems Printers 13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 12. Font Technologies Supported by PostScript Printers (continued)  
Printer  
Internal  
yes  
Downloadable (Soft)  
Network Printer 17  
Infoprint 20 printer  
Infoprint 21 printer  
Infoprint 32 printer  
Infoprint 40 printer  
Infoprint 2000–NP1/RP1 printers  
Infoprint 3000 printers  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
Network Printer Resource Utility  
The Network Printer Resource Utility (NPRU) is an application for Workgroup printers that provides a  
repository (resource inventory) for fonts and overlays (macros) on a workstation with access to an IBM  
printer. Once a font or overlay has been added to the NPRU inventory, it can be downloaded to temporary  
or permanent RAM on the printer or to a Flash or Hard Drive option if available.  
The font formats supported are PCL Intellifonts, TrueType, and PostScript Type1. Fonts and overlays that  
are downloaded are available to workstation applications when the network printer drivers are selected.  
NPRU is a separate program that uses the printer drivers to download.  
See the Setup CD-ROM for individual Workgroup printers for information about the systems that NPRU  
supports.  
IPDS Functions  
Table 13 and Table 14 summarizes the IPDS functions supported by each printer.  
Table 13. Supported IPDS Functions (1 of 2)  
Network Printer  
Infoprint 20  
Infoprint 21  
Infoprint 32  
Infoprint 40  
12  
Network Printer  
17  
Infoprint 60  
Infoprint 70  
N_UP  
no  
no  
no  
yes  
yes  
no  
no  
no  
N_UP Enhanced  
no  
Cut-Sheet Emulation  
Print Quality Selection  
Set Media Size  
no  
no  
no  
no  
yes  
no  
yes  
no  
no  
no  
no  
Select Media Modification  
Media Source by Copy  
Media ID by Name  
no  
no  
no  
no  
yes  
no  
yes  
yes  
yes  
no  
yes  
no  
no  
Media ID by OID  
no  
Infoprint 21 only  
yes  
254  
no  
Maximum Mapped Page Overlay  
Page Overlay Rotation  
Maximum Mapped Page Segment  
Changeable Media Origin  
Logical Page and Object Coloring  
254  
no  
254  
no  
32,511  
yes  
32,511  
yes  
127  
yes  
127  
yes  
127  
yes  
Prints black,  
color of medium,  
or percentage of  
coverage  
no  
no  
no  
14 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 13. Supported IPDS Functions (1 of 2) (continued)  
Network Printer  
Infoprint 20  
Infoprint 21  
Infoprint 32  
Infoprint 40  
12  
Network Printer  
17  
Infoprint 60  
Infoprint 70  
PTOCA PT2  
Set Text Color  
Set Extended Text Color  
yes  
accept  
no  
yes  
accept  
accept  
yes  
accept  
accept  
yes  
accept  
accept  
IM1 Image  
OCA Color  
yes  
accept  
yes  
accept  
yes  
accept  
yes  
accept  
IOCA FS10 Image  
G4 MMR Comp.  
G3 MR Comp.  
G3 MH Comp.  
IBM MMR Comp.  
ABIC Bi-Level Comp.  
RL4  
yes  
yes  
yes  
no  
yes  
no  
yes  
accept  
no  
yes  
no  
yes  
yes  
yes  
no  
yes  
no  
yes  
accept  
no  
yes  
no  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
no  
accept  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
no  
yes  
no  
yes  
accept  
no  
yes  
no  
OCA Color  
Unpadded RIDIC  
Replicate and Trim  
Scale to Fill  
IOCA FS42 and FS45  
no  
no  
no  
no  
GOCA DR2/V0  
OCA Colors  
Process Colors  
Simulate OCA color with pattern  
Simulate highlight color with shading  
Partial Arc  
yes  
accept  
no  
no  
no  
yes  
accept  
accept  
yes  
no  
yes  
yes  
accept  
accept  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
accept  
accept  
yes  
no  
yes  
no  
Box command  
no  
yes  
yes  
yes  
EPS Object  
BCOCA  
no  
no  
no  
no  
See Table 15 on page 17 for more information about BCOCA data and  
these printers.  
FOCA  
See Table 10 on page 12 for more information about FOCA data and these  
printers.  
Table 14. Supported IPDS Functions (2 of 2)  
4230 Printer  
Infoprint  
2000  
Model DP1  
4247 Printer  
4400 Thermal  
Printer  
Infoprint 3000 Infoprint Color  
Infoprint 62  
Infoprint 4000  
130 Plus  
6400 Printer  
N_UP  
yes  
yes  
no  
yes  
yes  
yes  
no  
yes  
yes  
yes  
no  
no  
no  
yes  
yes  
yes  
no  
N_UP Enhanced  
Cut-Sheet Emulation  
Print Quality Selection  
Set Media Size  
no  
no  
yes  
yes  
no  
no  
no  
no  
no  
Select Media Modification  
Media Source by Copy  
Media ID by Name  
Media ID by OID  
no  
yes  
n/a  
yes  
no  
yes  
n/a  
yes  
no  
yes  
n/a  
yes  
no  
yes  
yes  
no  
n/a  
no  
no  
Chapter 1. Introducing IBM Printing Systems Printers 15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 14. Supported IPDS Functions (2 of 2) (continued)  
4230 Printer  
4247 Printer  
4400 Thermal  
Printer  
Infoprint  
2000  
Model DP1  
Infoprint 3000 Infoprint Color  
Infoprint 62  
Infoprint 4000  
130 Plus  
6400 Printer  
Maximum Mapped Page  
Overlay  
32,511  
yes  
32,511  
yes  
32,511  
yes  
254  
no  
32,511  
yes  
Page Overlay Rotation  
Maximum Mapped Page  
Segment  
32,511  
yes  
32,511  
yes  
32,511  
yes  
127  
no  
32,511  
yes  
Changeable Media Origin  
Logical Page and Object  
Coloring  
Prints black,  
color of medium  
or percentage  
coverage  
Prints black, color of medium  
or percentage coverage  
yes  
no  
PTOCA PT2  
Set Text Color  
Set Extended Text Color  
yes  
accept  
accept  
yes  
accept  
accept  
yes  
accept  
accept  
yes  
accept  
no  
yes  
accept  
accept  
IM1 Image  
OCA Color  
yes  
accept  
yes  
accept  
yes  
yes  
yes  
accept  
yes  
accept  
IOCA FS10 Image  
G4 MMR Comp.  
G3 MR Comp.  
G3 MH Comp.  
IBM MMR Comp.  
ABIC Bi-Level Comp.  
RL4  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
no  
accept  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
no  
accept  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
no  
yes  
no  
yes  
no  
no  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
no  
accept  
no  
yes  
yes  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
OCA Color  
Unpadded RIDIC  
Replicate and Trim  
Scale to Fill  
IOCA FS42 Image  
IOCA FS45 Image  
yes  
yes  
no  
no  
no  
no  
GOCA DR2/V0  
OCA Colors  
Process Colors  
Simulate OCA color with  
pattern  
yes  
accept  
accept  
yes  
accept  
accept  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
accept  
no  
yes  
accept  
accept  
yes  
yes  
n/a  
no  
yes  
Simulate highlight color  
with shading  
Partial Arc  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
n/a  
yes  
yes  
no  
no  
no  
yes  
yes  
no  
Box command  
EPS Object  
BCOCA  
FOCA  
no  
no  
no  
no  
no  
See Table 15 on page 17 for more information about BCOCA data and these printers.  
See Table 10 on page 12 for more information about FOCA data and these printers.  
16 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 15. Bar Codes supported by IPDS Printers  
Network Printer 12  
Network Printer 17  
Infoprint 12  
Infoprint 4000  
Infoprint 3000  
Infoprint 60  
Infoprint 62  
Infoprint 70  
Infoprint Color  
130 Plus  
4230 Printer  
4247 Printer  
4400 Printer  
6400 Printer  
Bar Code Type  
Modifier  
Infoprint 20  
Infoprint 21  
Infoprint 32  
Infoprint 40  
X'01' — Code 39 (3–of–9) AIM  
USS-39  
X'01' and X'02'  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
X'02' — MSI (modified Plessey  
code)  
X'01' through X'09'  
X'03' — UPC/CGPC Version A  
X'05' — UPC/CGPC Version E  
X'00'  
X'00'  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
X'06' — UPC – Two Digit  
Supplemental  
X'00'  
X'01' and X'02'  
X'00'  
yes  
no  
yes  
no  
yes  
yes  
yes  
X'06' — UPC – Two Digit  
Supplemental  
X'07' — UPC – Five Digit  
Supplemental  
yes  
yes  
X'07' — UPC – Five Digit  
Supplemental  
X'01' and X'02'  
X'00'  
no  
no  
yes  
yes  
yes  
X'08' — EAN 8 (includes JAN–short)  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
X'09' — EAN 13 (includes  
JAN–standard)  
X'00'  
X'0A' — Industrial 2–of–5  
X'0B' — Matrix 2–of–5  
X'01' and X'02'  
X'01' and X'02'  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
X'0C' — Interleaved 2–of–5, AIM  
USS–1 2/5  
X'01' and X'02'  
X'01' and X'02'  
X'02'  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
no  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
no  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
X'0D' — Codabar, 2–of–7, AIM  
USS–Codabar  
X'11' — Code 128, AIM USS–128  
(includes UCC/EAN–128  
X'16' — EAN Two–digit  
Supplemental  
X'00'  
X'16' — EAN Two–digit  
Supplemental  
X'01'  
X'17' — EAN Five–digit  
Supplemental  
X'00'  
yes  
no  
yes  
no  
X'17' — EAN Five–digit  
Supplemental  
X'01'  
X'18' — POSTNET  
X'00' through X'03'  
X'00'  
yes  
no  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
X'1A' — RM4SCC (Royal Mail, UK)  
X'1A' — RM4SCC (Royal Mail,  
Dutch Kix)  
X'01'  
no  
Infoprint 21  
no  
X'1B' — Japan Postal Bar Code  
Infoprint 20  
Infoprint 21  
Infoprint 32  
Infoprint 40  
X'00' through X'01'  
no  
yes  
Chapter 1. Introducing IBM Printing Systems Printers 17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 15. Bar Codes supported by IPDS Printers (continued)  
Network Printer 12  
Network Printer 17  
Infoprint 12  
Infoprint 4000  
Infoprint 3000  
Infoprint 60  
Infoprint 62  
Infoprint 70  
Infoprint Color  
130 Plus  
4230 Printer  
4247 Printer  
4400 Printer  
6400 Printer  
Bar Code Type  
Modifier  
Infoprint 20  
Infoprint 21  
Infoprint 32  
Infoprint 40  
X'1F' — Australia Postal Bar Code  
X'01' through X'08'  
no  
Infoprint 20  
Infoprint 70  
Data Streams  
The following table shows which platforms have the ability to convert data streams from one format to  
another. This allows output which otherwise would not be printable on a particular device to be converted  
into a data stream that the printer understands.  
Keep in mind when using data stream transforms that some loss of fidelity may occur. Also, performance  
and storage considerations should be taken into account because often the transformed data stream will  
consist entirely of image, which is larger than the originating file.  
Note: Transforms that are functionally the same may not be identical from platform.  
Table 16. Data Stream Transforms  
Infoprint Server  
Infoprint Manager  
for AIX (V3R2)  
Infoprint Manager  
for NT (V1R1)  
AS/400 Host Print  
Transform (V4R4)  
Transform  
Transforms (OS/390  
V2R8)1  
AFP to PCL  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
no  
yes  
yes  
yes  
no  
yes  
no  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
no  
AFP to PostScript  
AFP to PDF  
no  
PCL to AFP  
no  
PostScript to AFP  
PDF to AFP  
yes  
yes  
no  
no  
no  
SAP to AFP  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
no  
TIFF to AFP  
yes  
no  
AFP to TIFF  
no  
SCS to PCL  
no  
no  
no  
Line data to AFP  
yes  
yes  
yes  
1. Requires Infoprint Server for OS/390  
Attachment Modes for Supported Printers  
The following tables represent the datastream capabilities by attachment type currently available for the  
Printing Systems product line. These capabilities are enhanced on a regular basis, so it is recommended  
that you refer to current documentation when considering new printers and attachments. Additional  
servers, software products, and datastream transforms will also supplement these tables with other  
connectivity options. Many printers also support drivers available under other platforms (not listed in these  
tables) such as OS/2, MacOS, Solaris, SCO-UNIX, HP-UX, Novell NetWare, Netware, and Linux. Some of  
the attachment modes on various platforms will require additional software. For example, driving IPDS  
printers from any platform requires PSF or Infoprint Manager, and driving PCL or PostScript from OS/390  
requires Infoprint Server. Please reference the IBM website at http://www.ibm.com/printers for specific  
software product requirements and up-to-date attachment information.  
18 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Attachment Modes for Workgroup Laser Printers  
Table 17. Attachment Modes for the Infoprint Color 8  
OS/390  
VM  
VSE  
AS/400  
AIX  
Windows  
Ethernet or  
Token Ring  
PostScript, PCL  
PostScript,  
PCL  
PostScript,  
PCL  
PostScript,  
PCL  
PostScript,  
PCL  
PostScript,  
PCL  
PostScript,  
PCL  
PC Parallel  
Table 18. Attachment Modes for the Infoprint 12 Printer  
OS/390  
VM  
VSE  
AS/400  
AIX  
Windows  
Ethernet or  
Token Ring  
PostScript, PCL  
PostScript,  
PCL  
PostScript,  
PCL  
PostScript,  
PCL  
PC Serial  
PostScript,  
PCL  
PostScript,  
PCL  
PC Parallel  
Table 19. Attachment Modes for the Network Printer 12, Network Printer 17, Infoprint 20, Infoprint 32, and Infoprint 40  
Printers  
OS/390  
VM  
VSE  
AS/400  
AIX  
Windows  
IPDS, PostScript, IPDS  
PCL  
IPDS  
IPDS,  
PostScript,  
PCL, Pages*  
PostScript,  
IPDS, PCL  
PostScript,  
IPDS, PCL  
Ethernet or  
Token Ring  
PostScript,  
PCL  
PCL, Pages*, PCL, Pages*,  
PC Parallel  
PostScript,  
ESC/P*  
PostScript,  
ESC/P*  
IPDS, SCS,  
DSC, DSE  
IPDS, SCS,  
DSC, DSE  
IPDS, SCS,  
DSC, DSE  
Coaxial  
Twin-axial  
IPDS, SCS  
* Pages and ESC/P support is available only in Japan.  
Table 20. Attachment Modes for the Infoprint 21 Printer  
OS/390  
VM  
VSE  
AS/400  
AIX  
Windows  
IPDS, PostScript, IPDS  
PCL  
IPDS  
IPDS,  
PostScript,  
PCL  
IPDS, PCL,  
PostScript  
IPDS, PCL,  
PostScript  
Ethernet or  
Token Ring  
PostScript,  
PCL  
PCL,  
PostScript  
PCL,  
PostScript  
PC Parallel  
IPDS, SCS,  
DSC, DSE  
IPDS, SCS,  
DSC, DSE  
IPDS, SCS,  
DSC, DSE  
Coaxial  
Twin-axial  
IPDS, SCS  
* Pages and ESC/P support is available only in Japan.  
Chapter 1. Introducing IBM Printing Systems Printers 19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Attachment Modes for Cut Sheet Production Printers  
Table 21. Attachment Modes for the Infoprint 60 Printer  
OS/390  
VM  
VSE  
AS/400  
AIX  
Windows  
Ethernet or  
Token Ring  
IPDS, PCL  
IPDS  
IPDS  
IPDS  
IPDS  
IPDS, PCL  
IPDS, PCL  
IPDS, PCL  
Parallel  
IPDS  
Channel  
Table 22. Attachment Modes for the Infoprint 70 Printer  
OS/390 VM  
IPDS  
VSE  
AS/400  
AIX  
Windows  
Ethernet or  
Token Ring  
IPDS  
IPDS  
IPDS  
Parallel  
IPDS  
Channel  
Table 23. Attachment Modes for the Infoprint 2000–NP1 and Infoprint 2000–RP1 Printers  
OS/390  
VM  
VSE  
AS/400  
AIX  
Windows  
PostScript, PCL,  
PDF  
PostScript,  
PCL  
PostScript,  
PCL, PDF,  
KDKIMAGE  
PostScript,  
PCL, PDF  
Ethernet or  
Token Ring  
Table 24. Attachment Modes for the Infoprint 2000–DP1 Printer  
OS/390  
VM  
VSE  
AS/400  
AIX  
Windows  
PostScript, PCL,  
Xerox, DJDE,  
Metacode, PDF  
PostScript,  
PCL  
PostScript,  
PCL Xerox,  
DJDE,  
PostScript,  
PCL Xerox,  
DJDE,  
Ethernet or  
Token Ring  
Metacode,  
PDF,  
Metacode,  
PDF  
KDKimage  
PostScript, PCL,  
Xerox, DJDE,  
Metacode, PDF  
Parallel  
Channel  
Table 25. Attachment Modes for the Infoprint 2000–DP1 Printer with AFCCU Feature  
OS/390 VM VSE AS/400  
IPDS IPDS  
AIX  
Windows  
Ethernet or  
Token Ring  
IPDS  
IPDS  
Parallel  
Channel  
IPDS  
IPDS  
ESCON  
FDDI  
IPDS  
Attachment Modes for Coninuous Form Production Printers  
Table 26. Attachment Modes for the Infoprint 3000 Printers  
OS/390  
IPDS  
VM  
VSE  
AS/400  
IPDS  
AIX  
Windows  
Ethernet or  
Token Ring  
IPDS  
IPDS  
IPDS  
20 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 26. Attachment Modes for the Infoprint 3000 Printers (continued)  
OS/390 VM VSE  
IPDS  
AS/400  
AIX  
Windows  
Parallel  
IPDS  
IPDS  
IPDS  
IPDS  
Channel  
ESCON  
FDDI  
IPDS  
IPDS  
IPDS  
Table 27. Attachment Modes for the Infoprint 4000 Printers  
OS/390 VM VSE  
IPDS  
AS/400  
IPDS  
AIX  
Windows  
IPDS  
Ethernet or  
Token Ring  
IPDS  
IPDS  
IPDS  
Parallel  
IPDS  
IPDS  
IPDS  
IPDS  
Channel  
ESCON  
FDDI  
IPDS  
Attachment Modes for Enterprise Color Printers  
Table 28. Attachment Modes for the InfoColor 70, Infoprint Color 100, and Infoprint Color 130 Printers  
OS/390  
VM  
VSE  
AS/400  
AIX  
Windows  
Ethernet or  
Token Ring  
PostScript  
PostScript  
PostScript  
Table 29. Attachment Modes Infoprint Color 130 Plus Printer  
OS/390 VM VSE  
IPDS  
AS/400  
AIX  
Windows  
Ethernet or  
Token Ring  
IPDS  
FICON  
IPDS  
Attachment Mode for Industrial/Impact and Non-Impact Printers  
Table 30. Attachment Modes for the 4230 Printer  
OS/390  
VM  
VSE  
AS/400  
AIX  
Windows  
PPDS, Epson,  
ASCII, SCS,  
IPDS  
PPDS, Epson,  
ASCII, SCS,  
IPDS  
PPDS, Epson,  
ASCII, SCS,  
IPDS  
PPDS, Epson, PPDS, Epson, PPDS, Epson,  
Ethernet or  
Token Ring  
ASCII, SCS,  
IPDS  
ASCII, SCS  
ASCII, SCS  
PPDS, Epson, PPDS, Epson, PPDS, Epson,  
ASCII ASCII ASCII  
PC Serial  
PPDS, Epson, PPDS, Epson, PPDS, Epson,  
PC Parallel  
ASCII  
ASCII  
ASCII  
SCS, IPDS,  
DSC, DSE  
SCS, IPDS,  
DSC, DSE  
SCS, IPDS,  
DSC, DSE  
Coaxial  
Twin-axial  
SCS, IPDS  
Chapter 1. Introducing IBM Printing Systems Printers 21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 31. Attachment Modes for the 4232 Printer  
OS/390  
VM  
PPDS, Epson, PPDS, Epson, PPDS, Epson, PPDS, Epson, PPDS, Epson,  
ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII  
PPDS, Epson, PPDS, Epson, PPDS, Epson,  
ASCII ASCII ASCII  
PPDS, Epson, PPDS, Epson, PPDS, Epson,  
ASCII ASCII ASCII  
VSE  
AS/400  
AIX  
Windows  
Ethernet or  
Token Ring  
PPDS, Epson,  
ASCII  
PC Serial  
PC Parallel  
Table 32. Attachment Modes for the 4247 Printer  
OS/390  
VM  
VSE  
AS/400  
PPDS,  
Epson, ASCII, ASCII  
IPDS  
AIX  
Windows  
PPDS, Epson,  
ASCII, IPDS  
PPDS, Epson,  
ASCII, IPDS  
PPDS, Epson,  
ASCII, IPDS  
PPDS, Epson, PPDS, Epson,  
Ethernet or  
Token Ring  
ASCII  
PPDS,  
Epson, ASCII ASCII  
PPDS, Epson, PPDS, Epson,  
ASCII  
PC Serial  
PPDS, PPDS, Epson, PPDS, Epson,  
PC Parallel  
Epson, ASCII ASCII  
ASCII  
PPDS, Epson,  
ASCII, SCS,  
IPDS, DSC, DSE IPDS, DSC,  
DSE  
PPDS, Epson,  
ASCII, SCS,  
PPDS, Epson,  
ASCII, SCS,  
IPDS, DSC,  
DSE  
Coaxial  
PPDS,  
Twin-axial  
Epson, ASCII,  
SCS, IPDS  
Table 33. Attachment Modes for the 4400 Thermal Printer  
OS/390  
VM  
VSE  
AS/400  
AIX  
Windows  
Ethernet or  
Token Ring  
ASCII, IPDS,  
CodeV, IGP  
ASCII, IPDS,  
CodeV, IGP  
ASCII, IPDS, ASCII, IPDS,  
ASCII, IPDS,  
CodeV, IGP  
CodeV, IGP  
CodeV, IGP  
ASCII,  
CodeV, IGP  
ASCII, CodeV, ASCII, CodeV,  
IGP IGP  
PC Parallel  
Coaxial  
ASCII, IPDS,  
CodeV, IGP  
ASCII, CodeV,  
IGP  
ASCII, CodeV,  
IGP  
ASCII, IPDS,  
CodeV, IGP  
Twin-axial  
Table 34. Attachment Modes for the 6400 Printer  
OS/390  
VM  
VSE  
AS/400  
AIX  
Windows  
PPDS, Epson,  
ASCII, IPDS,  
CodeV, IGP  
PPDS, Epson, PPDS, Epson, PPDS, Epson, PPDS, Epson, PPDS, Epson,  
Ethernet or  
Token Ring  
ASCII, IPDS,  
CodeV, IGP  
ASCII, IPDS,  
CodeV, IGP  
ASCII, IPDS,  
CodeV, IGP  
ASCII, IPDS,  
CodeV, IGP  
ASCII, IPDS,  
CodeV, IGP  
PPDS, Epson, PPDS, Epson, PPDS, Epson,  
ASCII, CodeV, ASCII, CodeV, ASCII, CodeV,  
PC Parallel  
Coaxial  
IGP  
IGP  
IGP  
PPDS, Epson,  
ASCII, SCS,  
IPDS, CodeV,  
IGP  
PPDS, Epson, PPDS, Epson,  
ASCII, SCS,  
IPDS, CodeV,  
IGP  
ASCII, SCS,  
IPDS, CodeV,  
IGP  
22 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 34. Attachment Modes for the 6400 Printer (continued)  
OS/390 VM VSE  
AS/400  
AIX  
Windows  
PPDS, Epson,  
ASCII, SCS,  
IPDS, CodeV,  
IGP  
Twin-axial  
Table 35. Attachment Modes for the Infoprint 62 Printer  
OS/390 VM  
IPDS  
VSE  
AS/400  
AIX  
Windows  
IPDS  
Ethernet or  
Token Ring  
IPDS  
IPDS  
IPDS  
IPDS  
IPDS  
IPDS  
IPDS  
IPDS  
Parallel  
IPDS  
IPDS  
Channel  
ESCON  
Chapter 1. Introducing IBM Printing Systems Printers 23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
24 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2. Network Printer 12 (4312)  
The Network Printer 12 is a desktop, cut-sheet printer that uses laser and electrophotographic technology  
to print text, images, graphics, and bar codes.  
Figure 1. Network Printer 12 Printer  
Table 36 summarizes the printer characteristics for the Network Printer 12.  
Table 36. Network Printer 12 Characteristics  
Printer Characteristic  
Maximum printing rate  
Print technology  
Characteristic Value  
12 pages per minute  
Laser  
Datastreams  
IPDS, SCS, DSC, Adobe PostScript Level 2, PCL-5e,  
Pages*, and ESC/P*  
*Pages and ESC/P support is available only in Japan.  
Form type  
Input bins  
Cut Sheet  
Standard: Primary tray up to 250 sheets; auxiliary tray up  
to 80 sheets or 10 envelopes  
Optional: Secondary tray up to 500 sheets; optional  
envelope tray up to 50 envelopes  
Output bins  
Standard: Top output 250 sheets (face down, collated)  
Optional: Rear output tray 80 sheets (face up, uncollated)  
Finisher attachments  
Manual forms feed  
n/a  
yes  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 36. Network Printer 12 Characteristics (continued)  
Printer Characteristic  
Characteristic Value  
Envelope printing  
yes  
MICR printing  
*IBM Business Partners may have MICR solutions for  
this printer.  
no*  
Duplex printing  
yes (automatic duplex printing is optional)  
Color  
no  
no  
Adjust print-quality levels  
Printhead resolution  
600 dots-per-inch  
35,000  
Maximum impressions per month (duty cycle)  
Printable Area  
The Network Printer 12 can print from edge-to-edge; however, print quality is only guaranteed to within 4  
mm of all paper edges. For card stock and envelopes, the print quality is guaranteed only within 6 mm of  
the leading edge. For best possible print quality, edge-to-edge printing is not recommended. Figure 2  
shows an example of the printable area.  
To p  
Media  
Origin  
(Position 0.0)  
Printable  
Media  
Area  
Origin  
Printable  
(Position 0.0)  
Area  
Portrait  
Landscape  
Figure 2. Printable Area on the Network Printer 12  
Media Specifications  
The Network Printer 12 accepts the following media:  
Media types:  
Paper, card stock, labels, transparencies, recycled paper and envelopes  
Sheet sizes:  
A6 (4.1 inches x 5.8 inches) to legal (8.5 inches x 14 inches)  
Envelope sizes:  
Com-10, C5, DL and Monarch  
Media weights:  
16 to 117 lbs. (60 to 190 g/m2)  
26 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Attachments  
PC Parallel and RS-232 Serial Interface:  
Table 37. PC Parallel and RS-232 Serial Interface  
Protocol  
Data Stream  
Operating System  
PC Parallel  
PCL5e, PostScript 2  
Windows 3.1, 3.11, 95  
NT 3.51/4.0  
Windows for Workgroups 3.11  
AIX 3.2.5, 4.1  
PC Serial  
AFPDS, SCS to PCL5e  
OS/400(R) 3.2  
HPT Facility  
Optional Token-Ring and Ethernet:  
Table 38. Optional Token-Ring and Ethernet  
Protocol  
Data Stream  
Operating System  
IPX/SPX  
PCL5e, PostScript 2  
Novell NetWare 2.15, 2.2, 3.0, 3.1,  
3.11, 3.12, 4.0, 4.01, 4.1 (NEST 1.0)  
TCP/IP  
TCP/IP  
PCL5e, PostScript 2  
Novell NetWare 3.11, 3.12, 4.0, 4.01,  
4.1  
IBM LAN Server 2.0 and above  
Windows NT 3.51/4.0  
AIX 3.2.5, 4.1  
IPDS  
Infoprint Manager  
PSF/MVS 2.2  
PSF for OS/390  
PSF/400 3.1, 3.6, 3.2  
TCP/IP  
PCL5e  
OS/400 3.1 and later  
NETBIOS/NETBEUI  
PCL5e, PostScript 2  
IBM LAN Server 1.3 and above  
Microsoft LAN Manager 2.O and  
above  
TokenTalk  
EtherTalk  
PostScript 2  
PostScript 2  
Apple System 7  
Apple System 7  
Optional Coax Interface:  
Table 39. Optional Coax Interface  
Protocol  
NDS  
NDS  
NDS  
NDS  
NDS  
NDS  
NDS  
NDS  
NDS  
NDS  
Data Stream  
IPDS  
Operating System  
PSF/MVS 2.2, PSF for OS/390  
PSF/VSE 2.2.1  
IPDS  
IPDS  
PSF/VM 2.1.1, 2.1.0 + maintenance  
Infoprint Server  
GDDM 2.3  
SCS, DSC, DSE  
IPDS  
SCS, DSC, DSE  
IPDS  
GDDM 2.3  
VM RSCS 2.2  
SCS, DSC, DSE  
SCS, DSC, DSE  
SCS, DSC, DSE  
VM RSCS 2.2  
JES328X 2.0  
VTAM  
Chapter 2. Network Printer 12 (4312) 27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 39. Optional Coax Interface (continued)  
Protocol  
NDS  
Data Stream  
Operating System  
CICS/MVS  
SCS  
SCS  
NDS  
CICS/VSE  
Optional Twinax Interface:  
Table 40. Optional Twinax Interface  
Protocol  
Arctic  
Arctic  
Arctic  
Arctic  
Arctic  
Arctic  
Arctic  
Data Stream  
IPDS  
Operating System  
PSF/400 3.1, 3.6, 3.2  
OS/400 3.6, 3.1, 3.0.5, 2.3, 2.2  
OS/400 3.2  
IPDS  
IPDS  
SCS  
OS/400 3.6, 3.1, 3.0.5, 2.3, 2.2  
OS/400 3.2  
SCS  
SCS, IPDS  
SCS, IPDS  
SSP Rel. 7.1  
OS/400 3.6 with SSP Rel. 7.5  
28 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3. Network Printer 17 (4317)  
This section describes the Network Printer 17 printer characteristics and PSF-supported functions. The  
Network Printer 17 is a desktop, cut-sheet printer that uses laser and electrophotographic technology to  
print text, images, graphics, and bar codes.  
Figure 3. Network Printer 17 Printer  
Table 41 summarizes the printer characteristics and PSF-supported functions for the Network Printer 17  
printers.  
Table 41. Network Printer 17 Characteristics  
Printer Characteristic  
Maximum printing rate  
Print technology  
Characteristic Value  
17 pages per minute  
Laser  
Datastreams  
IPDS, SCS, DSC, Adobe PostScript Level 2, PCL-5e,  
Pages*, and ESC/P*  
* Pages and ESC/P support is available only in Japan.  
Form type  
Cut Sheet  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 41. Network Printer 17 Characteristics (continued)  
Printer Characteristic  
Characteristic Value  
Number of input bins  
Standard: Primary tray up to 250 sheets; auxiliary tray up  
to 100 sheets or 10 envelopes  
Optional: 2 secondary trays up to 500 sheets each (total  
1000); envelope tray up to 75 envelopes  
Number of output bins  
Standard: Top output 250 sheets (face down, collated)  
Optional: Offset jogger up to 500 sheets; 10 bin secure  
mailbox up to 450 sheets  
Finisher attachments  
Manual forms feed  
Envelope printing  
n/a  
yes  
yes  
MICR printing  
*IBM Business Partners may have MICR solutions for this  
printer.  
no*  
Duplex printing  
yes (automatic duplex printing is optional)  
Color  
no  
no  
Adjust print-quality levels  
Printhead resolution  
600 dots-per-inch  
65,000  
Maximum impressions per month (duty cycle)  
Printable Area  
can print from edge-to-edge; however, print quality is only guaranteed to within 4 mm of all paper edges.  
For card stock and envelopes, the print quality is guaranteed only within 6 mm of the leading edge. For  
best possible print quality, edge-to-edge printing is not recommended. Figure 4 shows an example of the  
printable area of a form.  
To p  
Media  
Origin  
(Position 0.0)  
Printable  
Media  
Area  
Origin  
Printable  
(Position 0.0)  
Area  
Portrait  
Landscape  
Figure 4. Printable Area on the Network Printer 17  
Media Specifications  
The Network Printer 17 accepts the following media:  
Media types:  
Paper, card stock, labels, transparencies, recycled paper and envelopes  
Sheet sizes:  
A6 (4.1 inches x 5.8 inches) to legal (8.5 inches x 14 inches)  
30 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Envelope sizes:  
Com-10, C5, DL and Monarch  
Media weights:  
16 to 117 lbs. (60 to 190 g/m2)  
Attachments  
PC Parallel and RS-232 Serial Interface:  
Table 42. PC Parallel and RS-232 Serial Interface  
Protocol  
Data Stream  
Operating System  
PC Parallel  
PCL5e, PostScript 2  
Windows 3.1, 3.11, 95  
NT 3.51/4.0  
Windows for Workgroups 3.11  
AIX 3.2.5, 4.1  
PC Serial  
AFPDS, SCS to PCL5e  
OS/400(R) 3.2  
HPT Facility  
Optional Token-Ring and Ethernet:  
Table 43. Optional Token-Ring and Ethernet  
Protocol  
Data Stream  
Operating System  
IPX/SPX  
PCL5e, PostScript 2  
Novell NetWare 2.15, 2.2, 3.0, 3.1,  
3.11, 3.12, 4.0, 4.01, 4.1 (NEST 1.0)  
TCP/IP  
TCP/IP  
PCL5e, PostScript 2  
Novell NetWare 3.11, 3.12, 4.0, 4.01,  
4.1  
IBM LAN Server 2.0 and above  
Windows NT 3.51/4.0  
AIX 3.2.5, 4.1  
IPDS  
PSF/MVS 2.2  
PSF for OS/390  
Infoprint Manager  
PSF/400 3.1, 3.6, 3.2  
TCP/IP  
PCL5e  
OS/400 3.1 and later  
NETBIOS/NETBEUI  
PCL5e, PostScript 2  
Microsoft LAN Manager 2.O and  
above  
IBM LAN Server 1.3 and above  
TokenTalk  
EtherTalk  
PostScript 2  
PostScript 2  
Apple System 7  
Apple System 7  
Optional Coax Interface:  
Table 44. Optional Coax Interface  
Protocol  
NDS  
Data Stream  
IPDS  
Operating System  
PSF/MVS 2.2, PSF for OS/390  
PSF/VSE 2.2.1  
NDS  
IPDS  
NDS  
IPDS  
PSF/VM 2.1.1, 2.1.0 + maintenance  
Infoprint Server  
NDS  
SCS, DSC, DSE  
IPDS  
NDS  
GDDM 2.3  
NDS  
SCS, DSC, DSE  
GDDM 2.3  
Chapter 3. Network Printer 17 (4317) 31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 44. Optional Coax Interface (continued)  
Protocol  
NDS  
Data Stream  
Operating System  
VM RSCS 2.2  
VM RSCS 2.2  
JES328X 2.0  
VTAM  
IPDS  
NDS  
SCS, DSC, DSE  
SCS, DSC, DSE  
SCS, DSC, DSE  
SCS  
NDS  
NDS  
NDS  
CICS/MVS  
NDS  
SCS  
CICS/VSE  
Optional Twinax Interface:  
Table 45. Optional Twinax Interface  
Protocol  
Arctic  
Arctic  
Arctic  
Arctic  
Arctic  
Arctic  
Arctic  
Data Stream  
IPDS  
Operating System  
PSF/400 3.1, 3.6, 3.2  
OS/400 3.6, 3.1, 3.0.5, 2.3, 2.2  
OS/400 3.2  
IPDS  
IPDS  
SCS  
OS/400 3.6, 3.1, 3.0.5, 2.3, 2.2  
OS/400 3.2  
SCS  
SCS, IPDS  
SCS, IPDS  
SSP Rel. 7.1  
OS/400 3.6 with SSP Rel. 7.5  
32 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4. Infoprint Color 8 Printer (4308)  
The Infoprint Color 8 printer is a high-quality desktop, cut-sheet color printer that uses laser and  
electrophotographic technology to print text, images, graphics, and bar codes in 600 dpi color and  
monochrome.  
Figure 5. Infoprint Color 8 Printer  
Table 46 summarizes the printer characteristics for the Infoprint Color 8 printer.  
Table 46. Infoprint Color 8 Printer Characteristics  
Printer Characteristic  
Maximum printing rate  
Print technology  
Datastreams  
Characteristic Value  
8 pages per minute  
Laser  
PCL and PostScript  
Cut Sheet  
Form type  
Number of input bins  
Standard: Primary tray up to 500 sheets; Manual Feed  
Input up to 100 sheets  
Optional: Secondary tray up to 500 sheets  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 46. Infoprint Color 8 Printer Characteristics (continued)  
Printer Characteristic  
Characteristic Value  
Number of output bins  
Standard: Document stacker up to 250 sheets, face-down  
stacking; Special Media Stacker up to 100 sheets for  
special printing, face-up stacking  
Finisher attachments  
Manual forms feed  
Envelope printing  
n/a  
yes  
no  
MICR printing  
*IBM Business Partners may have MICR solutions for this  
printer.  
no*  
Duplex printing  
yes (manual)  
Color  
yes  
no  
Adjust print-quality levels  
Printhead resolution  
600 dots-per-inch  
25,000  
Maximum impressions per month (duty cycle)  
Printable Area  
The Infoprint Color 8 can print from edge-to-edge; however, print quality is only guaranteed to within 4 mm  
of all paper edges. For card stock and envelopes, the print quality is guaranteed only within 6 mm of the  
leading edge. For best possible print quality, edge-to-edge printing is not recommended. Figure 6 shows  
an example of the printable area of a page.  
To p  
Media  
Origin  
(Position 0.0)  
Printable  
Media  
Area  
Origin  
Printable  
(Position 0.0)  
Area  
Portrait  
Landscape  
Figure 6. Printable Area on the Infoprint Color 8 printer  
Selecting the Printing Medium  
The Infoprint Color 8 printer are cut-sheet printers with several media sources, depending on the model  
and options selected.  
To select the printing medium, use the Device Settings tab of the Properties menu of your printer driver.  
Media Size and Configuration  
The media loaded for your printer must match the media size in the printer configuration. If these sizes do  
not match, a printer error code indicates that this mismatch must be corrected by either changing the  
media at the printer or by changing the configuration to match the media.  
34 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Media Specifications  
The Infoprint Color 8 accepts the following media:  
Media types:  
High-quality electrophotographic copier/printer paper; labels, transparencies, and card stock  
designed for laser printers  
Sheet sizes:  
v A6 (105 x 148 mm) to A4 (210 x 297 mm)  
v Letter (8.5 inches x 11 inches) to Legal 14 (8.5 inches x 14. inches)  
v Custom sizes: 3.5″ - 8.5 inches x 5.5 inches - 14 inches (86.4 mm - 216 mm x 140 mm - 355.6  
mm) from Manual Feed Input only  
Media weights:  
v 17 to 28 lbs. (64 to 105 g/m2) standard and optional trays  
v 20 to 44 lbs. (75 to 165 g/m2) manual feed input  
Attachments  
Infoprint Color 8 printer supports the following:  
Drivers:  
Table 47. Supported Drivers on the Infoprint Color 8 Printer  
Driver Name  
Operating System Supported  
Windows for PCL 5c  
Windows 3.x/95/98 (models 001, 002)  
Windows 95/98 (model 003)  
Windows NT for PCL 5c  
Windows NT 4.01  
Windows for PostScript 2/3  
Windows 3.x/95/98 with Heidleberg color management  
(models 001, 002)  
Windows 95/98 (model 003)  
Windows NT for PostScript 2/3  
Windows NT 4.01 with Heidleberg color management  
(models 001, 002)  
Windows NT 4.01 (model 003)  
OS/2 PostScript 2  
OS/2 2.11, Warp (models 001, 002)  
AIX 4.1 and higher  
AIX PCL 5c and PostScript 2/3  
Macintosh PostScript 2/3  
MacOS 7.5 and higher  
Solaris 2.5 and higher  
Sun Solaris PCL 5c and PostScript 2/3  
SCO-UNIX PCL 5c and PostScript 2/3  
SCO-UNIX OPENDESKTOP 3, SCO-UNIX  
OPENSERVER 5, SCO UNIX 3.2V4.2  
HP-UX PCL 5c and PostScript 2  
HP-UX 10.x and higher  
1. Follow-ons to Windows NT 4.0 will be supported.  
Network Operating Systems  
Table 48. Supported Network Operating Systems on the Infoprint Color 8 Printer. Description  
Protocol  
Datastream  
Operating System  
IPX/SPX  
PostScript, PCL 5c  
Novell NetWare 3.11, 3.12, 4.0, 4.01,  
4.1, 5  
1
TCP/IP  
PostScript, PCL 5c  
PostScript, PCL 5c  
NetWare 3.12 and 4.11  
OS/2 2.11, Warp  
IPX/SPX  
NetWare 3.12 and 4.11  
Chapter 4. Infoprint Color 8 Printer (4308) 35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 48. Supported Network Operating Systems on the Infoprint Color 8 Printer (continued). Description  
Protocol  
Datastream  
Operating System  
DLC  
PostScript, PCL 5c  
Windows 95/98, Windows NT 4.0  
(models 001/002)  
NETBEUI  
PostScript, PCL 5c  
Windows 95/98, Windows NT 4.0  
(model 003)  
TCP/IP  
PostScript, PCL 5c  
PostScript, PCL 5c  
Windows NT 4.0  
LPR/LPD  
AIX 4.1 and higher  
Solaris 2.5 and higher  
SCO UNIX 2.5 and higher  
HP-UX 10.x and higher  
1. Novell genuine NDPS gateway supported.  
AS/400  
Infoprint Color 8 is supported as a Workstation Customization Object under the Host Print Transform  
(HPT) facility of OS/400 V3.2. HPT transforms the AFPDS or SCS data stream to ASCII for printing to  
AS/400 ASCII emulator products with a parallel attached printer including:  
v PC or PS/2 running the IBM enhanced 5250 emulation program  
v PC or PS/2 running PC Support/400 or Client Access/400  
v Infowindow II displays (3477/3487)  
The ASCII data stream can also be sent to this printer when attached directly to a Token-Ring or Ethernet  
LAN via the OS/400 TCP/IP Line Printer Requester (LPR) and Line Printer Daemon (LPD).  
IBM Infoprint Manager  
The Infoprint Color 8 printer is supported under IBM’s Infoprint Manager through PCL 5c print transform.  
36 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5. Infoprint 12 Printer (4912)  
The Infoprint 12 is a desktop, cut-sheet printer that uses laser and electrophotographic technology to print  
text, images, graphics, and bar codes.  
Figure 7. Infoprint 12 Printer  
Table 49 summarizes the printer characteristics for the Infoprint 12.  
Table 49. Infoprint 12 Characteristics  
Printer Characteristic  
Maximum printing rate  
Print technology  
Datastreams  
Characteristic Value  
12 pages per minute  
Laser  
PostScript 3 and PCL 6  
Cut Sheet  
Form type  
Number of input bins  
Standard: Primary tray up to 250 sheets; auxiliary tray up  
to 100 sheets  
Optional tray up to 550 sheets or 40 envelopes  
Number of output bins  
Finisher attachments  
Standard: Main bin up to 250 sheets; rear exit tray up to  
100 sheets  
n/a  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 49. Infoprint 12 Characteristics (continued)  
Printer Characteristic  
Characteristic Value  
Manual forms feed  
yes  
yes  
Envelope printing  
MICR printing  
*IBM Business Partners may have MICR solutions for this  
printer.  
no*  
Duplex printing  
Color  
yes (manual duplex printing is standard)  
no  
no  
Adjust print-quality levels  
Printhead resolution  
300 dots-per-inch  
600 dots-per-inch  
1,200 dots-per-inch  
Maximum impressions per month (duty cycle)  
20,000  
Printable Area  
The printable area is up to 0.157 inch (4 mm) from the edge (top, bottom, left, and right) for a sheet of  
paper and 0.394 inch (10 mm) from the edge (top, bottom, left, and right) for envelopes.  
8.18 inches  
0.157 inch  
0.157 inch  
0.157 inch  
Top  
Printable  
Area  
10.167 inches  
0.157 inch  
Figure 8. Printable Area on the Infoprint 12  
Media Size and Configuration  
The media loaded for your printer must match the media size in the printer configuration. If these sizes do  
not match, a printer error code indicates that this mismatch must be corrected by either changing the  
media at the printer or by changing the configuration to match the media.  
Media Specifications  
The Infoprint 12 accepts the following media:  
Media types:  
Paper, card stock, labels, transparencies, recycled paper and envelopes  
Sheet sizes:  
A6 (4.1 inches x 5.8 inches) to legal (8.5 inches x 14 inches), Custom forms sizes from 3 inches x  
5.8 inches (76.2 mm x 127 mm) to 8.5 inches x 14 inches (215.9 mm x 355.6 mm) to 105 gsm)  
38 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Envelope sizes:  
Com-10, C5, DL and Monarch  
Media weights:  
v Copier/xerographic papers: 16 to 28 lbs. (60 to 105 gsm)  
v Cardstock:16 to 43 lbs. (60 to 163 gsm)  
v Envelopes: 16 to 28 lbs. (60 to 105 gsm)  
Attachments  
Printer Attachment Interfaces  
Infoprint 12 has the following attachment interfaces as standard:  
v IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface (level I electronics with a Type B connector).  
v USB (Version 1.0/1.1)  
Infoprint 12 supports port switching between the parallel, USB, and optional Fast Ethernet ports.  
Attachments/Operating System Support  
Table 50. Attachment and Operating System Support for the Infoprint 12 Printer  
Physical  
Protocol  
Operating Systems  
Parallel  
(IEEE 1284)  
Windows 95/98/Millennium, NT 4.0,  
Windows 2000  
Macintosh OS 8.5 and higher  
USB  
Windows 98/Millennium, NT 4.0,  
Windows 2000  
Macintosh OS 8.5 and higher  
LAN  
(IEEE 802.3)  
IPX/SPX  
TCP/IP  
Novell NetWare 3.x, 4.x, 5.x  
Windows 95/98/Millennium, NT 4.0,  
Windows 2000 Novell NetWare 5.x  
Linux (Red Hat)  
NETBIOS/NETBEUI  
AppleTalk  
Windows 95/98  
IEEE 802.3  
Macintosh OS 8.5 and higher  
Chapter 5. Infoprint 12 Printer (4912) 39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
40 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6. Infoprint 20 Printer (4320)  
This section describes the Infoprint 20 printer characteristics and PSF-supported functions. The Infoprint  
20 printer is a desktop, cut-sheet printer that uses laser and electrophotographic technology to print text,  
images, graphics, and bar codes.  
Figure 9. Infoprint 20 Printer  
Table 51 summarizes the printer characteristics for the Infoprint 20 printer.  
Table 51. Infoprint 20 Printer Characteristics  
Printer Characteristic  
Maximum printing rate  
Print technology  
Characteristic Value  
20 pages per minute  
Laser  
Datastreams  
IPDS, SCS, DSC, PostScript, PCL, Pages*, and ESC/P  
* Pages and ESC/P support is available only in Japan.  
Form type  
Cut Sheet  
Number of input bins  
Standard: Primary tray up to 500 sheets; secondary tray  
up to 150 sheets or 10 envelopes  
Optional: drawer up to 500 sheets; high-capacity drawer  
up to 2,000 sheets; envelope feeder up to 75 envelopes  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 51. Infoprint 20 Printer Characteristics (continued)  
Printer Characteristic  
Characteristic Value  
Number of output bins  
Standard: Top output 500 sheets (face down, collated);  
Optional duplex provides two-sided printing, offset-jogged  
output and additional 250 sheets output capacity (750  
total)  
Finisher attachments  
Manual forms feed  
Envelope printing  
n/a  
yes  
yes  
MICR printing  
*IBM Business Partners may have MICR solutions for this  
printer.  
no*  
Duplex printing  
yes  
Color  
no  
no  
Adjust print-quality levels  
Printhead resolution  
600 dots-per-inch  
75,000  
Maximum impressions per month (duty cycle)  
Printable Area  
The Infoprint 20 printer can print from edge-to-edge. For paper ledger size (11 x 17 in.) and smaller, print  
quality is guaranteed to only within 4 mm of the border. For paper larger than ledger size, print quality is  
guaranteed only within 4 mm of the short (leading or trailing edge) borders and within 5 mm on each side.  
For best print quality, edge-to-edge printing is not recommended. Figure 10 shows an example of the  
printable area of a form.  
To p  
Media  
Origin  
(Position 0.0)  
Printable  
Media  
Area  
Origin  
Printable  
(Position 0.0)  
Area  
Portrait  
Landscape  
Figure 10. Printable Area on the Infoprint 20 Printer  
Media Specifications  
The Infoprint 20 printer accepts the following media:  
Media types:  
Copier/xerographic paper, recycled paper, card stock, transparencies, some labels  
Sheet sizes:  
B5 (182 x 257 mm) to A3/ledger (11″ x 17″), universal paper sizes (up to 13″ x 20″, 330 x 508  
mm)  
42 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Envelope sizes:  
Com-10, C5, DL and Monarch  
Paper weights:  
16 to 28 lbs. (64 to 135 g/m2)  
Attachments  
PC Parallel Interface:  
Table 52. PC Parallel Interface  
Protocol  
Data Stream  
Operating System  
PC Parallel  
PCL5e  
Windows 3.1/3.11/95, NT 4.0, OS/2,  
AIX 3.2.5, AIX 4.1 and higher, Sun  
Solaris 2.3 and higher, HP-UX 9,  
HP-UX 10, SCO UNIX 3, SCO UNIX  
5
PC Parallel  
PostScript 2/3  
Windows 3.1/3.11/95, NT 4.0 (2), AIX  
3.2.5, AIX 4.1 and higher, Sun Solaris  
2.3 and higher, HP-UX 9, HP-UX 10,  
SCO UNIX 3, and SCO UNIX 5  
PC Parallel  
PC Parallel  
PostScript 2/3  
PCL5e  
Windows 95 J, Windows NT J4.0  
P-Windows 3.2, T-Windows 3.1,  
Windows 95 (S-C), Windows 95  
(T-C), Windows NT 4.0 (S-C),  
Windows NT 4.0 (T-C)  
PC Parallel  
PC Parallel  
AFPDS, SCS to PCL5e  
PAGES and ESC/P  
OS/400(R) 3.2 HPT Facility  
Windows 3.1/95J, NT 3.51/4.0, AIX  
3.2.5, AIX 4.1 and higher, and  
PC-DOS J6.3/V and above  
Optional Token-Ring and Ethernet:  
Table 53. Optional Token-Ring and Ethernet  
Protocol  
Data Stream  
Operating System  
IPX/SPX  
PCL5e, PostScript  
Novell NetWare 2.15, 2.2, 3.0, 3.1,  
3.11, 3.12, 4.0, 4.01, 4.1 (NEST 1.0)  
TCP/IP  
PCL5e, PostScript 2  
Novell NetWare 3.11, 3.12, 4.0, 4.01,  
4.1  
TCP/IP  
PostScript  
NetWare J 3.12J and 4.11J  
NetWare J 3.12J and 4.11J  
IBM LAN Server 1.3 and above  
IBM LAN Server 2.0 and above  
IPX/SPX  
PostScript  
NETBIOS/NETBEUI  
TCP/IP  
PCL5e, PostScript 2  
PCL5e, PostScript 2  
PCL5e, PostScript 2  
NETBIOS/NETBEUI  
Microsoft LAN Manager 2.O and  
above  
TCP/IP  
IPDS  
IPDS  
IPDS  
IPDS  
IPDS  
PSF for AIX 2.1, Infoprint Manager  
PSF/MVS 2.2, PSF for OS/390  
PSF/400 3.1, 3.2, 3.6, 3.7, 4.1  
PSF for AIX 2.1, Infoprint Manager  
PSF/MVS 2.2, PSF for OS/390  
TCP/IP  
TCP/IP  
IEEE 802.3  
IEEE 802.3  
Chapter 6. Infoprint 20 Printer (4320) 43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 53. Optional Token-Ring and Ethernet (continued)  
Protocol  
IEEE 802.3  
TokenTalk  
EtherTalk  
TokenTalk  
EtherTalk  
TCP/IP  
Data Stream  
Operating System  
IPDS  
PSF/400 3.1, 3.2, 3.6, 3.7, 4.1  
Apple System 7  
PostScript 2  
PostScript 2  
Apple System 7  
PostScript 2  
KajiTalk 7.5/7.6, MAC OS 8.0  
KajiTalk 7.5/7.6, MAC OS 8.0  
Windows NT 3.51/4.0  
PostScript 2  
PCL5e, PostScript 2  
PCL5e, PostScript 2  
PCL5e, PostScript 2  
PCL5e, PostScript 2  
PCL5e, PostScript 2  
PCL5e, PostScript 2  
TCP/IP  
AIX 3.2.5, 4.1, 4.2 and later  
OS/400 3.1 and later  
TCP/IP  
TCP/IP  
Sun Solaris 2.3 and higher  
SCO-UNIX 3, SCO-UNIX 5  
HP-UX 9, HP-UX 10  
TCP/IP  
TCP/IP  
Optional Coax Interface:  
Table 54. Optional Coax Interface  
Protocol  
NDS  
NDS  
NDS  
NDS  
NDS  
NDS  
NDS  
NDS  
NDS  
NDS  
NDS  
NDS  
Data Stream  
IPDS  
Operating System  
PSF/MVS 2.2, PSF for OS/390  
PSF/VSE 2.2.1  
PSF/VM 2.1.1, 2.1.0 + maintenance  
Infoprint Server  
GDDM 2.3  
IPDS  
IPDS  
SCS, DSC, DSE  
IPDS  
SCS, DSC, DSE  
IPDS  
GDDM 2.3  
VM RSCS 2.2  
SCS, DSC, DSE  
SCS, DSC, DSE  
SCS, DSC, DSE  
SCS  
VM RSCS 2.2  
JES328X 2.0  
VTAM  
CICS/MVS  
SCS  
CICS/VSE  
Optional Twinax Interface:  
Table 55. Optional Twinax Interface  
Protocol  
Arctic  
Arctic  
Arctic  
Arctic  
Arctic  
Arctic  
Arctic  
Data Stream  
IPDS  
Operating System  
PSF/400 3.1, 3.6, 3.2, 3.7, 4.1  
OS/400 3.6, 3.1, 3.0.5  
OS/400 3.2  
IPDS  
IPDS  
SCS  
OS/400 3.6, 3.1, 3.0.5  
OS/400 3.2  
SCS  
SCS, IPDS  
SCS, IPDS  
SSP Rel. 7.1  
OS/400 3.6 with SSP Rel. 7.5  
44 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 7. Infoprint 21 Printer (4322)  
This section describes the Infoprint 21 printer characteristics and PSF-supported functions. The Infoprint  
21 printer is a desktop, cut-sheet printer that uses laser and electrophotographic technology to print text,  
images, graphics, and bar codes.  
Figure 11. Infoprint 21 Printer  
Table 56 summarizes the printer characteristics for the Infoprint 21 printer.  
Table 56. Infoprint 21 Printer Characteristics  
Printer Characteristic  
Maximum printing rate  
Print technology  
Datastreams  
Characteristic Value  
21 pages per minute  
Laser  
IPDS, SCS, DSC, PostScript, and PCL  
Cut Sheet  
Form type  
Number of input bins  
Standard: Primary tray up to 550 sheets or 85 envelopes;  
auxiliary tray up to 100 sheets or 10 envelopes  
Optional: Up to two additional 550-sheet trays (maximum  
5 input sources1 and 1,750 sheets)  
Number of output bins  
Standard: 500-sheet top exit bin with bin full sensing  
Optional: 500-sheet offset jogging stacker; 100-sheet  
face-up rear paper exit tray  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 56. Infoprint 21 Printer Characteristics (continued)  
Printer Characteristic  
Characteristic Value  
Finisher attachments  
n/a  
yes  
yes  
Manual forms feed  
Envelope printing  
MICR printing  
*IBM Business Partners may have MICR solutions for this  
printer.  
no*  
Duplex printing  
yes  
Color  
no  
no  
Adjust print-quality levels  
Printhead resolution  
1200 dots-per-inch  
100,000  
Maximum impressions per month (duty cycle)  
1. The 5th input source includes the 75-envelope feeder.  
Printable Area  
The Infoprint 21 printer can print from edge-to-edge; however, print quality is only guaranteed to within 4  
mm of all paper edges. For card stock and envelopes, the print quality is guaranteed only within 6 mm of  
the leading edge. For best possible print quality, edge-to-edge printing is not recommended. Figure 12  
shows an example of the printable area of a form.  
To p  
Media  
Origin  
(Position 0.0)  
Printable  
Media  
Area  
Origin  
Printable  
(Position 0.0)  
Area  
Portrait  
Landscape  
Figure 12. Printable Area on the Infoprint 21 Printer  
Media Specifications  
The Infoprint 21 printer accepts the following media:  
Media types:  
Paper, card stock, labels, transparencies, recycled paper and envelopes  
Sheet sizes:  
Letter (8.5 inches x 11 inches), Legal (8.5 inches x 14 inches), Folio (8.5 inches x 13 inches),  
Executive (7.25 inches x 10.5 inches), Statement (5.5 inches x 8.5 inches), Index card (3 inches x  
5 inches), A4 (210 mm x 297 mm), A5 (148 mm x 210 mm), B5-ISO (176 mm x 250 mm), B5-JIS  
(182 mm x 257 mm), Japanese postcard Hagaki (100 mm x 148 mm), custom forms sizes from 3  
inches x 5 inches (76.2 mm x 127 mm) to 8.5 inches x 14 inches (215.9 mm x 355.6 mm)  
Envelope sizes:  
Com-10, C5, DL and Monarch  
46 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Media weights:  
v Copier/xerographic papers: 16 to 28 lbs. (60 to 105 gsm)  
v Cardstock:16 to 133 lbs. (60 to 216 gsm)  
v Labels: 60 to 216 gsm  
v Envelopes: 16 to 28 lbs. (60 to 105 gsm)  
v Transparencies: 0.0039 inches to 0.0045 inches clear film for laser printers and copiers  
Attachments  
Infoprint 21 supports up to two simultaneously active interfaces:  
v IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface (Level II electronics, with a Type C connector) is standard on the printer  
– Supports compatibility mode, reverse transform, nibble mode, and ECP mode.  
– Microsoft Plug and Play Compatibility  
– An IEEE 1284 Printer Cable is available (feature number 4180, P/N 38L1409).  
v One optional interface slot with the following options:  
– Ethernet interface using the IBM Ethernet 10/100 Adapter (feature number 4162, P/N 38L1401).  
– Token-Ring interface using the IBM Token-Ring 4/16 Adapter (feature number 4120, P/N 38L1400).  
– Twinax interface using the IBM Twinax SCS Interface (feature number 4141, P/N 38L1402).  
– Coaxial interface using the IBM Coax SCS Interface (feature number 4171, P/N 38L1403).  
These four features are mutually exclusive and there are no prerequisites for these features. Only one  
of these features may be installed per printer.  
Attachment/Operating System Support  
Table 57. Attachment/Operating System Support for the Infoprint 21 Printer  
Physical  
Protocol  
Operating System  
Parallel  
(IEEE 1284)  
Row1, Col2  
Windows 95/98, NT 4.0  
Windows 2000  
AIX 4.1 and higher  
OS/2 v3.0, v4.0  
Sun Solaris 2.5 and higher  
HP-UX 10, HP-UX 11  
SCO UNIX 3, SCO UNIX 5  
OS/400 (R) 3.2 HPT Facility  
LAN  
(IEEE 802.3/.5)  
IPX/SPX  
TCP/IP  
Novell NetWare 3.1, 3.11, 3.12, 4.0,  
4.01, 4.1, 4.11, 5.0, 3.12J, 4.11J  
Novell NetWare 5.0  
Windows 95/98, Windows NT 4.0,  
Windows 2000  
OS/2 v3.0, v4.0  
AIX 4.03 and higher  
OS/400 3.2, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4  
Sun Solaris 2.5 and higher  
HP-UX 10, HP-UX 11  
SCO-UNIX 3, SCO-UNIX 5  
PSF for AIX 2.1  
Infoprint Manager for AIX 3.1  
Infoprint Manager for Windows NT &  
Windows 2000 1.1  
PSF for OS/390 V3.1.0  
PSF/400 3.2, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4  
Linux  
NETBIOS/NETBEUI  
Windows 95/98, NT 4.0, OS/2 v3.0,  
v4.0  
Chapter 7. Infoprint 21 Printer (4322) 47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 57. Attachment/Operating System Support for the Infoprint 21 Printer (continued)  
Physical  
Protocol  
Operating System  
IEEE 802.3  
EtherTalk  
Apple System 8.0 and higher  
KanjiTalk 8.0 and higher  
IEEE 802.5  
TokenTalk  
Apple System 8.0 and higher  
KanjiTalk 8.0 and higher  
Optional Coax Interface  
Table 58. Optional Coax Interface for the Infoprint 21 Printer  
Data Stream  
Operating System  
AFP/IPDS  
PSF/MVS 3.1  
PSF/MVS 2.2  
PSF for OS/390  
PSF/VSE 2.2.1  
PSF/VM 2.1.1, 2.1.0 + maintenance  
GDDM 2.3  
SCS, DSC, DSE  
GDDM 2.3  
VM RSCS 2.2  
JES328X 2.0  
VTAM  
AFP/IPDS  
SCS  
VM RSCS 2.2  
CICS/MVS  
CICS/VSE  
Optional Twinax Interface  
Table 59. Optional Twinax Interface for the Infoprint 21 Printer  
Data Stream  
AFP/IPDS  
SCS  
Operating System  
PSF/400 3.2  
OS/400 3.2  
SSP Rel. 7.1  
SCS, AFP/IPDS  
IBM OS/400 ASCII Printer Support  
Infoprint 21 is supported as an ASCII (PCL) printer via a Workstation Customization Object under the Host  
Print Transform (HPT) facility of OS/400 V3.2 and higher.  
HPT transforms the AFPDS or SCS data stream to ASCII for printing to AS/400 ASCII printers. ASCII  
printers can be attached using emulator products with a parallel attached printer including:  
v PC or PS/2 running the IBM enhanced 5250 emulation program  
v PC or PS/2 running PC Support/400 or Client Access/400  
v Infowindow II displays (3477/3487)  
The ASCII data stream can also be sent to this printer when attached directly to a Token-Ring or Ethernet  
LAN via TCP/IP. That connection can use either of the following two TCP/IP drivers:  
v OS/400 SNMP printer driver.  
Information APAR II03291 describes the PTFs required in V4R3 and V4R4 to use this driver. Availability  
of the PTFs are 06/30/2000 for V4R3 and 07/31/2000 for V4R4.  
v OS/400 TCP/IP Line Printer Requester (LPR) and Line Printer Daemon (LPD), also known as remote  
output queue.  
48 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
HPT support (AFP to ASCII) includes the following limitations:  
v AFP graphics (GOCA) commands not supported  
v Multiple-up not supported  
v BGU and GDF graphics files not supported  
v GDDM scalable fonts not supported  
v CHRSIZE font keyword not supported  
v Edge to edge not supported  
v FIDELITY keyword not supported  
v AFP to ASCII may need to be run in raster mode in order to produce accurate results.  
Printer Drivers  
The following drivers are available:  
Table 60. Printer Drivers for the Infoprint 21 Printer  
Platform  
Data Stream  
PS 3  
Windows 95/98  
Windows NT 4.0  
Windows 2000  
Windows 95/98  
Windows NT 4.0  
Windows 2000  
Mac OS 8.0+  
OS/2 v3.0, v4.0  
AIX 4.1+  
PS 3  
PS 3  
PCL 6/5e  
PCL 6/5e  
PCL 6/5e  
PS 3  
PS 2  
PS 3/PCL 5e  
PS 3/PCL 5e  
PS 3/PCL 5e  
PS 3/PCL 5e  
PS 2  
Sun Solaris 2.5+  
SCO UNIX 3.0/5.0  
HP-UX 10.0x/11.0x  
Linux  
Chapter 7. Infoprint 21 Printer (4322) 49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
50 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8. Infoprint 32 and Infoprint 40 Printers (4332)  
This section describes printer characteristics for the Infoprint 32 and Infoprint 40 printers. The Infoprint 32  
and Infoprint 40 printers are desktop, cut-sheet printers that uses laser and electrophotographic technology  
to print text, images, graphics, and bar codes.  
Figure 13. Infoprint 32 Printer  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 14. Infoprint 40 Printer with Optional Finisher  
Table 61 summarizes the printer characteristics for the Infoprint 32 and Infoprint 40 printers.  
Table 61. Infoprint 32 and Infoprint 40 Printer Characteristics  
Printer Characteristic  
Characteristic Value  
Infoprint 32 Printer  
Characteristic Value  
Infoprint 40 Printer  
Maximum printing rate  
Print technology  
32 pages per minute  
40 pages per minute  
Laser  
Datastreams  
* Pages and ESC/P support is  
available only in Japan.  
IPDS, SCS, DSC, PostScript, PCL, Pages*, and ESC/P  
Form type  
Cut Sheet  
Number of input bins  
Standard: 2 Primary trays up to 500 sheets each (1,000 total); auxiliary tray  
up to 50 sheets or 4 envelopes  
Optional: 2,500 sheet, high-capacity input with 3 drawers (one 1500 up to  
sheets and 2 up to 1000 sheets); envelope feeder up to 100 envelopes  
Number of output bins  
Standard: Top output up to 500 sheets (collated, with bin-full sensing and  
offset jogging)  
Optional: 2,000-sheet finisher with 3 additional output bins, offset jogging and  
stapling (up to 50 sheets per set) and 200-sheet, face-up output tray  
Finisher Attachments  
52 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 61. Infoprint 32 and Infoprint 40 Printer Characteristics (continued)  
Printer Characteristic  
Characteristic Value  
Infoprint 32 Printer  
Characteristic Value  
Infoprint 40 Printer  
Corner staple  
Edge staple  
Side Staple  
Saddle  
yes  
yes  
no  
no  
Z-Fold  
no  
Inserter  
no  
Manual forms feed  
Envelope printing  
yes  
yes  
MICR printing  
*IBM Business Partners may have  
MICR solutions for this printer.  
no*  
Duplex printing  
Color  
yes  
no  
no  
Adjust print-quality levels  
Printhead resolution  
600 dots-per-inch  
Maximum impressions per month  
(duty cycle)  
75,000  
Printable Area  
The Infoprint 32 and Infoprint 40 printers can print from edge-to-edge for all data streams except PAGES;  
however, print quality is only guaranteed to within 4 mm of all paper edges. For card stock and envelopes,  
the print quality is guaranteed only within 6 mm of the leading edge. For best possible print quality,  
edge-to-edge printing is not recommended. Figure 15 shows an example of the printable area of a form.  
To p  
Media  
Origin  
(Position 0.0)  
Printable  
Media  
Area  
Origin  
Printable  
(Position 0.0)  
Area  
Portrait  
Landscape  
Figure 15. Printable Area on the Infoprint 32 and Infoprint 40 Printers  
Media Specifications  
The Infoprint 32 and Infoprint 40 printers accepts the following media:  
Media types:  
Copier/xerographic paper, recycled paper, card stock, transparencies, paper labels, prepunched  
paper, and envelopes  
Chapter 8. Infoprint 32 and Infoprint 40 Printers (4332) 53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sheet sizes:  
A wide range from A5/statement (210 mm x 149 mm, 8.5 inches x 5.5 inches), including Japanese  
Hagaki (100 mm x 148 mm), to A3/ledger (420 mm x 297 mm, 11 inches x 17 inches)  
Envelope sizes:  
Com-10, C5, DL and Monarch  
Media weights:  
17 to 24 lbs (64 to 90 gsm) from primary trays and up to 110 lbs. (165 gsm) from auxiliary tray  
Attachments  
PC Parallel Interface:  
Table 62. PC Parallel Interface  
Protocol  
Data Stream  
Operating System  
PC Parallel  
PCL5e  
Windows 3.1/3.11/95/98, NT 4.0, AIX  
3.2.5, AIX 4.1 and higher, Sun Solaris  
2.3 and higher, HP-UX 9.0x, HP-UX  
10.0x, SCO UNIX OPENSERVER  
5.0, SCO UNIX OPENDESKTOP 3.0,  
SCO UNIX 3.2V4.2  
PC Parallel  
PostScript 2/3  
Windows 3.1/3.11/95/98, AIX 3.2.5,  
AIX 4.1 and higher, Sun Solaris 2.3  
and higher, HP-UX 9.0x, HP-UX  
10.0x, SCO UNIX OPENSERVER  
5.0, SCO UNIX OPENDESKTOP 3.0,  
SCO UNIX 3.2V4.2  
PC Parallel  
PC Parallel  
PostScript 2/3  
PCL5e  
NT 4.0, Windows NT J4.0  
P-Windows 3.2, T-Windows 3.1,  
Windows 95 (S-C), Windows 95  
(T-C), Windows NT 4.0 (S-C),  
Windows NT 4.0 (T-C)  
PC Parallel  
PC Parallel  
PC Parallel  
PC Parallel  
AFPDS, SCS to PCL5e  
PostScript 2/3  
OS/400(R) 3.2 HPT Facility  
Apple System 7.5 and Up  
Apple KanjiTalk 7.5 and Up  
PostScript 2/3  
PAGES and ESC/P  
Windows 3.1/95J, NT 3.51/4.0, AIX  
3.2.5, AIX 4.1 and higher, and  
PC-DOS J6.3/V and above  
Optional Token-Ring and Ethernet:  
Table 63. Optional Token-Ring and Ethernet  
Protocol  
Data Stream  
PCL5e, PostScript  
Operating System  
IPX/SPX  
Novell NetWare 2.15, 2.2, 3.0, 3.1,  
3.11, 3.12, 4.0, 4.01, 4.1 (NEST 1.0)  
54 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 63. Optional Token-Ring and Ethernet (continued)  
Protocol  
Data Stream  
Operating System  
TCP/IP  
PCL5e, PostScript 2  
Novell NetWare 3.11, 3.12, 4.0, 4.01,  
4.1  
IBM LAN Server 2.0 and above  
Windows NT 3.51/4.0AIX 3.2.5, 4.1,  
4.2 and later  
OS/400 3.1 and later  
Sun Solaris 2.3 and higher  
SCO-UNIX 3, SCO-UNIX 5  
HP-UX 9, HP-UX 10  
TCP/IP  
TCP/IP  
PostScript  
IPDS  
NetWare J 3.12J and 4.11J  
Infoprint Manager for AIX 2.1  
PSF/MVS 2.2  
PSF for OS/390  
PSF/400 3.1, 3.2, 3.6, 3.7, 4.1  
TCP/IP  
PAGES  
NetWare 3.12J & 4.11J  
IBM LAN Server 2.0 and above  
IBM AIX 3.2.5 and above  
OS/400 V3.2 and above with HPT  
IPX/SPX  
PostScript  
NetWare J 3.12J and 4.11J  
NETBIOS/NETBEUI  
PCL5e, PostScript 2  
IBM LAN Server 1.3 and above  
Microsoft LAN Manager 2.O and  
above  
IEEE 802.3  
IPDS  
Inoprint Manager for AIX 2.1  
PSF/MVS 2.2  
PSF for OS/390  
PSF/400 3.1, 3.2, 3.6, 3.7, 4.1  
TokenTalk  
EtherTalk  
PostScript 2  
PostScript 2  
Apple System 7  
KajiTalk 7.5/7.6, MAC OS 8.0  
Apple System 7  
KajiTalk 7.5/7.6, MAC OS 8.0  
IPX/SPX  
PAGES  
PAGES  
NetWare 3.12J & 4.11J  
NETBIOS/NETBEUI  
IBM LAN Server 2.0 and above  
Optional Coax Interface:  
Table 64. Optional Coax Interface  
Protocol  
NDS  
NDS  
NDS  
NDS  
NDS  
NDS  
NDS  
NDS  
NDS  
NDS  
Data Stream  
IPDS  
Operating System  
PSF/MVS 2.2, PSF for OS/390  
PSF/VSE 2.2.1  
IPDS  
IPDS  
PSF/VM 2.1.1, 2.1.0 + maintenance  
Infoprint Server  
GDDM 2.3  
SCS, DSC, DSE  
IPDS  
SCS, DSC, DSE  
IPDS  
GDDM 2.3  
VM RSCS 2.2  
SCS, DSC, DSE  
SCS, DSC, DSE  
SCS, DSC, DSE  
VM RSCS 2.2  
JES328X 2.0  
VTAM  
Chapter 8. Infoprint 32 and Infoprint 40 Printers (4332) 55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 64. Optional Coax Interface (continued)  
Protocol  
NDS  
Data Stream  
Operating System  
CICS/MVS  
SCS  
SCS  
NDS  
CICS/VSE  
Optional Twinax Interface:  
Table 65. Optional Twinax Interface  
Protocol  
Arctic  
Data Stream  
IPDS  
Operating System  
PSF/400 3.1, 3.2, 3.6, 3.7, 4.1, 4.2  
OS/400 3.1, 3.2, 3.6, 3.7, 4.1, 4.2  
OS/400 3.6, 3.1, 3.0.5  
Arctic  
IPDS  
Arctic  
SCS  
Arctic  
SCS, IPDS  
SCS, IPDS  
SSP Rel. 7.1  
Arctic  
OS/400 3.6 with SSP Rel. 7.5  
56 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 9. Infoprint 60 Printer (3160–002)  
This section describes Infoprint 60 printer characteristics. The Infoprint 60 printer is a cut-sheet printer that  
uses laser and electrophotographic technology to print text, images, graphics, and bar codes at up to 60  
impressions per minute.  
Figure 16. Infoprint 60 Printer  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 66 summarizes the printer characteristics for the Infoprint 60 printer.  
Table 66. Infoprint 60 Printer Characteristics  
Printer Characteristic  
Maximum printing rate  
Print technology  
Datastreams  
Characteristic Value  
60 pages per minute  
Laser  
IPDS and PCL  
Cut Sheet  
Form type  
Number of input bins  
Standard: 3 bins, one with up to 2000 sheets and 2 bins  
with up to 500 sheets each  
Optional: 1 bin with up to 2000 sheets  
Number of output bins  
Standard: Output tray up to 1500 sheets; top output tray  
up to 500 sheets  
Optional: 3000-sheet stacker with convenience stapler  
Finisher Attachments  
Corner staple  
Edge staple  
Side Staple  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
no  
Saddle  
Z-Fold  
Inserter  
Manual forms feed  
Envelope printing  
no  
MICR printing  
*IBM Business Partners may have MICR solutions for this  
printer.  
no*  
Duplex printing  
Color  
yes  
no  
Adjust print-quality levels  
Printhead resolution  
no  
240 dots-per-inch  
300 dots-per-inch  
600 dots-per-inch  
Maximum impressions per month (duty cycle)  
750,000  
Printable Area  
Although the Infoprint 60 printer can print to the edge of the paper, for best results, limit printing to within  
.24 inch (6 mm) of all edges of the sheet. Printing any closer to the edges of the sheet may result in  
degraded print quality and loss of characters. Figure 17 on page 59 shows an example of the printable  
area of a sheet for a Infoprint 60 printer. The printable area shown is 8.02 by 10.52 inches.  
58 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8.02 inches  
Top  
0.24 inch  
0.24 inch  
0.24 inch  
Printable  
Area  
10.52 inches  
0.24 inch  
Figure 17. Recommended Printable Area for an 8.5 x 11 Inch Sheet on the Infoprint 60 Printer  
Media Specifications  
The Infoprint 60 printer accepts the following media:  
Media types:  
Plain or letterhead cutsheet paper, paper or polymer-based adhesive labels suitable for  
electrophotographic printing, pre-printed forms and letterheads, perforated and pre-punched (2, 3  
and 4 holes) xerographic papers  
Sheet sizes:  
Letter (8.5 inches x 11 inches), A4 (210 mm x 297 mm), Legal (8.5 inches x 14 inches), A3 (297  
mm x 420 mm), Ledger (11 inches x 17 inches), B4 (257 mm x 364 mm), B5 (182 mm x 257 mm),  
non-standard paper sizes from 7.48 inches x 7 inches (190 mm x 178 mm) through 11.69 inches x  
17 inches (297 mm x 432 mm)  
Media weights:  
17 lb. to 42 lb. (64 gsm to 160 gsm); 110 lb. index (200 gsm) - letter and A4, simplex only;  
notebook divider tabs, 90 lb. to 110 lb. weights  
Attachments  
Host software support for InfoPrint 60 printer attachments are listed below.  
Table 67. Attachments for the Infoprint 60 Printer  
Platform  
370 Channel  
Feature 4020  
Token-Ring SNA  
Feature 4120  
Token-Ring TCP/IP  
Feature 4120  
Ethernet TCP/IP  
Feature 4162  
PSF/MVS  
PSF for OS/390  
PSF/VSE  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
PSF/VM  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
PSF/400  
No  
PSF/AIX  
No  
No  
PSF/2  
No  
No  
InfoPrint Manager  
No  
No  
Chapter 9. Infoprint 60 Printer (3160–002) 59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
60 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 10. Infoprint 70 Printer (2770)  
This section describes the Infoprint 70 printer characteristics. The Infoprint 70 printer is a cut-sheet printer  
that uses laser and electrophotographic technology to print text, images, graphics, and bar codes at up to  
70 impressions per minute. The Infoprint 70 printer uses a high performance controller which provides  
IPDS processing.  
Figure 18. Infoprint 70 Printer  
Table 68 summarizes the printer characteristics for the Infoprint 70 printer.  
Table 68. Infoprint 70 Printer Characteristics  
Printer Characteristic  
Maximum printing rate  
Print technology  
Datastreams  
Characteristic Value  
70 pages per minute  
Laser  
IPDS  
Form type  
Cut Sheet  
Number of input bins  
Standard: Two 500-sheet trays; one 2000-sheet tray; one  
150-sheet auxiliary tray  
Optional: 3000-sheet high-capacity feeder (A4 or letter  
size only)  
Number of output bins  
Standard: One 200-sheet stacker; one 2000-sheet  
stacker with stapling capability (up to 50 sheets)  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 68. Infoprint 70 Printer Characteristics (continued)  
Printer Characteristic  
Finisher Attachments  
Corner staple  
Edge staple  
Characteristic Value  
yes  
yes  
no  
no  
no  
no  
no  
no  
Side Staple  
Saddle  
Z-Fold  
Inserter  
Manual forms feed  
Envelope printing  
MICR printing  
*IBM Business Partners may have MICR solutions for this  
printer.  
no*  
Duplex printing  
yes  
Color  
no  
no  
Adjust print-quality levels  
Printhead resolution  
600 dots-per-inch  
400,000  
Maximum impressions per month (duty cycle)  
Printable Area  
Although the Infoprint 70 printer can print to the edge of the paper, for best results, limit printing to within  
.24 inch (6 mm) of all edges of the sheet. Printing any closer to the edges of the sheet may result in  
degraded print quality and loss of characters. Figure 19 shows an example of the printable area of a sheet  
for an Infoprint 70 printer. The printable area shown is 8.02 by 10.52 inches.  
8.02 inches  
0.24 inch  
0.24 inch  
0.24 inch  
Top  
Printable  
Area  
10.52 inches  
0.24 inch  
Figure 19. Recommended Printable Area for an 8.5 x 11-Inch Sheet on the Infoprint 70 Printer  
Media Specifications  
The Infoprint 70 printer accepts the following media:  
62 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Media types:  
Plain or letterhead cutsheet paper, paper or polymer-based adhesive labels suitable for  
electrophotographic printing, pre-printed forms and letterheads, perforated and pre-punched (2, 3  
and 4 holes) xerographic papers  
Sheet sizes:  
A5 (148 mm x 210 mm) through 12 inches x 18 inches (304.8 mm x 457.2 mm)  
Note: Letter/A4 (long edge feed) or smaller paper sizes.  
Media weights:  
Copier/xerographic papers and labels: 16 to 53 lbs. (60 to 199 gsm)  
Attachments  
The Infoprint 70 has one interface slot with the following two options:  
v Ethernet interface using the IBM Ethernet 10/100 BaseTX Adapter (feature number 4162).  
v Token-Ring interface using the IBM Token-Ring 4/16 Adapter (feature number 4120).  
These are mandatory features. One of them must be specified. They are mutually exclusive and there are  
no pre-requisites for this feature.  
Host Systems Supported  
Infoprint 70 supports the following host systems:  
v AS/400 Systems  
– AS/400e Servers  
– AS/400e Systems  
– AS/400 Advanced Series  
v RS/6000 systems  
v Enterprise Servers  
– Netfinity Servers  
– S/390  
- G5, G6 Parallel Enterprise Servers  
- Multiprise Servers  
- Integrated Servers  
- ES/9000  
Software  
Table 69. Software Supported on the Infoprint 70 Printer  
Physical  
Protocol  
Operating System  
LAN (IEEE 802.3/.5)  
TCP/IP  
PSF/400 4.3, 4.4, 4.5  
PSF/MVS 2.2  
PSF for OS/390  
Infoprint Manager for AIX 3.2  
Infoprint Manager for NT 1.1  
Chapter 10. Infoprint 70 Printer (2770) 63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
64 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 11. Infoprint 2000 NP1 and RP1 Printers (2710–NP1,  
2710–RP1)  
This section describes the Infoprint 2000–NP1 and –RP1 printer characteristics. The Infoprint 2000–NP1  
and –RP1 are cut-sheet printers that use laser and electrophotographic technology to print text, images,  
graphics, and bar codes.  
Figure 20. Infoprint 2000–NP1 and –RP1 Printer  
Table 70 summarizes the printer characteristics for the Infoprint 2000 NP1 and RP1 printers.  
Table 70. Infoprint 2000 NP1 and RP1 Printers’ Characteristics  
Characteristics  
Characteristic Value  
Infoprint 2000–NP1  
Infoprint 2000–RP1  
Maximum printing rate  
Print technology  
Datastreams  
110 pages per minute  
Electrophotographic/LED  
PostScript 3 and PCL6  
Cut Sheet  
Form type  
Number of input bins  
Standard: 2 trays up to 1000 sheets each, 1 tray up to  
2000 sheets  
Optional: 2 trays up to 1000 sheets each, 1 tray up to  
2000 sheets  
Number of output bins  
Standard: Finisher top bin up to 500 sheets; finisher main  
bin up to 3000 sheets  
Optional: High capacity stacker up to 5000 sheets  
Finisher Attachments  
Corner staple  
Edge staple  
Side staple  
Saddle  
yes  
yes  
yes  
no  
Z-Fold  
no  
Inserter  
yes  
no  
Envelope printing  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 70. Infoprint 2000 NP1 and RP1 Printers’ Characteristics (continued)  
Characteristics  
Characteristic Value  
Infoprint 2000–NP1  
Infoprint 2000–RP1  
MICR printing  
no  
Duplex printing  
yes  
Color  
no  
no  
Adjust print-quality levels  
Printhead resolution  
Maximum impressions per month (duty cycle)  
600 dots-per-inch  
2,000,000  
Printable Area  
The Infoprint 2000–NP1 and –RP1 printers do not support edge-to-edge printing. The leading .05 inch (1  
mm) is in a non-printable area. Any information in the non-printable area will be truncated. Figure 21  
shows an example of the printable area of a form.  
0.05 inch  
Printable  
Area  
Leading Edge  
Figure 21. Printable Area in IPDS Mode on the Infoprint 2000 NP1 and RP1 Printers  
Media Size and Configuration  
The media loaded for your printer must match the media size in the printer configuration. If these sizes do  
not match, a printer error code indicates that this mismatch must be corrected by either changing the  
media at the printer or by changing the configuration to match the media.  
Media Specifications  
The Infoprint 2000 accepts the following media:  
Media types:  
v Xerographic, bond, book, duplicator, mimeographic, uncoated offset, ledger (tabloid), cover,  
index, bristol, and other long-grain plain papers (such as dual-purpose).  
v Prepunched paper of these types:  
– International and Japan Standard 2–hole  
– U.S. and Japan 3–hole  
– German Standard 2– and 4–hole  
– Swedish Standard  
– U.S. 5–Hole  
– Bell/AT&T Systems 7–hole  
v Recycled paper  
66 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Paper, card stock, labels, transparencies, recycled paper and envelopes  
Sheet sizes:  
8 inch x 10.5 inch, letter (8.5 inch x 11 inch), legal (8.5 inch x 14 inch), letter-tab (9 inch x 11 inch)  
manual (9 inch x 12 inch), ledger (tabloid) (11 inch x 17 inch), A4 (210 mm x 297 mm) A4 tab (225  
mm x 297 mm), A3 (420 mm x 297 mm), legal-tab (9 inch x 14 inch)  
Media weights:  
16 to 110 lbs. (60 to 200 g/m2)  
Attachments  
Network Connectivity  
The network connectivity option uses a 10/100BaseT Ethernet Network Interface Card (NIC) with a RJ-45  
jack. Network protocol support includes TCP/IP, Appletalk, Ethernet, IPX/SPX.  
Channel Connectivity  
The channel connectivity option includes a channel controller standalone unit providing support for Xerox  
datastreams. It has connectors for channel Tag and Bus cables. Tag and Bus cables must be ordered  
separately for a connection to an IBM S/390 parallel channel.  
Chapter 11. Infoprint 2000 NP1 and RP1 Printers (2710–NP1, 2710–RP1) 67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
68 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 12. Infoprint 2000–DP1 Printer (2710–DP1)  
This section describes the Infoprint 2000–DP1 printer characteristics. The Infoprint 2000–DP1 printer is a  
cut-sheet printer that uses laser and electrophotographic technology to print text, images, graphics, and  
bar codes.  
Figure 22. Infoprint 2000–DP1 Printer  
Table 71 summarizes the printer characteristics for the Infoprint 2000–DP1 printer.  
Table 71. Infoprint 2000–DP1 Printer Characteristics  
Characteristics  
Maximum printing rate  
Print technology  
Datastreams1  
Characteristic Value  
110 pages per minute  
Electrophotographic/LED  
IPDS and PDF  
or  
LCDS/Metacode, PostScript 3, and PCL6  
Form type  
Cut Sheet  
Number of input bins  
Standard: 2 trays up to 1000 sheets each, 1 tray up to  
2000 sheets  
Optional: 2 trays up to 1000 sheets each, 1 tray up to  
2000 sheets  
Number of output bins  
Standard: Finisher top bin up to 500 sheets; finisher main  
bin up to 3000 sheets  
Optional: High capacity stacker up to 5000 sheets  
Finisher Attachments  
Corner staple  
Edge staple  
Side Staple  
Saddle  
yes  
yes  
yes  
no  
Z-Fold  
no  
Inserter  
no  
Envelope printing  
MICR printing  
no  
no  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 71. Infoprint 2000–DP1 Printer Characteristics (continued)  
Characteristics  
Characteristic Value  
Duplex printing  
yes  
Color  
no  
no  
Adjust print-quality levels  
Printhead resolution  
Maximum impressions per month (duty cycle)  
600 dots-per-inch  
2,000,000  
1. With the IPDS feature installed the Infoprint 2000-DP1 cannot accept the LCDS/Metacode, PostScript 3, and  
PCL6 datastreams.  
Printable Area  
The Infoprint 2000–DP1 printer does not support edge-to-edge printing. The leading .05 inch (1 mm) is in  
a non-printable area. Any information in the non-printable area will be truncated. Figure 23 shows an  
example of the printable area of a form.  
0.05 inch  
Printable  
Area  
Leading Edge  
Figure 23. Printable Area in IPDS Mode on the Infoprint 2000–DP1 Printer  
Media Specifications  
The Infoprint 2000–DP1 printer accepts the following media:  
Media types:  
v Xerographic, bond, book, duplicator, mimeographic, uncoated offset, ledger (tabloid), cover,  
index, bristol, and other long-grain plain papers (such as dual-purpose).  
v Prepunched paper of these types:  
– International and Japan Standard 2–hole  
– U.S. and Japan 3–hole  
– German Standard 2– and 4–hole  
– Swedish Standard  
– U.S. 5–Hole  
– Bell/AT&T Systems 7–hole  
v Recycled paper  
Paper, card stock, labels, transparencies, recycled paper and envelopes  
Sheet sizes:  
8 inch x 10.5 inch, letter (8.5 inch x 11 inch), legal (8.5 inch x 14 inch), letter-tab (9 inch x 11 inch)  
manual (9 inch x 12 inch), ledger (tabloid) (11 inch x 17 inch), A4 (210 mm x 297 mm) A4 tab (225  
mm x 297 mm), A3 (420 mm x 297 mm), legal-tab (9 inch x 14 inch)  
70 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Media weights:  
16 to 110 lbs. (60 to 200 g/m2)  
Attachments  
Non-IPDS Attachment Features  
Network Connectivity: The network connectivity option uses a 10/100BaseT Ethernet Network Interface  
Card (NIC) with a RJ-45 jack. Network protocol support includes TCP/IP, Appletalk, Ethernet, IPX/SPX.  
Channel Connectivity: The channel connectivity option includes a channel controller standalone unit  
providing support for Xerox datastreams. It has connectors for channel Tag and Bus cables. Tag and Bus  
cables must be ordered separately for a connection to an IBM S/390 parallel channel.  
IPDS Attachment Features  
S/370 Parallel Channel Attachment for IPDS: This feature provides a System/370 Parallel Channel  
Attachment when using IPDS.  
ESCON Channel Attachment for IPDS: This feature provides the ESCON Channel Attachment when  
using IPDS. The customer has the option of choosing one or two attachments when ordering the Infoprint  
2000.  
Token-Ring Attachment for IPDS: The token-ring feature provides the native attachment of an Infoprint  
2000 printing system to a LAN via Token-Ring when using IPDS.  
10/100BaseT Ethernet (TCP/IP) Attachment for IPDS: This feature provides the attachment of the  
Infoprint 2000 Printing System to a LAN via 10/100BaseT Ethernet (TCP/IP) when using IPDS.  
FDDI (TCP/IP) Attachment for IPDS: This feature provides a native attachment of the Infoprint 2000  
printing system to a LAN via FDDI (TCP/IP) when using IPDS.  
Chapter 12. Infoprint 2000–DP1 Printer (2710–DP1) 71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
72 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 13. Infoprint 3000–ES1 and –ED1/ED2 Printers (3300)  
This section describes the Infoprint 3000–ES1 and Infoprint 3000–ED1/ED2 printer characteristics. The  
Infoprint 3000 printers is are continuous forms printers that uses laser and electrophotographic technology  
to print text, images, graphics, and bar codes.  
Figure 24. Infoprint 3000–ED1/ED2 Printer  
Table 72 summarizes the printer characteristics for the Infoprint 3000–ES1 and –ED1/ED2 printers.  
Table 72. Infoprint 3000–ES1 and –ED1/ED2 Printer Characteristics  
Printer characteristic  
Characteristic Value  
Characteristic Value  
Infoprint 3000–ES1  
Infoprint 3000–ED1/ED2  
Print technology  
Datastreams  
Laser  
IPDS  
Form type  
Continuous  
Number of input bins  
Number of output bins  
Finisher attachments  
Manual forms feed  
Envelope printing  
MICR printing  
Up to 15.5 inch (394 mm) stack of paper  
Up to 12 inch (305 mm) stack of paper  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
no  
Duplex printing  
no  
Color  
no  
Adjust print-quality levels  
Printhead resolution  
yes  
480 dots-per-inch  
600 dots-per-inch  
Maximum printing rates for letter (8.5 x 11 inches)  
inches per second  
15.9  
954  
inches per minute  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 72. Infoprint 3000–ES1 and –ED1/ED2 Printer Characteristics (continued)  
Maximum printing rates for letter in pages per minute1  
1–up landscape (8.5 inches long) simplex  
114  
172  
1–up landscape (8.5 inches long) duplex  
2–up portrait (11 inches long) simplex  
2–up portrait (11 inches long) duplex  
Maximum printing rates for A4 (210 x 297 mm)  
mm per second  
n/a  
228  
344  
n/a  
404  
mm per minute  
24,231  
Maximum printing rates for A4 in pages per minute1  
1–up landscape (210 mm long) simplex  
1–up landscape (210 mm long) duplex  
2–up portrait (297 mm long) simplex  
2–up portrait (297 mm long) duplex  
Maximum usage in pages per month (duty cycles)2  
Letter: 1–up landscape (8.5 inches long)  
Letter: 2–up portrait (11inches long)  
A4: 1–up landscape (210 mm long)  
A4: 2–up portrait (297 mm long)  
114  
162  
n/a  
n/a  
228  
324  
2,800,000 simplex  
4,400,000 simplex  
3,000,000 simplex  
4,000,000 simplex  
5,600,000 duplex  
8,800,000 duplex  
6,000,000 duplex  
8,000,000 duplex  
1. Maximum printing rate is the maximum number of pages of the indicated size and configuration that can be  
printed at the constant speed of paper movement shown for each printer. Rates for pages of different sizes and  
configuration can be calculated by dividing the form length into the printer speed. Actual printing rate will be less  
if the printer cannot reach this rate due to complexity or density of the data or the ability of the system to deliver  
data at this rate.  
2. Maximum usage is based on operating 7 days a week, 24 hours a day, at maximum printing rate with normal  
maintenance and operations activity. IBM does not recommend reaching this monthly maximum on consistent  
basis.  
Printable Area  
The printable area depends on the size of the form being used. The Infoprint 3000–ES1 and –ED1/ED2  
printers can print from perforation to perforation when using roll forms. However, when printing on folded  
forms, the printing may be degraded in areas near a folded perforation, an internal perforation, or any cut  
in the form because of the “tenting” (fold memory) of the form.  
Figure 25 on page 75 shows an example of the printable area of a standard, letter-size roll form for the  
Infoprint 3000. Notice that the media origin is located in different corners for wide and narrow forms.  
Although the maximum printable area for narrow forms is 8.5 by 17 inches, and the maximum printable  
area for wide forms is 17 by 17 inches, the examples show the printable area for letter-size forms.  
74 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Default  
Media  
Origin  
0, 0  
Default  
Media  
Origin  
0, 0  
8.5 inches  
Top  
11 inches  
Printable  
Area  
11.0  
inches  
Printable  
Area  
8.5  
inches  
Wide Form  
Narrow Form  
Figure 25. Printable Area on the Infoprint 3000–ES1 and –ED1/ED2 Printers  
Media Specifications  
The Infoprint 3000–ES1 and –ED1/ED2 printers accept the following media:  
Media types:  
Preprinted or blank fanfold forms, roll-feed paper  
Media widths:  
Model ES1  
8 inches to 18 inches (203 mm to 457 mm)  
Models ED1/ED2  
9 inches to 18 inches (229 mm to 457 mm)  
Media lengths:  
7 inches to 14 inches (178 mm to 356 mm) standard; 7 inches to 28 inches (178 mm to 712 mm)  
with pre- and post-processing options  
Media weights:  
Model ES1  
16 lb. to 42 lb. (60 gsm to 157 gsm)  
Models ED1/ED2  
16 lb. to 28 lb. (60 gsm to 105 gsm)  
Attachments  
The InfoPrint 3000-ES1 and 3000-ED1/ED2 support a maximum of two attachments. These attachments  
can be:  
v ESCON channel  
v System/370 parallel channel  
v Token Ring (TCP/IP)  
v Ethernet (TCP/IP)  
v FDDI (TCP/IP)  
The two attachments may be the same (for example, two ESCON channels), or mixed (for example, one  
ESCON and one Token-Ring). The exception is that the printer can have only one TCP/IP attachment of  
any flavor. You cannot have two Token-Ring attachments, for example. For a single printer (a simplex  
printer, a duplex printing system, or a dual simplex printer), only one attachment can be active at a time. If  
Chapter 13. Infoprint 3000–ES1 and –ED1/ED2 Printers (3300) 75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
both attachments are to the same system, or to a tightly-coupled system, and the attachments are of the  
same type channel (example, both are ESCON or both are parallel channel), then switching between the  
two attachments can be performed dynamically by the host system. If the attachments or host differ, or the  
hosts are not tightly-coupled, then the switch must be performed manually by the operator. The printer  
must be disabled from the current system and attachment before it can be enabled to the other  
attachment.  
System/370 Parallel Channel  
System/370 parallel channel attachment is supported on OS/390, PSF/MVS, PSF/VM, and PSF/VSE  
printing environments.  
v For S/370 parallel channel attachment, a control unit position on a S/370 parallel block multiplexer  
channel is required on an IBM 3090™ or ES/9000™ processor.  
v The following processors are also supported for S/370 parallel channel attachments: S/390 Parallel  
Enterprise Server, and the S/390 Multiprise 2000 servers.  
v Attachment is also supported via the 9034 ESCON Converter Model 1.  
ESCON Channel  
ESCON channel is supported on OS/390, PSF/MVS, PSF/VM, and PSF/VSE printing environments.  
v The IBM Infoprint 3000-ES1 and 3000-ED1/ED2 may be attached natively to IBM ESCON channel  
(3090-J, 9021, 9121, 9221, 9672, 2003).  
v Attachment is also supported via the 9032/9033 ESCON Directors and 9036 ESCON Remote Channel  
Model 1 and Model 2.  
The ESCON attachment may be shared between different ESCON systems or different ESCON multiple  
image facility (EMIF) images, if ALL host systems connected to the printer are using the OS/390 (V1R3.0  
or higher) operating system and ALL of the PSF/MVS applications in those systems have the APAR  
OW29992 installed. Such OS/390 systems can be guests of VM/ESA.  
When these conditions are met for ESCON then the multihost flag can be set to “TRUE” in the printer.  
This will automatically invoke the protocol allowing the printer to print only one host (or OS/390 guest of  
VM) at a time. When the first host is printing the second host will receive an “assigned elsewhere”  
message until the first host is finished printing and releases the printer.  
Token-Ring (TCP/IP) Attachment  
Token-Ring (TCP/IP) attachment is supported on PS/400, PSF for AIX, and Infoprint Manager for AIX  
printing environments along with selected RS/6000 and AS/400 models. The 3000-ES1 and  
3000-ED1/ED2 are connected to the host Token-Ring through the IBM Token-Ring cabling via the Token  
Ring High-performance adapter, which is contained in the AFCCU. The control unit can be attached to  
either a 16 Mbit/sec or a 4 Mbit/sec Token-Ring LAN. The TCP/IP Token-Ring Attachment will attach to the  
following devices:  
v 8228 Token Ring Multistation Access Unit attached to an AS/400 or RS/6000 processor  
v 8230 Token Ring Network Controller Access attached to an AS/400 or RS/6000 processor  
v 8228 Token Ring Multistation Access Unit attached to a 3172, 3174, 3745, 3725, or 3720 attached to a  
3090, ES/9000, or 308X processor  
v 8230 Token Ring Multistation Access Unit attached to a 3172, 3174, 3745, 3725, or 3720 attached to a  
3090, ES/9000, or 308X processor  
The printer may be located at a maximum distance of 100 meters (328 ft) from the 8228 Multistation  
Access Unit or 8230Controlled Access Unit.  
The distance between the 8228 Multistation Access Units can be increased with either the 8220 or 8219  
Optical Fiber Repeater.  
v Installation Instructions are provided with the feature.  
76 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ethernet 10/100 BaseT (TCP/IP)  
Ethernet 10/100 BaseT (TCP/IP) attachment is supported on PSF/400, PSF for AIX, and Infoprint Manager  
for AIX printing environments. An Ethernet Adapter Card is supplied with Specify Feature number 9993  
and Special Feature number 4165. The adapter card is installed in the IBM Infoprint 3000-ES1 and ED2  
AFCCU processors. The IBM Infoprint 3000-ES1 and ED1/ED2 may then be attached to an Ethernet LAN.  
v 10/100 BaseT LAN using Twisted Pair Cabling  
– IBM supplies a Twisted Pair wrap plug (PN 00G2380)  
v Installation Instructions are provided with the features.  
FDDI (TCP/IP)  
FDDI (TCP/IP) attachment is supported on PSF for AIX and Infoprint Manager printing environments and  
for selected RS/6000 models. The Infoprint 3000-ES1 and 3000-ED1/ED2 are connected to the host FDDI  
through FDDI 62.5/125 multimode fiber cabling using SC connectors via the FDDI Single Station adapter,  
which is contained in the AFCCU. The FDDI (TCP/IP) attachment will attach to the following devices:  
v Directly to RS/6000  
v 8260 Multiprotocol Intelligent Switching Hub attached to an RS/6000 processor  
The printer may be located at a maximum distance of 2 Kilometers from the 826 Multiprotocol Intelligent  
Switching Hub or RS/6000 processor.  
Chapter 13. Infoprint 3000–ES1 and –ED1/ED2 Printers (3300) 77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 14. Infoprint 4000 IS1– and –IS2 Printers (4000–IS1  
and –IS2)  
This section describes the Infoprint 4000–IS1 and Infoprint 4000–IS2 printer characteristics. The Infoprint  
4000–IS1 and Infoprint 4000–IS2 are continuous-forms printers that use laser and electrophotographic  
technology to print text, images, graphics, and bar codes at up to 229 impressions per minute (ipm) for the  
Infoprint 4000–IS1 printer and 324 impressions per minute (ipm) for the Infoprint 4000–IS2 printer.  
Figure 26. Infoprint 4000–IS1 and –IS2 Printers  
Table 73 summarizes the printer characteristics for the Infoprint 4000–IS1 and –IS2 printers.  
Table 73. Infoprint 4000–IS1 and –IS2 Printer Characteristics  
Printer Characteristics  
Characteristic Value  
Infoprint 4000–IS1  
Characteristic Value  
Infoprint 4000–IS21  
Print technology  
Datastreams  
Laser  
IPDS  
Form type  
Continuous  
Number of input bins  
Number of output bins  
Up to 16 inch (406 mm) stack of paper (box)  
Up to 14 inch (355 mm) stack of paper; supports 7 inch to 14 inch  
folds  
Finisher attachments  
Manual forms feed  
Envelope printing  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 73. Infoprint 4000–IS1 and –IS2 Printer Characteristics (continued)  
MICR printing  
*With either RPQ 8B4013 or 8B4018 installed  
yes*  
no  
Duplex printing  
Color  
*With the IBM 4005 Infoprint Hi-Lite Color printer  
yes*  
attached2  
Adjust print-quality levels  
Printhead resolution  
yes  
240 dpi  
300 dpi  
Maximum printing rates for letter (8.5 x 11 inches)  
inches per second  
32.5  
46  
inches per minute  
1,950  
2,760  
Maximum printing rates for letter in pages per minute3  
1–up landscape (8.5 inches long) simplex  
1–up landscape (8.5 inches long) duplex  
2–up portrait (11 inches long) simplex  
2–up portrait (11 inches long) duplex  
Maximum printing rates for A4 (210 x 297 mm)  
mm per second  
229  
354  
324  
501  
n/a  
n/a  
825  
1168  
mm per minute  
49,530  
70,104  
Maximum printing rates for A4 in pages per minute3  
1–up landscape (210 mm long) simplex  
1–up landscape (210 mm long) duplex  
2–up portrait (297 mm long) simplex  
2–up portrait (297 mm long) duplex  
Maximum usage in pages per month (duty cycles)4  
Letter: 1–up landscape (8.5 inches long)  
Letter: 2–up landscape 11 inches long)  
A4: 1–up landscape (210 mm long)  
A4: 2–up landscape (297 mm long)  
235  
333  
330  
472  
n/a  
n/a  
5,600,000 simplex  
8,700,000 simplex  
5,700,000 simplex  
8,200,000 simplex  
8,000,000 simplex  
12,300,000 simplex  
8,100,000 simplex  
11,500,000 simplex  
1. The 4000–IS2 printer was originally shipped with a print speed of 44 inches per second. All 4000–IS2 printers  
shipped after February 17, 1998 (or with upgrades 9324 or 4260 installed) have a print speed of 46 inches per  
second.  
2. The Infoprint 4005 Hi-Lite Color post-processor provides a high-speed, high-quality, all-points-addressable (APA)  
color printing system to complement the industry-leading quality and reliability the IBM Infoprint 4000 Wide or  
Wide Duplex printers (240 dpi models). Visit the IBM Printing Systems Inter page at  
http://www.ibm.com/printers for more information about the Infoprint 4005.  
3. Maximum printing rate is the maximum number of pages of the indicated size and configuration that can be  
printed at the constant speed of paper movement shown for each printer. Rates for pages of different sizes and  
configuration can be calculated by dividing the form length into the printer speed. Actual printing rate will be less  
if the printer cannot reach this rate due to complexity or density of the data or the ability of the system to deliver  
data at this rate.  
4. Maximum usage is based on operating 7 days a week, 24 hours a day, at maximum printing rate with normal  
maintenance and operations activity. IBM does not recommend reaching this monthly maximum on consistent  
basis.  
80 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printable Area  
The printable area depends on the size of the form being used. The Infoprint 4000–IS1 and –IS2 printers  
can print from perforation to perforation when using roll forms. However, when printing on folded forms, the  
printing may be degraded in areas near a folded perforation, an internal perforation, or any cut in the form  
because of the “tenting” (fold memory) of the form.  
Figure 27 shows examples of the printable areas of a roll form for a Infoprint 4000 IS1 and IS2 printers.  
Notice that the media origin is located in different corners for wide and narrow forms. The printable area  
for the narrow form is 8.5 by 11 inches. The printable area for the wide form is 11 by 8.5 inches.  
Default  
Default  
Media  
Media  
Origin  
0, 0  
Origin  
0, 0  
8.5 inches  
Top  
11 inches  
Printable  
Area  
11.0  
inches  
Printable  
Area  
8.5  
inches  
Wide Form  
Narrow Form  
Figure 27. Printable Area for 9.5 by 11-Inch (Narrow) and a 12 by 8.5-Inch (Wide) Roll Forms on Infoprint 4000–IS1  
and –IS2 printers  
Figure 28 on page 82 shows examples of the printable areas of folded forms for a Infoprint 4000–IS1 and  
–IS2 printers. Notice that the media origin is located in different corners for wide and narrow forms. The  
printable area for the narrow form is 8.5 by 10.66 inches. The printable area for the wide form is 11 by  
8.16 inches.  
Chapter 14. Infoprint 4000 IS1– and –IS2 Printers (4000–IS1 and –IS2) 81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FOR TEXT, OCR, AND BAR CODES  
Default  
Media  
Origin  
0, 0  
Default  
Media  
Origin  
0, 0  
8.5 inches  
Top  
0.33 inch  
11 inches  
0.33 inch  
Recommended  
Printable  
Area  
10.34  
Recommended  
Printable  
Area  
inches  
7.84  
inches  
0.33 inch  
0.33 inch  
Narrow Form  
Wide Form  
Figure 28. Printable Area for 9.5 by 11-Inch (Narrow) and a 12 by 8.5-Inch (Wide) Folded Forms on Infoprint 4000–IS1  
and –IS2 printers  
Media Specifications  
The Infoprint 4000–IS1 and –IS2 printers accept the following media:  
Media types:  
Preprinted or blank fanfold forms, roll feed paper, some labels  
Media widths:  
8 inches to 18 inches (203 to 457 mm)  
Media lengths:  
3 inches to 14 inches (76 to 356 mm) standard; up to 28 inches (711 mm) with RPQ (additional  
memory required)  
Media weights:  
Model IS1  
16 to 42 lbs. (60 to 160 gsm)  
Model IS2  
16 to 28 lbs. (60 to 105 gsm)  
Attachments  
System/370 Parallel Channel  
For S/370 parallel channel attachment, a control unit position on a S/370 parallel block multiplexer channel  
is required on an IBM 4361, 4381, 3090, ES/9370, or ES/9000 processor. The following processors are  
also supported for S/370 parallel channel attachment, Parallel Enterprise Server Models R1, R2, and R3  
S/390 G3 Enterprise Server, and the S/390 Multiprise™ 2000. Attachment is also supported via the 9034  
ESCON converter model 1. The S/370 Channel is supported in MVS, VM, and VSE operating system  
environments.  
ESCON Channel  
The IBM InfoPrint 4000 IS1/IS2 may be attached natively to ESCON channels. Note that when attached  
via ESCON, the IBM InfoPrint 4000 IS1/IS2 is supported on the MVS, VM, and VSE operating systems  
only. The IBM InfoPrint 4000 IS1/IS2 may also be attached to selected PS/2, RS/6000, AS/400 models  
82 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
using Token-Ring (TCP/IP), or Ethernet (TCP/IP). Attachment is also supported via the 9032/9033 ESCON  
Directors, and 9036 ESCON Remote Channel Extender.  
Token-Ring (TCP/IP) Attachment  
The IBM InfoPrint 4000 IS1/IS2 is connected to the host Token-Ring through the IBM Token-Ring cabling  
via the Token-Ring High-Performance adapter, which is contained in the AFCCU. The attachment card and  
token-ring adapter cable P/N 53F3930 (approximately 4.6 m (15 ft)) in length are included with the IBM  
InfoPrint 4000 IS1/IS2. The control unit can be attached to either a 16Mbit/sec or a 4Mbit/sec Token-Ring  
LAN. The TCP/IP Token Ring Attachment will attach to the following devices:  
v 8228 Token Ring Multistation Access Unit attached to an AS/400, PS/2, or RS/6000 processor.  
v 8230 Token Ring Network Controller Access Unit attached to an AS/400, PS/2, or RS/6000 processor.  
v 8228 Token Ring Multistation Access Unit attached to a 3172, 3174, 3745, 3725 or 3720 attached to a  
3090, ES/9000, 308X or 4381 processor.  
v 8230 Token Ring Multistation Access Unit attached to a 3172, 3174, 3745, 3725, or 3720 attached to a  
3090, ES/9000, 308X or 4381 processor.  
The printer may be located at a maximum distance of 100 meters (333ft.) from the 8228 Multistation  
Access Unit or 8230 Controlled Access Unit. The distance between the 8228 Multistation Access Units can  
be increased with either the 8220 or 8219 Optical Fiber Repeater.  
Ethernet (TCP/IP) Attachment  
An Ethernet Adapter Card (P/N 00G3369) is supplied with Specify Feature 9990 and Special Feature  
4161. This is installed in the processor of the AFCCU of the IBM InfoPrint 4000 IS1/IS2. The IBM InfoPrint  
4000 IS1/IS2 may then be attached to an Ethernet LAN via one of the following means:  
v Ethernet Thin Coax  
– IBM Supplies a Thin Coax wrap connector (P/N 02G7433)  
v Ethernet Thick Coax  
– IBM Supplies the Thick Coax wrap connector (D-shell connector; P/N 71F1167)  
v Ethernet Twisted Pair  
– IBM Supplies a Twisted Pair Transceiver (P/N 00G2906)  
– IBM Supplies a Twisted Pair Wrap plug (P/N 00G2380)  
Chapter 14. Infoprint 4000 IS1– and –IS2 Printers (4000–IS1 and –IS2) 83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
84 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 15. Infoprint 4000–IR1/IR2 and –IR3/IR4 Printers  
(4000–IR1/IR2 and –IR3/IR4)  
This section describes the Infoprint 4000–IR1/IR2 and Infoprint–IR3/IR4 printer characteristics. The  
Infoprint 4000–IR1/IR2 and –IR3/IR4 are continuous-forms printers that use laser and electrophotographic  
technology to print text, images, graphics, and bar codes at up to 464 impressions per minute (ipm) for the  
Infoprint 4000–IR1/IR2 printer and 708 impressions per minute (ipm) for the Infoprint 4000–IR3/IR4 printer  
in duplex mode. The Infoprint 4000–IR1/IR2 and –IR3/IR4 printers have 18-inch wide paper paths with a  
17-inch wide print width, which permits printing of two 8.5-by-11 inch or two ISO A4 pages on a single side  
of a sheet. The Infoprint 4000–IR1/IR2 and –IR3/IR4 printers use the Advanced Function Common Control  
Unit (AFCCU) based on RISC technology.  
The Infoprint 4000 –IR1/IR2 and –IR3/IR4 also has 480/600 pels-per-inch resolution and the Print Quality  
Enhancement (PQE) function, which smoothes edges on diagonal lines, protects fine details, improves the  
fidelity of images, and allows for adjustment of the boldness of text and the darkness of images.  
Figure 29. Infoprint 4000–IR1/IR2 and –IR3/IR4 Printers  
Table 74 summarizes the printer characteristics for the Infoprint 4000–IR1/IR2 and –IR3/IR4 printers  
Table 74. Infoprint 4000–IR1/IR2 and –IR3/IR4 Printer Characteristics  
Printer Characteristics  
Characteristic Value  
Characteristic Value  
Infoprint 4000–IR1/IR2  
Infoprint 4000–IR3/IR4  
Print technology  
Datastreams  
Laser  
IPDS  
Form type  
Continuous  
Number of input bins  
Number of output bins  
Up to 16 inch (406 mm) stack of paper (box)  
Up to 14 inch (356 mm) stack of paper (internal stacker); supports  
7 inch to 14 inch folds  
Finisher attachments  
Manual forms feed  
Envelope printing  
MICR printing  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
no  
Duplex printing  
Color  
yes  
no  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 74. Infoprint 4000–IR1/IR2 and –IR3/IR4 Printer Characteristics (continued)  
Adjust print-quality levels  
yes  
Printhead resolution  
480 dpi  
600 dpi  
Maximum printing rates for letter (8.5 x 11 inches)  
inches per second  
21.3  
32.5  
inches per minute  
1,278  
1,950  
Maximum printing rates for letter in pages per minute1  
1–up landscape (8.5 inches long) simplex  
1–up landscape (8.5 inches long) duplex  
2–up portrait (11 inches long) simplex  
2–up portrait (11 inches long) duplex  
Maximum printing rates for A4 (210 x 297 mm)  
mm per second  
153  
306  
232  
464  
229  
458  
354  
708  
541  
825  
mm per minute  
32,461  
49,530  
Maximum printing rates for A4 in pages per minute1  
1–up landscape (210 mm long) simplex  
1–up landscape (210 mm long) duplex  
2–up portrait (297 mm long) simplex  
2–up portrait (297 mm long) duplex  
Maximum usage in pages per month (duty cycles)2  
Letter: 1–up landscape (8.5 inches long)  
Letter: 2–up portrait (11inches long)  
A4: 1–up landscape (210 mm long)  
A4: 2–up portrait (297 mm long)  
153  
306  
218  
436  
235  
470  
333  
666  
7,300,000 duplex  
11,300,000 duplex  
7,500,000 duplex  
10,700,000 duplex  
8,700,000 duplex  
17,400,000 duplex  
8,200,000 duplex  
16,700,000 duplex  
1. Maximum printing rate is the maximum number of pages of the indicated size and configuration that can be  
printed at the constant speed of paper movement shown for each printer. Rates for pages of different sizes and  
configuration can be calculated by dividing the form length into the printer speed. Actual printing rate will be less  
if the printer cannot reach this rate due to complexity or density of the data or the ability of the system to deliver  
data at this rate.  
2. Maximum usage is based on operating 7 days a week, 24 hours a day, at maximum printing rate with normal  
maintenance and operations activity. IBM does not recommend reaching this monthly maximum on consistent  
basis.  
Printable Area  
The printable area depends on the size of the form being used. The Infoprint 4000–IR1/IR2 and –IR3/IR4  
printers can print from perforation to perforation when using roll forms. However, when printing on folded  
forms, the printing may be degraded in areas near a folded perforation, an internal perforation, or any cut  
in the form because of the “tenting” (fold memory) of the form.  
Figure 30 on page 87 shows an example of the printable area of a standard, letter-size roll form for the  
Infoprint 4000–IR1/IR2 and –IR3/IR4 printers. Notice that the media origin is located in different corners for  
wide and narrow forms. Although the maximum printable area for narrow forms is 8.5 by 17 inches, and  
the maximum printable area for wide forms is 17 by 17 inches, the examples show the printable area for  
letter-size forms.  
86 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Default  
Media  
Origin  
0, 0  
Default  
Media  
Origin  
0, 0  
8.5 inches  
Top  
11 inches  
Printable  
Area  
11.0  
inches  
Printable  
Area  
8.5  
inches  
Wide Form  
Narrow Form  
Figure 30. Printable Area in IPDS Mode on the Infoprint 4000–IR1/IR2 and –IR3/IR4 Printers  
Media Specifications  
The Infoprint 4000–IR1/IR2 and –IR3/IR4 printers accepts the following media:  
Media types:  
Preprinted or blank fanfold forms, roll-feed paper, some labels  
Media widths:  
9 inches to 18 inches (225 mm to 457 mm); 17 inches maximum (432 mm) when operating with  
pinless RPQ  
Media lengths:  
3 inches to 14 inches (76 mm to 356 mm) with on-board stacker; 3 inches to 25 inches (76 mm to  
635 mm) with Post-Processing  
Media weights:  
16 lb. to 28 lb. (60 gsm to 105 gsm)  
Attachments  
The InfoPrint 4000–IR1/IR2 and –IR3/IR4 supports a maximum of two attachments. These attachments  
can be:  
v ESCON channel  
v System/370 parallel channel  
v Token Ring (TCP/IP)  
v FDDI (TCP/IP)  
The two attachments may be the same (e.g., 2 ESCON channels), or mixed (eg., 1 ESCON and 1  
Token-Ring). The exception is that the printer can have only 1 TCP/IP attachment of any flavor. You cannot  
have 2 Token-Ring or 2 FDDI attachments, or a combination of 1 Token-Ring or 1 FDDI attachments.  
When printing in duplex configuration, only one attachment can be active at a time. If both attachments are  
to the same system, or to a tightly-coupled system, and the attachments are of the same type (example,  
both are ESCON or both are parallel channel), then switching between the two attachments can be  
performed dynamically by the host system. If the attachments or host differ, or the hosts are not  
tightly-coupled, then the switch must be performed manually by the operator. The printer must be disabled  
from the current system and attachment before it can be enabled to the other attachment.  
Chapter 15. Infoprint 4000–IR1/IR2 and –IR3/IR4 Printers (4000–IR1/IR2 and –IR3/IR4) 87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System/370 Parallel Channel  
System/370 parallel channel attachment is supported on PSF/MVS, PSF/VM, and PSF/VSE printing  
environments. For S/370 parallel channel attachment, a control unit position on a S/370 parallel block  
multiplexer channel is required on an IBM 3090™ or ES/9000™ processor. The following processors are  
also supported for S370 parallel channel attachments, S/390 Parallel Enterprise Server, and the S/390  
Multiprise 2000 servers. Attachment is also supported via the 9034 ESCON Converter Model 1.  
ESCON Channel  
ESCON channel is supported on PSF/MVS, PSF/VM, and PSF/VSE printing environments. The IBM  
InfoPrint 4000 may be attached natively to IBM ESCON channels (3090-J, 9021, 9121, 9221, 9672, 2003).  
Attachment is also supported via the 9032/9033 ESCON Directors and 9036 ESCON Remote Channel  
Extender model 1 and model 2.  
Token-Ring (TCP/IP) Attachment  
Token-Ring (TCP/IP) attachment is supported on PSF for OS/2 and PSF for AIX printing environments  
along with selected RS/6000 and AS/400 models. The 4000 is connected to the host Token-Ring through  
the IBM Token-Ring cabling via the Token Ring High-performance adapter, which is contained in the  
AFCCU. The control unit can be attached to either a 16Mbit/sec or a 4Mbit/sec Token-Ring LAN. The  
TCP/IP Token-Ring Attachment will attach to the following devices:  
v 8228 Token Ring Multistation Access Unit attached to an AS/400 or RS/6000 processor  
v 8230 Token Ring Network Controller Access attached to an AS/400 or RS/6000 processor  
v 8228 Token Ring Multistation Access Unit attached to a 3172, 3174, 3745, 3725, or 3720 attached to a  
3090, ES/9000, or 308X processor  
v 8230 Token Ring Multistation Access Unit attached to a 3172, 3174, 3745, 3725, or 3720 attached to a  
3090, ES/9000, or 308X processor  
The printer may be located at a maximum distance of 100 meters (333 ft) from the 8228 Multistation  
Access Unit or 8230 Controlled Access Unit.  
The distance between the 8228 Multistation Access Units can be increased with either the 8220 or 8219  
Optical Fiber Repeater.  
v Installation Instructions are provided with the feature.  
FDDI (TCP/IP)  
FDDI (TCP/IP) attachment is supported on PFS for AIX printing environments for selected RS/6000  
models. The 4000 is connected to the host FDDI through FDDI 62.5/125 multi-mode fiber cabling using SC  
connectors via the FDDI Single Station adapter, which is contained in the AFCCU. The FDDI (TCP/IP)  
attachment will attach to the following devices:  
v Directly to RS/6000  
v 8260 Multiprotocol Intelligent Switching Hub attached to an RS/6000 processor.  
The printer may be located at a maximum distance of 2 Kilometers from the 8260 Multiprotocol Intelligent  
Switching Hub or RS/6000 processor.  
88 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 16. Infoprint 4000–ID1/ID2 and –ID3/ID4 Printers  
(4000–ID1/ID2 and –ID3/ID4)  
This chapter describes Infoprint 4000–ID1/ID2 and –ID3/ID4 printer characteristics. The Infoprint  
4000–ID1/ID2 and –ID3/ID4 printers are a channel-attached or LAN-attached, continuous-forms printer that  
use a laser and electrophotographic technology to print text, images, graphics, and bar codes at up to 229  
ipm (impressions per minute) for the Infoprint 4000–ID1/ID2 and 324 ipm for the –ID3/ID4. The Infoprint  
4000–ID1/ID2 and –ID3/ID4 printers use the Advanced Function Common Control Unit (AFCCU) based on  
RISC technology, which provides as standard the Advanced Function Image and Graphics (AFIG) feature  
and the Decompression Performance Enhancement (DPE) feature.  
The Infoprint 4000–ID1/ID2 and –ID3/ID4 printers also have 300 pels-per-inch resolution and the Print  
Quality Enhancement (PQE) function, which smooths edges on diagonal lines, protects fine details,  
improves the fidelity of images, and allows for adjustment of the boldness of text and the darkness of  
images.  
Figure 31. Infoprint 4000–ID1/ID2 and –ID3/ID4 Printers  
Table 75 summarizes the printer characteristics for the Infoprint 4000–ID1/ID2 and –ID3/ID4 printers.  
Table 75. Infoprint 4000–ID1/ID2 and –ID3/ID4 Printer Characteristics  
Printer Characteristics  
Characteristic Value  
Characteristic Value  
Infoprint 4000–ID1/ID2  
Infoprint 4000–ID3/ID4  
Print technology  
Datastreams  
Laser  
IPDS  
Form type  
Continuous  
Number of input bins  
Number of output bins  
Finisher attachments  
Manual forms feed  
Envelope printing  
Up to 16 inch (406 mm) stack of paper (box)  
Up to 14 inch (355 mm) stack of paper  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
MICR printing  
*With either RPQ 8B4013 or 8B4018 installed  
yes*  
yes  
Duplex printing  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 75. Infoprint 4000–ID1/ID2 and –ID3/ID4 Printer Characteristics (continued)  
Color  
*With the IBM 4005 Infoprint Hi-Lite Color printer  
yes*  
yes  
attached2  
Adjust print-quality levels  
Printhead resolution  
240 dpi  
300 dpi  
Maximum printing rates for letter (8.5 x 11 inches)  
inches per second  
32.5  
46  
inches per minute  
1,950  
2,760  
Maximum printing rates for letter in pages per minute2  
1–up landscape (8.5 inches long) simplex  
1–up landscape (8.5 inches long) duplex  
2–up portrait (11 inches long) simplex  
2–up portrait (11 inches long) duplex  
Maximum printing rates for A4 (210 x 297 mm)  
mm per second  
229  
458  
354  
708  
324  
648  
501  
1,002  
825  
1168  
mm per minute  
49,530  
70,104  
Maximum printing rates for A4 in pages per minute2  
1–up landscape (210 mm long) simplex  
1–up landscape (210 mm long) duplex  
2–up portrait (297 mm long) simplex  
2–up portrait (297 mm long) duplex  
Maximum usage in pages per month (duty cycles)3  
Letter: 1–up landscape (8.5 inches long)  
Letter: 2–up portrait (11inches long)  
A4: 1–up landscape (210 mm long)  
A4: 2–up portrait (297 mm long)  
235  
470  
333  
666  
330  
660  
472  
944  
11,200,000 duplex  
17,400,000 duplex  
11,600,000 duplex  
16,700,000 duplex  
16,200,000 duplex  
24,600,000 duplex  
16,300,000 duplex  
23,000,000 duplex  
1. The Infoprint 4005 Hi-Lite Color post-processor provides a high-speed, high-quality, all-points-addressable (APA)  
color printing system to complement the industry-leading quality and reliability the IBM Infoprint 4000 ID1/ID2  
Wide or Wide Duplex printers (240 dpi models). Visit the IBM Printing Systems Inter page at  
http://www.ibm.com/printers for more information about the Infoprint 4005.  
2. Maximum printing rate is the maximum number of pages of the indicated size and configuration that can be  
printed at the constant speed of paper movement shown for each printer. Rates for pages of different sizes and  
configuration can be calculated by dividing the form length into the printer speed. Actual printing rate will be less  
if the printer cannot reach this rate due to complexity or density of the data or the ability of the system to deliver  
data at this rate.  
3. Maximum usage is based on operating 7 days a week, 24 hours a day, at maximum printing rate with normal  
maintenance and operations activity. IBM does not recommend reaching this monthly maximum on consistent  
basis.  
Printable Area  
The printable area depends on the size of the form being used. The Infoprint 4000–ID1/ID2 and –ID3/ID4  
printers can print from perforation to perforation when using roll forms. However, when printing on folded  
forms, the printing may be degraded in areas near a folded perforation, an internal perforation, or any cut  
in the form because of the “tenting” (fold memory) of the form.  
90 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 32 shows examples of the printable areas of a standard, letter-size roll form for a Infoprint  
4000–ID1/ID2 and –ID3/ID4 printers. Notice that the media origin is located in different corners for wide  
and narrow forms. Although the maximum printable area for narrow forms is 8.5 by 17 inches, and the  
maximum printable area for wide forms is 17 by 17 inches, the examples show the printable area for  
letter-size forms.  
Default  
Default  
Media  
Media  
Origin  
0, 0  
Origin  
0, 0  
8.5 inches  
Top  
11 inches  
Printable  
Area  
11.0  
inches  
Printable  
Area  
8.5  
inches  
Wide Form  
Narrow Form  
Figure 32. Recommended printable areas. These are the recommended printable areas on 9.5 by 11-inch (narrow)  
and 18 by 8.5-inch (wide) roll forms.  
Figure 33 on page 92 and Figure 34 on page 92 show examples of the recommended printable areas for  
folded forms for a Infoprint 4000–ID1/ID2 and –ID3/ID4 printers. Notice that the media origin is located in  
different corners for wide and narrow forms. The recommended printable area for the narrow form is 8.5  
by 10.34 inches for text, OCR, or bar code data and 8.5 by 10.0 inches for images or solid-fill data. The  
recommended printable area for the wide form is 11 by 7.84 inches for text, OCR, or bar code data and 11  
by 7.5 for images or solid-fill data. The printer can print to the perforation on the leading and trailing edges  
of the form; however, the print quality within 0.33 inch of the perforation may be degraded.  
Chapter 16. Infoprint 4000–ID1/ID2 and –ID3/ID4 Printers (4000–ID1/ID2 and –ID3/ID4) 91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FOR TEXT, OCR, AND BAR CODES  
Default  
Media  
Origin  
0, 0  
Default  
Media  
Origin  
0, 0  
8.5 inches  
Top  
0.33 inch  
11 inches  
0.33 inch  
Recommended  
Printable  
Area  
10.34  
Recommended  
Printable  
Area  
inches  
7.84  
inches  
0.33 inch  
0.33 inch  
Narrow Form  
Wide Form  
Figure 33. Folded Forms on the Infoprint 4000–ID1/ID2 and –ID3/ID4 Printers. These are the recommended printable  
areas on 9.5 by 11-inch (narrow) and 12 by 8.5-inch (wide) folded forms for printing text, OCR, and bar code data.  
FOR SOLIDFILL AND IMAGES  
Default  
Default  
Media  
Origin  
0, 0  
Media  
Origin  
0, 0  
8.5 inches  
Top  
0.50 inch  
11 inches  
0.50 inch  
Recommended  
Printable  
Area  
10.00  
Recommended  
Printable  
Area  
inches  
7.5  
inches  
0.50 inch  
0.50 inch  
Narrow Form  
Wide Form  
Figure 34. Folded Forms on the Infoprint–4000 ID1/ID2 and –ID3/ID4 Printers. These are the recommended printable  
areas on 9.5 by 11-inch (narrow) and 12 by 8.5-inch (wide) folded forms for printing solid-fill data and images.  
Media Specifications  
The Infoprint 4000–ID1/ID2 and –ID3/ID4 printers accept the following media:  
Media types:  
Preprinted or blank fanfold forms, roll-feed paper, some labels  
Media widths:  
Simplex  
8 inches to 18 inches (203 mm to 457 mm)  
Duplex  
9 inches to 18 inches (229 mm to 457 mm)  
92 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Media lengths:  
7 inches to 14 inches (178 mm to 356 mm) standard (Infoprint 4000–ID1/ID2 printer); 7 inches to  
28 inches (178 mm to 712 mm) standard (Infoprint 4000–ID3/ID4 printer); 17 inches (432 mm) with  
post-processing; up to 22 inches (558 mm) with RPQ (additional memory required)  
Media weights:  
16 lb. to 42 lb. (60 gsm to 160 gsm) simplex; 18 lb. to 28 lb. (68 gsm to 107 gsm) duplex  
Attachments  
The InfoPrint 4000–ID1/ID2 and –ID3/ID4 supports a maximum of two attachments. These attachments  
can be:  
v ESCON channel  
v System/370 parallel channel  
v Token Ring (TCP/IP)  
v FDDI (TCP/IP)  
The two attachments may be the same (e.g., 2 ESCON channels), or mixed (eg., 1 ESCON and 1  
Token-Ring). The exception is that the printer can have only 1 TCP/IP attachment of any flavor. You cannot  
have 2 Token-Ring or 2 FDDI attachments, or a combination of 1 Token-Ring or 1 FDDI attachments.  
When printing in duplex configuration, only one attachment can be active at a time. If both attachments are  
to the same system, or to a tightly-coupled system, and the attachments are of the same type (example,  
both are ESCON or both are parallel channel), then switching between the two attachments can be  
performed dynamically by the host system. If the attachments or host differ, or the hosts are not  
tightly-coupled, then the switch must be performed manually by the operator. The printer must be disabled  
from the current system and attachment before it can be enabled to the other attachment.  
System/370 Parallel Channel  
System/370 parallel channel attachment is supported on PSF/MVS, PSF/VM, and PSF/VSE printing  
environments. For S/370 parallel channel attachment, a control unit position on a S/370 parallel block  
multiplexer channel is required on an IBM 3090™ or ES/9000™ processor. The following processors are  
also supported for S370 parallel channel attachments, S/390 Parallel Enterprise Server, and the S/390  
Multiprise 2000 servers. Attachment is also supported via the 9034 ESCON Converter Model 1.  
ESCON Channel  
ESCON channel is supported on PSF/MVS, PSF/VM, and PSF/VSE printing environments. The IBM  
InfoPrint 4000 may be attached natively to IBM ESCON channels (3090-J, 9021, 9121, 9221, 9672, 2003).  
Attachment is also supported via the 9032/9033 ESCON Directors and 9036 ESCON Remote Channel  
Extender model 1 and model 2.  
Token-Ring (TCP/IP) Attachment  
Token-Ring (TCP/IP) attachment is supported on PSF for OS/2 and PSF for AIX printing environments  
along with selected RS/6000 and AS/400 models. The Infoprint 4000 is connected to the host Token-Ring  
through the IBM Token-Ring cabling via the Token Ring High-performance adapter, which is contained in  
the AFCCU. The control unit can be attached to either a 16Mbit/sec or a 4Mbit/sec Token-Ring LAN. The  
TCP/IP Token-Ring Attachment will attach to the following devices:  
v 8228 Token Ring Multistation Access Unit attached to an AS/400 or RS/6000 processor  
v 8230 Token Ring Network Controller Access attached to an AS/400 or RS/6000 processor  
v 8228 Token Ring Multistation Access Unit attached to a 3172, 3174, 3745, 3725, or 3720 attached to a  
3090, ES/9000, or 308X processor  
v 8230 Token Ring Multistation Access Unit attached to a 3172, 3174, 3745, 3725, or 3720 attached to a  
3090, ES/9000, or 308X processor  
Chapter 16. Infoprint 4000–ID1/ID2 and –ID3/ID4 Printers (4000–ID1/ID2 and –ID3/ID4) 93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The printer may be located at a maximum distance of 100 meters (333 ft) from the 8228 Multistation  
Access Unit or 8230 Controlled Access Unit.  
The distance between the 8228 Multistation Access Units can be increased with either the 8220 or 8219  
Optical Fiber Repeater.  
v Installation Instructions are provided with the feature.  
FDDI (TCP/IP)  
FDDI (TCP/IP) attachment is supported on PFS for AIX printing environments for selected RS/6000  
models. The 4000 is connected to the host FDDI through FDDI 62.5/125 multi-mode fiber cabling using SC  
connectors via the FDDI Single Station adapter, which is contained in the AFCCU. The FDDI (TCP/IP)  
attachment will attach to the following devices:  
v Directly to RS/6000  
v 8260 Multiprotocol Intelligent Switching Hub attached to an RS/6000 processor.  
The printer may be located at a maximum distance of 2 Kilometers from the 8260 Multiprotocol Intelligent  
Switching Hub or RS/6000 processor.  
94 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 17. Infoprint 4000–ID5/ID6 Printer (4000–ID5/ID6)  
This chapter describes Infoprint 4000–ID5/ID6 printer characteristics. The Infoprint 4000–ID5/ID6 printer is  
a channel-attached or LAN-attached, continuous-forms printer that uses a laser and electrophotographic  
technology to print text, images, graphics, and bar codes at up to 1,002 ipm (impressions per minute). The  
Infoprint 4000–ID5/ID6 printer use the Advanced Function Common Control Unit (AFCCU) based on RISC  
technology, which provides as standard the Advanced Function Image and Graphics (AFIG) feature and  
the Decompression Performance Enhancement (DPE) feature.  
The Infoprint 4000–ID5/ID6 printer also have 600 pels-per-inch resolution and the Print Quality  
Enhancement (PQE) function, which smooths edges on diagonal lines, protects fine details, improves the  
fidelity of images, and allows for adjustment of the boldness of text and the darkness of images.  
Figure 35. Infoprint 4000–ID5/ID6 Printer  
Table 76 summarizes the printer characteristics for the Infoprint 4000–ID5/ID6 printer.  
Table 76. Infoprint 4000–ID5/ID6 Printer Characteristics  
Printer Characteristics  
Print technology  
Characteristic Value  
Laser  
Datastreams  
IPDS  
Form type  
Continuous  
Number of input bins  
Number of output bins  
Finisher attachment  
Manual forms feed  
Envelope printing  
Up to 16 inch (406 mm) stack of paper (box)  
Up to 14 inch (356 mm) stack of paper  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
MICR printing  
*With either RPQ 8B4013 or 8B4018 installed  
yes*  
yes  
Duplex printing  
Color  
yes*  
yes  
*With the IBM 4005 Infoprint Hi-Lite Color printer attached2  
Adjust print-quality levels  
Printhead resolution  
480 dpi  
600 dpi  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 76. Infoprint 4000–ID5/ID6 Printer Characteristics (continued)  
Maximum printing rates for letter (8.5 x 11 inches)  
inches per second  
46  
inches per minute  
2,760  
Maximum printing rates for letter in pages per minute2  
1–up landscape (8.5 inches long) simplex  
1–up landscape (8.5 inches long) duplex  
2–up portrait (11 inches long) simplex  
2–up portrait (11 inches long) duplex  
Maximum printing rates for A4 (210 x 297 mm)  
mm per second  
324  
648  
501  
1,002  
1168  
mm per minute  
70,104  
Maximum printing rates for A4 in pages per minute2  
1–up landscape (210 mm long) simplex  
1–up landscape (210 mm long) duplex  
2–up portrait (297 mm long) simplex  
2–up portrait (297 mm long) duplex  
Maximum usage in pages per month (duty cycles)3  
Letter: 1–up landscape (8.5 inches long)  
Letter: 2–up portrait (11inches long)  
A4: 1–up landscape (210 mm long)  
A4: 2–up portrait (297 mm long)  
333  
666  
472  
944  
16,000,000 duplex  
24,600,000 duplex  
16,200,000 duplex  
23,000,000 duplex  
1. The Infoprint 4005 Hi-Lite Color post-processor provides a high-speed, high-quality, all-points-addressable (APA)  
color printing system to complement the industry-leading quality and reliability the IBM Infoprint 4000 ID1/ID2  
Wide or Wide Duplex printers (240 dpi models). Visit the IBM Printing Systems Inter page at  
http://www.ibm.com/printers for more information about the Infoprint 4005.  
2. Maximum printing rate is the maximum number of pages of the indicated size and configuration that can be  
printed at the constant speed of paper movement shown for each printer. Rates for pages of different sizes and  
configuration can be calculated by dividing the form length into the printer speed. Actual printing rate will be less  
if the printer cannot reach this rate due to complexity or density of the data or the ability of the system to deliver  
data at this rate.  
3. Maximum usage is based on operating 7 days a week, 24 hours a day, at maximum printing rate with normal  
maintenance and operations activity. IBM does not recommend reaching this monthly maximum on consistent  
basis.  
Printable Area  
The printable area depends on the size of the form being used. The Infoprint 4000–ID5/ID6 printer can  
print from perforation to perforation when using roll forms. However, when printing on folded forms, the  
printing may be degraded in areas near a folded perforation, an internal perforation, or any cut in the form  
because of the “tenting” (fold memory) of the form.  
Figure 36 on page 97 shows examples of the printable areas of a standard, letter-size roll form for a  
Infoprint 4000–ID5/ID6 printer. Notice that the media origin is located in different corners for wide and  
narrow forms. Although the maximum printable area for narrow forms is 8.5 by 17 inches, and the  
maximum printable area for wide forms is 17 by 17 inches, the examples show the printable area for  
letter-size forms.  
96 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Default  
Media  
Origin  
0, 0  
Default  
Media  
Origin  
0, 0  
8.5 inches  
Top  
11 inches  
Printable  
Area  
11.0  
inches  
Printable  
Area  
8.5  
inches  
Wide Form  
Narrow Form  
Figure 36. Recommended Printable Areas on the Infoprint 4000–ID5/ID6 Printer. These are the recommended  
printable areas on 9.5 by 11-inch (narrow) and 18 by 8.5-inch (wide) roll forms.  
Figure 37 and Figure 38 on page 98 show examples of the recommended printable areas for folded forms  
for a Infoprint 4000–ID5/ID6 printer. Notice that the media origin is located in different corners for wide and  
narrow forms. The recommended printable area for the narrow form is 8.5 by 10.34 inches for text, OCR,  
or bar code data and 8.5 by 10.0 inches for images or solid-fill data. The recommended printable area for  
the wide form is 11 by 7.84 inches for text, OCR, or bar code data and 11 by 7.5 for images or solid-fill  
data. The printer can print to the perforation on the leading and trailing edges of the form; however, the  
print quality within 0.33 inch of the perforation may be degraded.  
FOR TEXT, OCR, AND BAR CODES  
Default  
Default  
Media  
Origin  
0, 0  
Media  
Origin  
0, 0  
8.5 inches  
Top  
0.33 inch  
11 inches  
0.33 inch  
Recommended  
Printable  
Area  
10.34  
Recommended  
Printable  
Area  
inches  
7.84  
inches  
0.33 inch  
0.33 inch  
Narrow Form  
Wide Form  
Figure 37. Folded Forms on the Infoprint 4000–ID5/ID6 Printer. These are the recommended printable areas on 9.5 by  
11-inch (narrow) and 12 by 8.5-inch (wide) folded forms for printing text, OCR, and bar code data.  
Chapter 17. Infoprint 4000–ID5/ID6 Printer (4000–ID5/ID6) 97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FOR SOLIDFILL AND IMAGES  
Default  
Media  
Origin  
0, 0  
Default  
Media  
Origin  
0, 0  
8.5 inches  
Top  
0.50 inch  
11 inches  
0.50 inch  
Recommended  
Printable  
Area  
10.00  
Recommended  
Printable  
Area  
inches  
7.5  
inches  
0.50 inch  
0.50 inch  
Narrow Form  
Wide Form  
Figure 38. Folded Forms on the Infoprint 4000–ID5/ID6 Printer. These are the recommended printable areas on 9.5 by  
11-inch (narrow) and 12 by 8.5-inch (wide) folded forms for printing solid-fill data and images.  
Media Specifications  
The Infoprint 4000–ID5/ID6 printer accepts the following media:  
Media types:  
Preprinted or blank fanfold forms, roll-feed paper, some labels  
Media widths:  
Simplex  
8 inches to 18 inches (203 mm to 457 mm)  
Duplex  
9 inches to 18 inches (229 mm to 457 mm)  
Media lengths:  
3 inches to 14 inches (76 mm to 356 mm) standard stacker; up to 28 inches (711 mm) with  
post-processing and Infoprint  
Media weights:  
16 lb. to 28 lb. (60 gsm to 105 gsm) dual simplex; 18 lb. to 28 lb. (68 gsm to 105 gsm) duplex  
Attachments  
The InfoPrint 4000–ID5/ID6 supports a maximum of two attachments. These attachments can be:  
v ESCON channel  
v System/370 parallel channel  
v Token Ring (TCP/IP)  
v FDDI (TCP/IP)  
The two attachments may be the same (e.g., 2 ESCON channels), or mixed (eg., 1 ESCON and 1  
Token-Ring). The exception is that the printer can have only 1 TCP/IP attachment of any flavor. You cannot  
have 2 Token-Ring or 2 FDDI attachments, or a combination of 1 Token-Ring or 1 FDDI attachments.  
When printing in duplex configuration, only one attachment can be active at a time. If both attachments are  
to the same system, or to a tightly-coupled system, and the attachments are of the same type (example,  
both are ESCON or both are parallel channel), then switching between the two attachments can be  
performed dynamically by the host system. If the attachments or host differ, or the hosts are not  
98 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
tightly-coupled, then the switch must be performed manually by the operator. The printer must be disabled  
from the current system and attachment before it can be enabled to the other attachment.  
System/370 Parallel Channel  
System/370 parallel channel attachment is supported on PSF/MVS, PSF/VM, and PSF/VSE printing  
environments. For S/370 parallel channel attachment, a control unit position on a S/370 parallel block  
multiplexer channel is required on an IBM 3090™ or ES/9000™ processor. The following processors are  
also supported for S370 parallel channel attachments, S/390 Parallel Enterprise Server, and the S/390  
Multiprise 2000 servers. Attachment is also supported via the 9034 ESCON Converter Model 1.  
ESCON Channel  
ESCON channel is supported on PSF/MVS, PSF/VM, and PSF/VSE printing environments. The IBM  
InfoPrint 4000 may be attached natively to IBM ESCON channels (3090-J, 9021, 9121, 9221, 9672, 2003).  
Attachment is also supported via the 9032/9033 ESCON Directors and 9036 ESCON Remote Channel  
Extender model 1 and model 2.  
Token-Ring (TCP/IP) Attachment  
Token-Ring (TCP/IP) attachment is supported on PSF for OS/2 and PSF for AIX printing environments  
along with selected RS/6000 and AS/400 models. The Infoprint 4000 is connected to the host Token-Ring  
through the IBM Token-Ring cabling via the Token Ring High-performance adapter, which is contained in  
the AFCCU. The control unit can be attached to either a 16Mbit/sec or a 4Mbit/sec Token-Ring LAN. The  
TCP/IP Token-Ring Attachment will attach to the following devices:  
v 8228 Token Ring Multistation Access Unit attached to an AS/400 or RS/6000 processor  
v 8230 Token Ring Network Controller Access attached to an AS/400 or RS/6000 processor  
v 8228 Token Ring Multistation Access Unit attached to a 3172, 3174, 3745, 3725, or 3720 attached to a  
3090, ES/9000, or 308X processor  
v 8230 Token Ring Multistation Access Unit attached to a 3172, 3174, 3745, 3725, or 3720 attached to a  
3090, ES/9000, or 308X processor  
The printer may be located at a maximum distance of 100 meters (333 ft) from the 8228 Multistation  
Access Unit or 8230 Controlled Access Unit.  
The distance between the 8228 Multistation Access Units can be increased with either the 8220 or 8219  
Optical Fiber Repeater.  
v Installation Instructions are provided with the feature.  
FDDI (TCP/IP)  
FDDI (TCP/IP) attachment is supported on PFS for AIX printing environments for selected RS/6000  
models. The 4000 is connected to the host FDDI through FDDI 62.5/125 multi-mode fiber cabling using SC  
connectors via the FDDI Single Station adapter, which is contained in the AFCCU. The FDDI (TCP/IP)  
attachment will attach to the following devices:  
v Directly to RS/6000  
v 8260 Multiprotocol Intelligent Switching Hub attached to an RS/6000 processor.  
The printer may be located at a maximum distance of 2 Kilometers from the 8260 Multiprotocol Intelligent  
Switching Hub or RS/6000 processor.  
Chapter 17. Infoprint 4000–ID5/ID6 Printer (4000–ID5/ID6) 99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
100 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 18. InfoColor 70 Printer (3170–002)  
This section describes the InfoColor 70 printer characteristics. The InfoColor 70 printer is a 600 dpi,  
token-ring or Ethernet, continuous-forms printer that uses electrophotographic technology to print text,  
images, graphics, and bar codes at up to 70 impressions per minute (ipm) in duplex mode. The InfoColor  
70 printer has a 12.5 inch wide paper path with a 12 inch wide print width, which permits printing of two  
8.5 x 11 inch or two ISO A4 pages on a single side of a sheet.  
Figure 39. InfoColor 70 Printer  
Table 77 summarizes the printer characteristics for the InfoColor 70 printers.  
Table 77. InfoColor 70 Printer Characteristics  
Printer Characteristics  
Print technology  
Datastreams  
Characteristic Value  
Electrophotographic  
PostScript Level 2  
Form type  
Continuous  
1 standard  
1 standard  
n/a  
Number of input bins  
Number of output bins  
Manual forms feed  
Envelope printing  
MICR printing  
n/a  
no  
Duplex printing  
yes  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 77. InfoColor 70 Printer Characteristics (continued)  
Printer Characteristics  
Characteristic Value  
Color  
yes  
no  
Adjust print-quality levels  
Printhead resolution  
600 dpi  
Maximum printing rates for letter (8.5 x 11 inches)  
inches per second  
4.8  
inches per minute  
289  
Maximum printing rates for letter in pages per minute1  
1–up landscape (8.5 inches long) simplex  
1–up landscape (8.5 inches long) duplex  
2–up portrait (11 inches long) simplex  
2–up portrait (11 inches long) duplex  
Maximum printing rates for A4 (210 x 297 mm)  
mm per second  
35  
70  
n/a  
n/a  
122.5  
7,350  
mm per minute  
Maximum printing rates for A4 in pages per minute1  
1–up landscape (210 mm long) simplex  
1–up landscape (210 mm long) duplex  
2–up portrait (297 mm long) simplex  
2–up portrait (297 mm long) duplex  
Maximum usage in pages per month (duty cycles)2  
Letter: 1–up landscape (8.5 inches long)  
Letter: 2–up landscape (11inches long)  
A4: 1–up landscape (210 mm long)  
A4: 2–up landscape (297 mm long)  
35  
70  
n/a  
n/a  
680,000 duplex  
n/a  
700,000 duplex  
n/a  
1. Maximum printing rate is the maximum number of pages of the indicated size and configuration that can be  
printed at the constant speed of paper movement shown for each printer. Rates for pages of different sizes and  
configuration can be calculated by dividing the form length into the printer speed. Actual printing rate will be less  
if the printer cannot reach this rate due to complexity or density of the data or the ability of the system to deliver  
data at this rate.  
2. Maximum usage is based on operating 7 days a week, 24 hours a day, at maximum printing rate with normal  
maintenance and operations activity. IBM does not recommend reaching this monthly maximum on consistent  
basis.  
Printable Area  
The InfoColor 70 cannot print in certain unprintable areas near the edges of the form.  
Figure 40 on page 103 shows an example of the printable area of a form. The printable area shown is 8.17  
by 10.66 inches.  
102 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Default  
Media Origin  
0, 0  
Top  
Figure 40. Printable Area in IPDS Mode on the InfoColor 70  
Media Specifications  
The InfoColor 70 accepts the following media:  
Media types:  
Web-fed roll, coated or uncoated  
Media widths:  
8.27 inches to 12.6 inches (210 mm to 320 mm)  
Media lengths:  
Up to 17 inches (430 mm) stacked output  
Media weights:  
60 gsm to 200 gsm, 22 lb. to 74 lb. cover, 16 lb. to 52 lb. bond, 41 lb. to 135 lb. text  
Attachments  
The controller attaches to a LAN through either an Ethernet or Token Ring Adapter:  
v Token-Ring attachment (TCP/IP) option  
v Ethernet attachment (TCP/IP, IPX. EtherTalk)  
Print Drivers  
Two Utilities Diskettes are included with the IBM InfoColor 70. These diskettes are for Macintosh and the  
IBM Personal Computer, and contain PostScript Printer Description (PPD) files and a Printer Description  
File (PDF) for QuarkXpress. Also included is the set registration length QuarkXpress extension that is used  
to adjust crop marks.  
Chapter 18. InfoColor 70 Printer (3170–002) 103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
104 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 19. Infoprint Color 100 Printer (3170–003)  
This section describes the Infoprint Color 100 printer characteristics. The Infoprint Color 100 is a 600 dpi  
token-ring and Ethernet, continuous-forms printer that uses laser and electrophotographic technology to  
print text, images, graphics, and bar codes at up to 100 impressions per minute (ipm) in duplex mode. The  
Infoprint Color 100 has an 19 inch wide paper path with a 18.875 inch wide print width, which permits  
printing of two 8.5 x 11 inch or two ISO A4 pages on a single side of a sheet.  
Figure 41. Infoprint Color 100 Printer  
Table 78 summarizes the printer characteristics for the Infoprint Color 100 printers.  
Table 78. InfoColor 100 Printer Characteristics  
Printer Characteristics  
Print technology  
Datastreams  
Characteristic Value  
Electrophotographic  
PostScript Level 2  
Form type  
Continuous  
1 standard  
1 standard  
n/a  
Number of input bins  
Number of output bins  
Manual forms feed  
Envelope printing  
MICR printing  
n/a  
no  
Duplex printing  
yes  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 78. InfoColor 100 Printer Characteristics (continued)  
Printer Characteristics  
Characteristic Value  
Color  
yes  
no  
Adjust print-quality levels  
Printhead resolution  
600 dpi  
Maximum printing rates for letter (8.5 x 11 inches)  
inches per second  
4.8  
inches per minute  
289  
Maximum printing rates for letter in pages per minute1  
1–up landscape (8.5 inches long) simplex  
1–up landscape (8.5 inches long) duplex  
2–up portrait (11 inches long) simplex  
2–up portrait (11 inches long) duplex  
Maximum printing rates for A4 (210 x 297 mm)  
mm per second  
34  
68  
52  
105  
122.5  
7,350  
mm per minute  
Maximum printing rates for A4 in pages per minute1  
1–up landscape (210 mm long) simplex  
1–up landscape (210 mm long) duplex  
2–up portrait (297 mm long) simplex  
2–up portrait (297 mm long) duplex  
Maximum usage in pages per month (duty cycles)2  
Letter: 1–up landscape (8.5 inches long)  
Letter: 2–up landscape (11inches long)  
A4: 1–up landscape (210 mm long)  
A4: 2–up landscape (297 mm long)  
34  
68  
52  
105  
680,000 duplex  
1,050,000 duplex  
700,000 duplex  
1,000,000 duplex  
1. Maximum printing rate is the maximum number of pages of the indicated size and configuration that can be  
printed at the constant speed of paper movement shown for each printer. Rates for pages of different sizes and  
configuration can be calculated by dividing the form length into the printer speed. Actual printing rate will be less  
if the printer cannot reach this rate due to complexity or density of the data or the ability of the system to deliver  
data at this rate.  
2. Maximum usage is based on operating 7 days a week, 24 hours a day, at maximum printing rate with normal  
maintenance and operations activity. IBM does not recommend reaching this monthly maximum on consistent  
basis.  
Printable Area  
The Infoprint Color 100 accepts paper from 8.17 to 12 inches in width. For 12 inch wide paper the printer  
the unprintable area of the form is .05 inches on either side of the paper and .083 inch from either end of  
the page. Figure 42 on page 107 shows an example of the printable area of a form 12 inches wide by 17  
inches long.  
Note: Do not print edge-to-edge on paper that is less than 12 inches in width.  
106 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
11.9 inches  
Top  
0.050 inch  
0.05 inch  
0.083 inch  
Printable  
Area  
16.834 inches  
0.083 inch  
Figure 42. Printable Area on the Infoprint Color 100 Printer  
Media Specifications  
The Infoprint Color 100 accepts the following media:  
Media types:  
Web-fed roll, coated or uncoated  
Media widths:  
19.7 inches to 20 inches (500 to 508 mm)  
Media lengths:  
11 inches to 39.37 inches (279 mm to 1,000 mm)  
Media weights:  
60 gsm to 250 gsm, 22 lb. to 92 lb. cover, 16 lb. to 66 lb. bond, 41 lb. to 169 lb. text  
Attachments  
The controller attaches to a LAN through the standard 10/100 BaseT Ethernet port, or through the optional  
Token Ring or Ethernet Adapters.  
The 10/100 BaseT Ethernet port is standard on all InfoPrint Color 100 printers. This connection provides  
10Mb/sec or 100Mb/sec connectivity to 10BaseT or 100BaseT Ethernet LANs, including the ability to  
automatically sense the speed at the hub port.  
Print Drivers  
Two utilities diskettes are included with the IBM InfoPrint Color 100. These diskettes are for Macintosh,  
Windows 95, and Windows 3.1X, and contain PostScript Printer Description (PPD) files, a Printer  
Description File (PDF) for QuarkXpress, and ICC color profiles. Also included is the set registration length  
QuarkXpress extension that is used to adjust crop marks.  
Chapter 19. Infoprint Color 100 Printer (3170–003) 107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
108 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 20. Infoprint Color 130 Printer (3170–004)  
This section describes the Infoprint Color 130 printer characteristics. The Infoprint Color 130 printer is a  
600 dpi token-ring and Ethernet, continuous-forms printer that uses electrophotographic technology to print  
text, images, graphics, and bar codes at up to 130 impressions per minute (ipm) in duplex mode. The  
Infoprint Color 130 printer has an 19 inch wide paper path with a 18.875 inch wide print width, which  
permits printing of two 8.5 x 11 inch or two ISO A4 pages on a single side of a sheet.  
Figure 43. Infoprint Color 130 printer  
Table 79 summarizes the printer characteristics for the Infoprint Color 130 printers.  
Table 79. InfoColor 130 Printer Characteristics  
Printer Characteristics  
Print technology  
Datastreams  
Characteristic Value  
Laser  
PostScript Level 2, Level 3 compatible, and  
PDF  
Form type  
Continuous  
Number of input bins  
Number of output bins  
Manual forms feed  
Envelope printing  
MICR printing  
1 standard  
1 standard  
n/a  
n/a  
no  
Duplex printing  
Color  
yes  
yes  
no  
Adjust print-quality levels  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 79. InfoColor 130 Printer Characteristics (continued)  
Printer Characteristics  
Characteristic Value  
Printhead resolution  
600 dpi  
Maximum printing rates for letter (8.5 x 11 inches)  
inches per second  
6.3  
inches per minute  
378  
Maximum printing rates for letter in pages per minute1  
1–up landscape (8.5 inches long) simplex  
1–up landscape (8.5 inches long) duplex  
2–up portrait (11 inches long) simplex  
2–up portrait (11 inches long) duplex  
Maximum printing rates for A4 (210 x 297 mm)  
mm per second  
44  
88  
68  
136  
160  
mm per minute  
9,600  
Maximum printing rates for A4 in pages per minute1  
1–up landscape (210 mm long) simplex  
1–up landscape (210 mm long) duplex  
2–up portrait (297 mm long) simplex  
2–up portrait (297 mm long) duplex  
Maximum usage in pages per month (duty cycles)2  
Letter: 1–up landscape (8.5 inches long)  
Letter: 2–up landscape (11inches long)  
A4: 1–up landscape (210 mm long)  
A4: 2–up landscape (297 mm long)  
44  
138  
n/a  
n/a  
680,000 duplex  
1,050,000 duplex  
700,000 duplex  
1,000,000 duplex  
1. Maximum printing rate is the maximum number of pages of the indicated size and configuration that can be  
printed at the constant speed of paper movement shown for each printer. Rates for pages of different sizes and  
configuration can be calculated by dividing the form length into the printer speed. Actual printing rate will be less  
if the printer cannot reach this rate due to complexity or density of the data or the ability of the system to deliver  
data at this rate.  
2. Maximum usage is based on operating 7 days a week, 24 hours a day, at maximum printing rate with normal  
maintenance and operations activity. IBM does not recommend reaching this monthly maximum on consistent  
basis.  
Printable Area  
The Infoprint Color 130 Printer accepts paper from 8.17 to 12 inches in width. For 12 inch wide paper the  
printer the unprintable area of the form is .05 inches on either side of the paper and .083 inch from either  
end of the page. Figure 44 on page 111 shows an example of the printable area of a form 12 inches wide  
by 17 inches long.  
Note: Do not print edge-to-edge on paper that is less than 12 inches in width.  
110 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
11.9 inches  
Top  
0.050 inch  
0.05 inch  
0.083 inch  
Printable  
Area  
16.834 inches  
0.083 inch  
Figure 44. Printable Area on the Infoprint Color 130 Printer  
Media Specifications  
The Infoprint Color 130 accepts the following media:  
Media types:  
Web-fed roll, coated or uncoated  
Media widths:  
19.7 inches to 20 inches (500 to 508 mm)  
Media lengths:  
11 inches to 39.37 inches (279 mm to 1,000 mm)  
Media weights:  
60 gsm to 240 gsm, 22 lb. to 92 lb. cover, 16 lb. to 64 lb. bond, 41 lb. to 169 lb. text  
Attachments  
The IBM Infoprint Color 130 must be attached to either a Token Ring or Ethernet LAN.  
The controller can attach the printer to the LAN through the 10/100 BaseT adapter that is standard, or  
through one of the optional adapters.  
The standard 10/100 BaseT Ethernet port provides 10Mb/sec or 100 Mb/sec connectivity to 10BaseT or  
100BaseT Ethernet LANs, including the ability to automatically sense the speed of the hub port.  
A maximum of one of the following optional adapters are available on the Model 004.  
v Token-Ring Adapter  
v Ethernet 10/100 BaseT Adapter  
v Gigabit Ethernet  
Print Drivers  
Two utilities diskettes are included with the IBM Infoprint Color 130. These diskettes are for Macintosh,  
and Windows 95. The diskettes contain PostScript Printer Description (PPD) files, and ICC color profiles.  
Chapter 20. Infoprint Color 130 Printer (3170–004) 111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
112 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 21. Infoprint Color 130 Plus Printer (3170–005)  
This section describes the Infoprint Color 130 Plus Printer characteristics. The Infoprint Color 130 Plus  
Printer is a 600 dpi token-ring, continuous-forms printer that uses electrophotographic technology to print  
text, images, graphics, and bar codes at up to 130 impressions per minute (ipm) in duplex mode. The  
Infoprint Color 130 Plus Printer has an 19 inch wide paper path with a 18.875 inch wide print width, which  
permits printing of two 8.5 x 11 inch or two ISO A4 pages on a single side of a sheet. The Infoprint Color  
130 Plus Printer uses the Advanced Function Common Control Unit (AFCCU).  
Figure 45. Infoprint Color 130 Plus Printer  
Table 80 summarizes the printer characteristics for the Infoprint Color 130 Plus Printers.  
Table 80. InfoColor 130 Plus Printer Characteristics  
Printer Characteristics  
Print technology  
Datastreams  
Characteristic Value  
Laser  
IPDS  
Form type  
Continuous  
1 standard  
1 standard  
n/a  
Number of input bins  
Number of output bins  
Finisher attachments  
Manual forms feed  
Envelope printing  
MICR printing  
n/a  
n/a  
no  
Duplex printing  
Color  
yes  
yes  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 80. InfoColor 130 Plus Printer Characteristics (continued)  
Printer Characteristics  
Characteristic Value  
Adjust print-quality levels  
no  
Printhead resolution  
600 dpi  
Maximum printing rates for letter (8.5 x 11 inches)  
inches per second  
6.3  
inches per minute  
378  
Maximum printing rates for letter in pages per minute2  
1–up landscape (8.5 inches long) simplex  
1–up landscape (8.5 inches long) duplex  
2–up portrait (11 inches long) simplex  
2–up portrait (11 inches long) duplex  
Maximum printing rates for A4 (210 x 297 mm)  
mm per second  
44  
138  
68  
136  
160  
mm per minute  
9,600  
Maximum printing rates for A4 in pages per minute3  
1–up landscape (210 mm long) simplex  
1–up landscape (210 mm long) duplex  
2–up portrait (297 mm long) simplex  
2–up portrait (297 mm long) duplex  
Maximum usage in pages per month (duty cycles)2  
Letter: 1–up landscape (8.5 inches long)  
Letter: 2–up landscape (11inches long)  
A4: 1–up landscape (210 mm long)  
A4: 2–up landscape (297 mm long)  
44  
138  
n/a  
n/a  
680,000 duplex  
1,050,000 duplex  
700,000 duplex  
1,000,000 duplex  
1. The Infoprint Color 130 Plus can print PostScript and PDF when used with Infoprint Manager.  
2. Maximum printing rate is the maximum number of pages of the indicated size and configuration that can be  
printed at the constant speed of paper movement shown for each printer. Rates for pages of different sizes and  
configuration can be calculated by dividing the form length into the printer speed. Actual printing rate will be less  
if the printer cannot reach this rate due to complexity or density of the data or the ability of the system to deliver  
data at this rate.  
3. Maximum usage is based on operating 7 days a week, 24 hours a day, at maximum printing rate with normal  
maintenance and operations activity. IBM does not recommend reaching this monthly maximum on consistent  
basis.  
Printable Area  
The Infoprint Color 130 Plus Printer accepts paper from 8.17 to 12 inches in width. For 12 inch wide paper  
the printer the unprintable area of the form is .05 inches on either side of the paper and .083 inch from  
either end of the page. Figure 46 on page 115 shows an example of the printable area of a form 12 inches  
wide by 17 inches long.  
Note: Do not print edge-to-edge on paper that is less than 12 inches in width.  
114 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
11.9 inches  
Top  
0.050 inch  
0.05 inch  
0.083 inch  
Printable  
Area  
16.834 inches  
0.083 inch  
Figure 46. Printable Area on the Infoprint Color 130 Plus Printer  
Media Specifications  
The Infoprint Color 130 Plus accepts the following media:  
Media types:  
Web-fed roll, coated or uncoated  
Media widths:  
19.7 inches to 20 inches (500 to 508 mm)  
Media lengths:  
6 inches to 39.37 inches (150 mm to 1,000 mm)  
Media weights:  
60 gsm to 250 gsm, 22 lb. to 92 lb. cover, 16 lb. to 64 lb. bond, 41 lb. to 169 lb. text  
Attachments  
S/390 Host Attachment  
At least one of the following adapters must be used to attach the Infoprint Color 130 Plus Model 005 to a  
host System/390 for PSF for OS/390.  
v ESCON Channel  
v FICON Channel  
Gigabit Ethernet Infoprint Manager Attachment  
Gigabit Ethernet must be used to attach the Infoprint Color 130 Plus to an RS/6000 Infoprint Manager  
System.  
Host Software  
A host attachment to either Infoprint Manager for AIX running on an RS/6000 and/or a S/390 running PSF  
for OS/390 (5655-B17), is required. To transform PostScript or PDF for printing on an Infoprint Color 130  
Plus, Infoprint Manager for AIX is always required.  
Printer Attachment Rules  
The controller can attach the printer to the RS/6000 running Infoprint Manager through an Ethernet Gigabit  
adapter and to a S/390 running PSF for OS/390 through either an ESCON or FICON channel.  
Chapter 21. Infoprint Color 130 Plus Printer (3170–005) 115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A maximum of two of these adapters (Gigabit, FICON, or ESCON) can be installed on the 3170-005. Only  
one of the Gigabit or FICON adapters may be installed. Two ESCON adapters are allowed. Possible  
combinations include:  
v 1 Ethernet Gigabit Adapter  
v 1 FICON Adapter  
v 2 ESCON  
v 1 ESCON and One FICON  
v 1 Ethernet Gigabit and 1 ESCON  
v 1 Ethernet Gigabit and 1 FICON  
Infoprint Color 130 Plus Datastream Support  
The following datastreams are supported on an Infoprint Color 130 Plus attached to a host S/390 with PSF  
for OS/390.  
v AFP with Infoprint Color Image (FS45)  
v AFP line data  
v EPS embedded or referenced in the AFP datastream  
v
Single-page PDF embedded or referenced in the AFP datastream  
The following datastreams are supported on an Infoprint Color 130 Plus attached to an Infoprint Manager  
for AIX System.  
v All of the datastreams shown above for a S/390 with PSF for OS/390  
v GIF, TIFF, and JPEG (JFIF) images which have been transformed to an Infoprint Color Image in the  
Infoprint Manager System  
v PostScript 3 which has been transformed to an Infoprint Color Image in the Infoprint Manager System  
v PDF 1.3 which has been transformed to an Infoprint Color Image in the Infoprint Manager System  
A stand-alone version of the image conversion program is provided for the AIX and Windows NT platforms.  
This program can be used to convert TIFF, GIF, and JPEG (JFIF) images to Infoprint Color Images (FS45)  
in batch mode. The resulting Infoprint Color Image can then be stored in an Infoprint Manager or OS/390  
resource library, embedded or referenced in an AFP (MO:DCA-P) datastream, and printed using PSF for  
OS/390 or Infoprint Manager for AIX.  
Software Requirements  
Either PSF for OS/390 (5655-B17) V3R2 or Infoprint Manager for AIX V3R2 (5765-E42) must be installed  
on a host server to support Infoprint Color 130 Plus.  
Infoprint Manager for AIX requires APAR IY8860 and the Infoprint Color 130 Plus PRPQ #8A8091.  
Both PSF for OS/390 and Infoprint Manager for AIX support printing AFP (MO:DCA-P) datastreams with  
the new Infoprint Color Image (FS45) objects. Both also support printing AFP data streams with  
Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) objects or single-page PDF objects. These objects must reside in a S/390  
container library, in an AIX resource library, or in the resource group at the beginning of the AFP print file.  
Only Infoprint Manager for AIX supports printing PostScript or PDF files directly using a server-based AFP  
transform. The AFP Upload facility can be used to upload the AFP file generated by this transform to a  
S/390 for printing by PSF for OS/390.  
In addition to workstation-based application generators, the following products can be used to create color  
AFP data.  
v IBM Page Printer Formatting Aid/370 R1 (5688-190) with APAR PQ 37413.  
v The Page Printer Formatting Aid feature of Infoprint Manager for AIX V3 with APAR PQ37413  
v IBM Overlay Generation Language/370 V1R1 (5688-191)  
v The AFP Windows Driver  
116 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
An AFP Viewer that includes support for Infoprint Color Image (FS45), Encapsulated PostScript, and PDF  
objects is distributed with the printer. This viewer allows application developers to view Infoprint Color 130  
Plus datastreams from a workstation. This AFP Viewer can be installed on up to 10 developer  
workstations.  
A utility program to convert JPEG, GIF, and TIFF images to Infoprint Color Images (FS45) is also  
distributed with the Infoprint Color 130 Plus printer.  
APARS for Infoprint Color 130 Plus support are required for most of the above programs. Contact the IBM  
Supportline for information.  
Chapter 21. Infoprint Color 130 Plus Printer (3170–005) 117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
118 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 22. 4230 Printer (4230)  
This section describes 4230 Printer’s characteristics. The 4230 Printer is a tabletop, serial, dot-matrix,  
impact printer that prints text, images, graphics, and bar codes at up to 600 characters per second,  
depending on the model and print quality selected.  
Figure 47. 4230 Printer  
Table 81 summarizes the printer characteristics for the 4230 Printer.  
Table 81. 4230 Impact Printers  
Printer Characteristics  
Characteristic Value  
Maximum printing rate: characters per second (cps)  
375 cps (–xx1)  
480 cps (–xx2)  
600 cps (–xx3)  
Print technology  
Datastreams  
Form type  
Impact Dot Matrix  
PPDS, Epson, ASCII, SCS, IPDS  
Continuous  
Cut-Sheet  
Continuous forms input paths  
Continuous forms output paths  
Finisher attachments  
Manual forms feed  
Envelope printing  
MICR printing  
1 standard  
1 standard  
n/a  
yes  
n/a  
no  
Duplex printing  
no  
Color  
no  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 81. 4230 Impact Printers (continued)  
Operator-adjustable forms  
yes  
Printhead resolution (pels-per-inch)  
144 x 144  
16,000,000  
Maximum characters per second (cps) per month (duty cycles)  
Printable Area  
The size of the printable area must be set using a printer configuration option. If the defined printable area  
is not large enough to contain the page of data, a data-check exception (position check) occurs.  
Media Specifications  
The 4230 Printer accepts the following media:  
Media types:  
Operator-changeable forms modules, continuous forms up to 6 parts, cutsheet,  
document-on-demand/zero tear-off  
Media widths:  
3 inches to 15 inches (76 mm to 381 mm)  
Media lengths:  
3 inches to 14 inches (76 mm to 356 mm) continuous forms, 5 inches to 14 inches (127 mm to  
356 mm) cutsheet  
Attachments  
IBM 4230 Models 101, 102, 1I1, and 1S2 Impact Matrix Printers  
The IBM 4230 Models 101, 102, 1I1, and 1S2 Impact Matrix Printer may attach to systems as follows:  
v The System/36 - Workstation Control Unit, AS/400 system on a Twinaxial Workstation port, the 5294  
Control Unit - Workstation port (feature #3601 required) and 5X94 Control Units.  
IBM 4230 Model 201 Impact Matrix Printer  
The IBM 4230 Model 201 Impact Matrix Printer may attach to systems as follows:  
v The 3174 Control Unit - Terminal port (using Release A5.4, Release B4.0), or the 3274 Control Unit on  
a Category A terminal port (using Rel. C49.0 and Rel. D65.1), the 3276 Control Unit - Terminal port, or  
the 43X1 Processor Display/Printer Adapter or Workstation Adapter, the ES/9370 Processor Workstation  
Controller (feature #6020; using Release 5.1) a 9371 Micro Channel 370 3270 Adapter (feature #6120  
-VM/VSE only) or ES9000 - 9221 Workstation Subsystem Controller.  
IBM 4230 Models 202 and 2I1 Impact Matrix Printers  
The IBM 4230 Model 202 and 2I1 Impact Matrix Printers may attach to systems as follows:  
v IPDS Mode: The 3174 Control Unit - Terminal port (using Release A5.4, Release B4.0) or the 3274  
Control Unit on a Category A port (using Release D65.1; PTR 2893 for local non-SNA), the 4361  
Processor - Workstation Adapter port (feature #9261), ES/9370 Processor Workstation Controller  
(feature #6020; using Release 5.1), a 9371 Micro Channel 370 3270 Adapter (feature #6120 -VM/VSE  
only) or ES9000 - 9221 Workstation Subsystem Controller.  
v Non-IPDS Mode: The 3174 Control Unit - Terminal port (using Release A5.4, Release B4.0), or the  
3274 Control Unit on a Category A terminal port (using Rel. C49.0 and Rel. D65.1), the 3276 Control  
Unit - Terminal port, or the 43X1 Processor Display/Printer Adapter or Workstation Adapter, the ES/9370  
Processor Workstation Controller (feature #6020; using Release 5.1) a 9371 Micro Channel 370 3270  
Adapter (feature #6120 -VM/VSE only) or ES9000 - 9221 Workstation Subsystem Controller.  
120 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IBM 4230 Model 2S2 Impact Matrix Printer  
The IBM 4230 Model 2S2 Impact Matrix Printer may attach to systems as follows:  
v The 3174 Control Unit - Terminal port (using Release A5.4, Release B4.0), or the 3274 Control Unit on  
a Category A terminal port (using Rel. C49.0 and Rel. D65.1), the 3276 Control Unit - Terminal port, or  
the 43X1 Processor Display/Printer Adapter or Workstation Adapter, the ES/9370 Processor Workstation  
Controller (feature #6020; using Release 5.1) a 9371 Micro Channel 370 3270 Adapter (feature #6120  
-VM/VSE only) or ES9000 - 9221 Workstation Subsystem Controller.  
IBM 4230 Models 4I3, 4S3, 5I3, and 5S3 Impact Matrix Printers  
The RS-232C serial interface will attach to:  
v IBM AS/400 ASCII workstation controller  
v 3174 controller via the Asynchronous Emulation Adapter  
v RS/6000  
v PS/2 computer COMx ports  
v
v
LAN Attachment (i.e., Token Ring or Ethernet) via the Novell-certified IBM 4033 LAN adapter and the  
Intel NetPort  
IBM-compatible PCs utilizing an RS-232C interface  
The RS-422A serial interface will attach to:  
v RS/6000  
v AS/400 ASCII workstation controller  
The IBM PC ASCII (CENTRONICS) Parallel interface will attach to:  
v RS/6000 workstations, excluding POWERServer 930  
v PS/2 computer LPTx ports and to a Token-Ring or Ethernet LAN via one of these computers  
v LAN attachment via the Novell-certified IBM 4033 LAN adapter and the Intel NetPort IBM-compatible  
PC’s utilizing the IBM PC ASCII (Centronics) Parallel interface  
v AS/400 twinax terminals including 348X, 3477 and 3197  
v Coax terminal 3482  
The 4230 may attach to systems as follows:  
Models 4S3 and 4I3  
The System/36 - Workstation Control Unit, AS/400 system on a Twinaxial Workstation port, the 5294  
Control Unit - Workstation port (feature code 3601 required when attaching IPDS Model 4I3), the 5394 and  
5494 Control Units.  
Model 5I3 in IPDS Mode  
The 3174 Controller - Terminal port (using Release A5.4 or later, Release B4.0 or later, Release C1.1 or  
later), or the 3274 Control Unit on a Category A port (using Release D65.1; PTR 2893 for local non-SNA),  
the 4361 Processor - Workstation Adapter port (feature code 9261), ES/9370 Processor Workstation  
Controller (feature code 6020; using Release 5.1), a ES/9371 Processor - 3270 Adapter, or ES9000 - 9221  
Workstation Subsystem Controller.  
Model 5I3 in Non-IPDS Mode, Model 5S3  
The 3174 Controller - Terminal port (using Release A5.4 or later, Release B4.0 or later, Release C1.1 or  
later), or the 3274 Control Unit on a Category A terminal port (using Rel. C49.0 and Rel. D65.1), the 3276  
Control Unit - Terminal port, or the 43X1 Processor Display/Printer Adapter or Workstation Adapter, the  
ES/9370 Processor Workstation Controller (feature #6020; using Release 5.1) a ES/9371 Processor 3270  
Adapter, or ES9000 - 9221 Workstation Subsystem Controller.  
Chapter 22. 4230 Printer (4230) 121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fonts  
Although the 4230 Printer can print with downloaded symbol sets, the 4230 Printer prints only with  
single-byte resident symbol sets when driven by PSF.  
Because of differences between font technologies, text printed with symbol sets will not have the same  
appearance as text printed with the raster fonts of the same names.  
Infoprint Manager for Windows NT and Windows 2000  
Use the font mapping file supplied with Infoprint Manager. Refer to Working with Fonts on the  
Infoprint Manager for Windows NT and Windows 2000 web page for more information about using  
fonts.  
Infoprint Manager for AIX  
Use the font mapping file supplied with Infoprint Manager. Refer to Infoprint Manager for AIX:  
Administrator’s Guide for more information about using fonts.  
PSF for OS/390  
To use the resident raster fonts, the system programmer must identify them to PSF using the  
APSRMARK utility. Refer to Print Services Facility for OS/390: Customization for more information  
about using resident fonts.  
PSF/VM  
You cannot print with resident fonts, but you can print with downloaded raster fonts. Refer to Print  
Services Facility/VM: System Programming Guide for more information about using fonts.  
PSF/VSE  
To use the resident raster fonts, the system programmer must identify them to PSF using the  
APTRMARK utility. Refer to Print Services Facility/VSE: System Programming Guide for more  
information about using resident fonts.  
PSF for AS/400  
Refer to AS/400 Printer Device Programming for more information about using fonts.  
Operator-Adjustable Forms  
To align data on preprinted forms, the 4230 Printer operator can adjust the physical top and left margins,  
which will offset the page image on the printing medium. The horizontal (left margin) adjustment range is  
from −6.9 mm (−0.27 inches) to +38.35 mm (+1.51 inches). The vertical (top margin) adjustment range is  
from −30.5 mm (−1.2 inches) to +38.1 mm (+1.5 inches). This adjustment does not affect the size of the  
valid printable area; however, using this adjustment can produce positioning errors if the horizontal  
adjustment is too large for the form being used.  
Print-Quality Levels  
The 4230 Printer allows you to select different levels of print quality. Higher quality corresponds to slower  
print speeds. To select a print-quality level, use the QUALITY subcommand on the COPYGROUP  
command in the form definition. To use Fast Draft Quality, you must enable it using a printer configuration  
menu on the operator panel. Refer to your printer publications on how to do this. If the printer is not  
configured, all requests to print using Fast Draft will automatically be printed in DP Quality. Specify the  
values shown in Table 82 on the QUALITY subcommand to get the correct print-quality level.  
Table 82. 4230 Printer Print-Quality Selection Values  
Print-Quality Level  
Reserved  
Hexadecimal Value Range  
X'00'  
Decimal Value Range  
Fast Draft Quality  
DP Quality  
X'01' through X'2A'  
X'2B' through X'55'  
1 through 42  
43 through 85  
122 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 82. 4230 Printer Print-Quality Selection Values (continued)  
Print-Quality Level  
DP Text Quality  
Hexadecimal Value Range  
Decimal Value Range  
86 through 170  
171 through 254  
255  
X'56' through X'AA'  
X'AB' through X'FE'  
X'FF'  
NLQ Quality  
Printer Customized Default  
Not all symbol sets can be printed at all print-quality levels. Table 83 identifies the print-quality levels that  
can be used for some of the 4230 Printer symbol sets and suggests the name of a corresponding coded  
font that may be used for each symbol set. Refer to the 4230 Printer publications for a list of 4230 Printer  
symbol sets.  
Table 83. 4230 Printer Symbol Sets and Corresponding Coded Fonts  
Symbol Sets  
4230 Printer Print Quality  
Fast Draft  
DP  
DP text  
NLQ  
APL10  
X0AE10  
Courier Bold 10 Pitch  
Courier Bold 12 Pitch  
Courier Bold 15 Pitch  
Courier Double Wide Italic 15 Pitch  
Courier Double Wide 15 Pitch  
Courier Italic 10 Pitch  
Courier Italic 12 Pitch  
Courier Italic 15 Pitch  
Courier 10 Pitch  
X0CB10  
X0CB12  
X0CB15  
X0CW15  
X0CD15  
X0CI10  
X0CB10  
X0CB12  
X0CB15  
X0CW15  
X0CD15  
X0CI10  
X0CI12  
X0CI12  
X0CI15  
X0CI15  
X0CR10  
X0CR12  
X0CR15  
X0EBR9  
X0EIR9  
X0ESR9  
X0CR10  
X0CR12  
X0CR15  
X0EBR9  
X0EIR9  
X0ESR9  
Courier 12 Pitch  
Courier 15 Pitch  
Essay Bold Mixed Pitch  
Essay Italic Mixed Pitch  
Essay Standard Mixed Pitch  
Gothic Bold 10 Pitch  
Gothic Bold 12 Pitch  
Gothic Italic 12 Pitch  
Gothic Text 10 Pitch  
Gothic Text 12 Pitch  
Gothic Text 15 Pitch  
Katakana  
X0GB10  
X0GB12  
X0GI12  
X0GT10  
X0GT12  
X0GT15  
X0KN10  
X0GB10  
X0GB12  
X0GI12  
X0GT10  
X0GT12  
X0GT15  
X0KN10  
OCR-A  
X0AOA  
OCR-B  
X0OCRB  
PSF selects symbol sets according to the following hierarchy:  
1. If you select a symbol set that matches the print quality specified in the form definition, PSF prints the  
file.  
2. If you select a symbol set but do not specify a print quality, the print quality selected in the printer  
configuration or the printer default print quality is used.  
Chapter 22. 4230 Printer (4230) 123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. If you select a symbol set that does not match the print quality specified, the printer attempts to print  
the text using a “best fit” font, which it selects. Some pages may be duplicated, and some information  
on the page in error may be missing.  
4. If you select a symbol set that is not available on the 4230 Printer, PSF does not print the remainder of  
the file.  
5. With PSF for AS/400, if you select a symbol set that is not available on the 4230 Printer, and you  
specified absolute fidelity, PSF does not print the remainder of the file. If you specified content fidelity,  
PSF substitutes another symbol set and prints the file.  
Printer Capabilities  
The capabilities of the 4230 Printer are different from those of most of the other printers supported by PSF  
in the following ways:  
v Differences in the contents of the character sets in the fonts provided by PSF and in the symbol sets  
resident in the 4230 Printer may result in inconsistent printed output between the two types of fonts.  
v Although the 4230 Printer can print with downloaded symbol sets, it uses only resident symbol sets  
when driven by PSF.  
v The PSF for OS/390 and PSF/VSE default fonts specified in the CHARS parameter in the PRINTDEV  
statement cause errors in which PSF issues messages saying “resource not found”. Change or override  
the CHARS parameter to use a 4230 Printer symbol set.  
v The 4230 Printer prints both text and images in only 0° character orientation. All orientations other than  
0° are supported for graphics. The 4230 Printer does not support rotated fonts.  
v The 4230 Printer prints images with 144-pel resolution.  
v The 4230 Printer does not support multiple subgroups within a copy group in a form definition. Printing  
of multiple copies of individual pages within a subgroup is not supported.  
124 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 23. 4232 Impact Printer (4232)  
This section describes 4232 Impact Printer’s characteristics. The 4232 Impact Printer is a tabletop, serial,  
dot-matrix, impact printer that prints text, images, graphics, and bar codes at up to 480 characters per  
second, depending on the model and print quality selected.  
Figure 48. 4232 Impact Printer  
Table 84 summarizes the printer characteristics for the 4232 Impact printer.  
Table 84. 4232 Impact Printers  
Printer Characteristics  
Characteristic Value  
600 cps  
Maximum printing rate: characters per second (cps)  
Print technology  
Datastreams  
Form type  
Impact Dot Matrix  
PPDS, Epson, ASCII  
Continuous  
Cut-Sheet  
Continuous forms input paths  
Continuous forms output paths  
Finisher attachments  
Manual forms feed  
Envelope printing  
1 standard  
1 standard  
n/a  
yes  
n/a  
no  
MICR printing  
Duplex printing  
no  
Color  
no  
Operator-adjustable forms  
yes  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 84. 4232 Impact Printers (continued)  
Printhead resolution (pels-per-inch)  
144 x 144  
Maximum characters per second (cps) per month (duty cycles)  
16,000,000  
Printable Area  
The size of the printable area must be set using a printer configuration option. If the defined printable area  
is not large enough to contain the page of data, a data-check exception (position check) occurs.  
Media Specifications  
The 4232 Impact Printer accepts the following media:  
Media types:  
Operator-changeable forms modules, continuous forms up to 6 parts, cutsheet,  
document-on-demand/zero tear-off  
Media widths:  
3 inches to 15 inches (76 mm to 381 mm)  
Media lengths:  
3 inches to 14 inches (76 mm to 356 mm) continuous forms, 5 inches to 14 inches (127 mm to  
356 mm) cutsheet  
Attachments  
The RS-232C serial interface will attach to:  
v IBM AS/400 ASCII workstation controller  
v 3174 controller via the Asynchronous Emulation Adapter  
v RS/6000  
v PS/2 computer COMx ports and to a Token-Ring or Ethernet LAN via one of these computers  
v LAN Attachment (i.e., Token Ring or Ethernet) via the Novell-certified IBM 4033 LAN adapter  
v
IBM-compatible PCs utilizing an RS-232C interface  
The RS-422A serial interface will attach to:  
v RS/6000  
v AS/400 ASCII workstation controller  
The IBM PC ASCII (Centronics) Parallel interface will attach to:  
v RS/6000 workstations, excluding POWERserver 930  
v PS/2 computer LPTx ports and to a Token-Ring or Ethernet LAN via one of these computers  
v LAN attachment via the Novell-certified IBM 4033 LAN adapter  
v IBM-compatible PCs utilizing the IBM PC ASCII (Centronics) Parallel interface  
v AS/400 twinax terminals including 348X, 3477 and 3197  
v Coax terminal 3482  
IBM 4232 Impact Matrix Printer ASCII Software Support  
The IBM 4232-302 can use the IBM Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS)* in a Proprinter II (4202)  
emulation when attached to Serial (RS-232C/RS-422A) interfaces or the IBM PC ASCII (Centronics)  
Parallel interface. 4224-emulation may also be available. In 4224-emulation mode, the 4232 will support  
PPDS bar code and vector graphics commands. For more information, reference 4224 RPQ 8V0428 or the  
4232 Printer User’s Guide Models 102 and 202.  
126 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The following systems support the 4232-302:  
Table 85. Caption. Description  
System  
Software - Minimum Level  
Data Stream/Emulation  
IBM PS/2  
OS/2 1.1  
OS/2 LAN Server 1.0  
OS/2 Extended Services 1.0  
PPDS/4202 or 4224  
PPDS/4202 or 4224  
PPDS/4202  
OS/2 Communications Manager/2 1.0 PPDS/4202  
DOS 3.3  
PPDS/4202 or 4224  
Microsoft Windows 3.0  
PC Support/400 W/S Function V2.2  
PPDS/4202  
PPDS/4202  
IBM RS/6000  
IBM AS/400  
AIX Version 3.1.5  
PPDS/4202 or 4224  
OS/400 V2.3 Host Print Transform  
OS/400 V2.2  
PPDS/4202  
PPDS/4202  
IBM 4232-302 IBM OS/2, IBM AIX, and Novell NetWare LAN Operating System Support via the IBM  
4033 LAN adapter  
The IBM 4232-302 will support the following via attachment to the IBM 4033 LAN adapter:  
Table 86. Caption. Description  
System  
Software - Minimum Level  
OS/2 LAN Server 1.2, 1.3  
OS/2 LAN Server 1.2, 1.3  
IBM AIX Ver. 3.1.5  
Data Stream  
PPDS  
Token Ring  
Ethernet  
PPDS  
Token Ring  
Ethernet  
PPDS  
IBM AIX Ver. 3.1.5  
PPDS  
Token Ring  
Ethernet  
Novell NetWare 2.2, 3.11  
Novell NetWare 2.2, 3.11  
PPDS  
PPDS  
Operator-Adjustable Forms  
To align data on preprinted forms, the 4232 Impact Printer operator can adjust the physical top and left  
margins, which will offset the page image on the printing medium. The horizontal (left margin) adjustment  
range is from −6.9 mm (−0.27 inches) to +38.35 mm (+1.51 inches). The vertical (top margin) adjustment  
range is from −30.5 mm (−1.2 inches) to +38.1 mm (+1.5 inches). This adjustment does not affect the size  
of the valid printable area; however, using this adjustment can produce positioning errors if the horizontal  
adjustment is too large for the form being used.  
Chapter 23. 4232 Impact Printer (4232) 127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
128 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 24. 4247 Printer (4247)  
This section describes 4247 Printer’s characteristics. The 4247 Printer is a tabletop, serial, impact, matrix  
printer that prints text, images, graphics, and bar codes at up to 700 characters per second, depending on  
the model and print quality selected.  
Figure 49. 4247 Printer  
Table 87 summarizes the printer characteristics for the 4247 Printer.  
Table 87. 4247 Printer  
Printer Characteristics  
Characteristic Value  
Maximum printing rate: characters per second (cps)  
700 cps (A00/001)  
400 cps (002)  
Print technology  
Datastreams  
Form type  
Impact Dot Matrix  
PPDS, Epson, ASCII, IPDS, DSE, SCS  
Continuous  
Cut-Sheet  
Continuous forms input paths  
3 standard  
3 optional  
Continuous forms output paths  
Finisher attachments  
1 standard  
n/a  
Manual forms feed  
*An Automatic Sheet Feed Device is available  
yes*  
Envelope printing  
MICR printing  
Duplex printing  
Color  
n/a  
no  
no  
no  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 87. 4247 Printer (continued)  
Operator-adjustable forms  
yes  
Printhead resolution (pels-per-inch)  
144 x 144  
20,000,000  
Maximum characters per second (cps) per month (duty cycles)  
Printable Area  
The size of the printable area is set using a printer configuration option. If the defined printable area is not  
large enough to contain the page of data, a data-check exception (position check) occurs.  
Selecting the Printing Medium  
This section describes how to select the various available paper sources on the 4247-001 Printer for  
Coaxial and Twinaxial applications, using the SCS or IPDS support in the printer.  
Note: For the ASCII data streams supported over the parallel port, select the same paper source as on  
the 4247 Model A00 Printer.  
Specifying the Source of the Medium for a 4247-001 Printer  
Although the 4247-001 printer is a continuous forms printer, options can enable it to support a second  
continuous forms source, or an automatic cut sheet feeder source, or both. The maximum possible paper  
sources for the 4247-001 are:  
Front Continuous forms paper fed through the front of the printer. This uses either the Front Push, Rear  
Pull, or Push-Pull tractor configurations.  
Rear Continuous forms paper fed through the rear of the printer. This is only with the Rear Push tractor  
configuration.  
ASF Bin 1  
Automatic Sheet Feeder Bin 1  
ASF Bin 2  
Automatic Sheet Feeder Bin 2  
ASF Bin 3  
Automatic Sheet Feeder Bin 3  
Manual  
Manual cut sheet  
Identifying the Paper Source (Media IDs)  
The method you use to select the manual cut sheet feed varies, depending on whether the printer is IPDS  
or SCS, or attached by Twinaxial or Coax. More information follows in the specific sections about PSF,  
AS/400, and GDDM.  
Selecting Paper Sources Compatible with Other Printers  
Many non-impact cutsheet printers, 4230, or 42 x 4 printers with an automatic sheet feed (ASF) option  
have existing applications that use media ID values 1-3, specified in an AFP Form Definition, or in job  
control language, DDS or Printer Files that support a DRAWER or BIN parameter. To configure the 4247  
Printer so that you can print these jobs without changing the application or job submission, put the  
4247-001 printer into either the 4230-emulation or the 4224-emulation mode and have ONLY the ASF  
paper handling device attached.  
Note: No tractors can be installed. In this configuration, the paper sources are identified by the host  
application as follows:  
ASF Bin 1  
Media ID = 1  
130 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ASF Bin 2  
Media ID = 2  
ASF Bin 3  
Media ID = 3  
Media Specifications  
The 4247 Impact Printer accepts the following media:  
Media types:  
Continuous forms:  
Up to eight-part forms using front feed  
Cutsheet forms:  
Up to four-part forms manual feed, three-part auto feed  
Media widths:  
Continuous forms:  
3 inches to 17 inches (76 mm to 432 mm)  
Cutsheet forms:  
4.5 inches to 17.5 inches (102 mm to 444 mm) manual; 6 inches to 12 inches (152 mm to  
305 mm) automatic  
Media lengths:  
Continuous forms:  
3 inches to 24 inches (76 mm to 609 mm)  
Cutsheet forms:  
4 inches to 24 inches (102 mm to 609 mm) manual, 5 inches to 14 inches (127 mm to 356  
mm) automatic  
3 inches to 24 inches (76 mm to 609 mm) continuous forms, 5 inches to 14 inches (127 mm to  
356 mm) cutsheet  
Attachments  
The parallel interface will attach to:  
v RS/6000 workstations (excluding POWERserver 930).  
v Token Ring or Ethernet networks via the Network Print Server features.  
v IBM PS/2 and IBM Personal Computer LPTx ports and to a Token Ring or Ethernet LAN via one of  
these computers.  
v IBM-compatible PCs utilizing the parallel interface.  
v AS/400 twinax terminals including IBM 348x InfoWindow II display stations, IBM 3477 InfoWindow  
display station, and IBM 3197 display workstation.  
v 3482 InfoWindow II display.  
The Coax interface (feature 4170) will attach to:  
v BM 3174 Controller - Terminal port (using Release A5.5 or later, Release B4.0 or later, Release C6.0 or  
later).  
v ES/9370 Processor Workstation Controller (feature code 6020 or 6120).  
v ES/9371 Processor - 3270 Adapter.  
v ES9000 - 9221 Workstation Subsystem Controller (feature 6120).  
v Token Ring or Ethernet networks via the i-data 7913 RPQ for the IPDS datastream.  
The Twinax interface (feature 4140) will attach to:  
v AS/400 Advanced Systems.  
v AS/400 Advanced Servers.  
v AS/400 Advanced 36 Systems.  
v IBM System 36.  
v IBM 5394 and IBM 5494 Control Units.  
Chapter 24. 4247 Printer (4247) 131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v Token Ring or Ethernet networks via the i-data 7913 RPQ for the IPDS datastream.  
System support via Parallel Attachment  
The 4247-001 can use the IBM Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS) in IBM 4202 Proprinter III XL or IBM  
2381 Personal Printer emulations by choosing the corresponding device driver for the systems listed below  
as supporting the PPDS datastream and the corresponding emulation on the Operator panel.  
In Epson FX emulation mode the 4247-001 can print files coded for the Epson FX-1050 using the Epson  
ESC/P printer control language.  
Also, native 4247 support is provided for AIX and the Host Print Transform function in OS/400. The  
following systems support the 4247-001:  
Table 88. System Support Through Parallel Attachments for the 4247 Printer  
System  
Software - Minimum Level  
Emulation  
IBM PS/2 and IBM Personal  
Computers  
OS/2 2.1  
PPDS or Epson FX  
OS/2 LAN Server 3.0  
OS/2 Communications Manager/2 1.0  
DOS 5.0  
Microsoft Windows 3.0  
IBM RISC System/6000  
IBM AS/400  
AIX Version 3.2.5  
PPDS or Epson FX  
PPDS or Epson FX  
OS/400 V2.3 Host Print Transform  
OS/400 V2.3  
PC Support/400 W/S Function V2.2  
Client Access/400 V3.1  
Personal Communication for AS/400  
for Windows V4.0  
Personal Communication for AS/400  
for OS/2 V4.0  
IBM 5250 Enhanced Emulation for  
Windows V1.1  
IBM 5250 Enhanced Emulation for  
DOS V2.4  
Network Operating System Support via Parallel Attachment  
The Network Print Server features are supported in the following environments:  
Table 89. Network Operating System Support through Parallel Attachments for the 4247 Printer  
Protocol  
Operating System  
IPX/SPX  
Novell NetWare 3.11 and above  
Novell NetWare 4.01 and above using bindery emulation  
TCP/IP  
Novell NetWare 3.11 and aboveIBM LAN Server 1.3 and aboveNovell NetWare 4.01 and  
above using bindery emulation  
NETBIOS/  
NETBEUI  
IBM LAN Server 1.3 and above  
TCP/IP  
IBM LAN Server 1.3 and above  
NETBIOS/  
NETBEUI  
Microsoft LAN Manager 2.0c and above  
TCP/IP  
Microsoft LAN Manager 2.0c and above  
Windows NT 3.1 and above  
NETBIOS/  
NETBEUI  
132 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 89. Network Operating System Support through Parallel Attachments for the 4247 Printer (continued)  
Protocol  
TCP/IP  
TCP/IP  
Operating System  
Windows NT 3.1 and above  
AIX 3.2.5, 4.1  
Supported TCP/IP print methods are LPD, FTP, and Reverse Telnet.  
IBM 4247-001 Coax Software Support  
Table 90. Coax Software Support for the 4247 Printer  
IBM System or  
Controller  
IBM Software  
(minimum release  
level)  
4247 Mode  
4224/4230 Emulation 3268/3287 Emulation  
System/370 and 390 GDDM Version 3.1  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Non-IPDS Mode  
VM/ESA V2.1  
VM/RSCS V3.1  
VM/VTAM V4.3  
MVS/ESA V4.2.0  
MVS/VTAM V4.3  
VSE/ESA V1.3.3  
VSE/VTAM V3.4  
CICS/VSE V2.2.0  
System/370 and 390 GDDM Version 3.1  
No  
Yes  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
IPDS Mode  
GDDM Version 3.2  
PSF/VM V2.1.1  
PSF/MVS V2.1.0  
PSF/MVS V2.2.0  
PSF for OS/390  
PSF/VSE V2.2.1  
IBM 4247-001 Twinax Software Support  
Table 91. Twinax Software Support for the 4247 Printer  
IBM System or  
Controller  
IBM Software  
(minimum release  
level)  
4247 Mode  
4224/4230 Emulation 3268/3287 Emulation  
System/36  
SSP Release 5.1  
IPDS Adv. func.  
PRPQ  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
DisplayWrite/36  
Business Graphics  
Utility  
Operation Control  
Language  
AS/400  
Non-IPDS Mode  
OS/400 Version 3 Rel Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
1
No  
SSP Release 7.1  
OfficeVision/400  
Business Graphics  
Util.  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
GDDM  
CL and DDS  
Chapter 24. 4247 Printer (4247) 133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 91. Twinax Software Support for the 4247 Printer (continued)  
IBM System or  
Controller  
IBM Software  
(minimum release  
level)  
4247 Mode  
4224/4230 Emulation 3268/3287 Emulation  
AS/400  
IPDS Mode  
OS/400 Version 3 Rel Yes  
Yes  
OS/400 Version 3 Rel Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
1
6
Yes  
Yes  
GDDM  
Adv Funct. Print Ut  
V2R1  
PSF/400 Release 3.1  
System/370 and 390 PSF/MVS V2.2.0 and Yes  
Yes  
No  
later  
PSF for OS/390  
Using PSF  
In PSF for OS/390, PSF/VSE, and PSF/VM (S/390 PSFs), identify the desired paper source in the  
FORMDEF, using the appropriate Media ID number as defined in “Identifying the Paper Source (Media  
IDs)” on page 130. For selecting the Manual Cut Sheet, use 100 as the Media ID number.  
You can use Page Printer Formatting Aid (PPFA) to create Form Definitions for S/390 and AIX  
environments. PPFA is also available for AS/400 as an optional feature of the IBM AFP PrintSuite for  
OS/400. The following is a sample of PPFA commands that you could use to select the first ASF bin on a  
4247 printer:  
SETUNITS 1 IN 1 IN;  
FORMDEF 4247B1 REPLACE YES  
BIN 5;  
In AS/400, you can specify a Form Definition with the PRTAFPDTA command and DEVTYPE=*AFPDS. In  
OS/400 V3R2 and V3R7 or later releases, you can specify Form Definitions in the Printer File.  
Selecting AS/400 Media  
To select the input media source in AS/499, use a combination of two Printer File parameters: Form Feed  
(FORMFEED) and Source Drawer (DRAWER). For a 4247 Printer with both Continuous Feed and ASF  
installed, with the printer configured in either the 4247 Printer mode or the emulation (4230/42x4) mode,  
you should use the following selection parameters:  
Front CF:  
Rear CF:  
ASF Bin1:  
ASF Bin2:  
ASF Bin3:  
Manual:  
FORMFEED (*CONT)  
(See notes 1 & 2)  
DRAWER (2) (See note 2)  
FORMFEED (*AUTOCUT)  
FORMFEED (*AUTOCUT)  
FORMFEED (*AUTOCUT)  
FORMFEED (*AUTOCUT)  
FORMFEED (*CUT)  
DRAWER (5)  
DRAWER (6)  
DRAWER (7)  
(See note 3)  
Notes:  
1. You can also select the Front CF source by using FORMFEED (*AUTOCUT) DRAWER (1); however,  
FORMFEED (*CONT) is the recommended method.  
2. In AS/400, when you specify that the paper is cut sheet (*AUTOCUT) instead of continuous forms, the  
Forms Alignment message normally issued for continuous forms cannot be issued.  
3. You can select the manual feed source only if you are running on an IPDS printer.  
If the 4247 Printer is configured for Compatibility Paper Source Selection as described above, and only an  
ASF is installed, you can select a bin with the following parameters:  
134 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ASF Bin1:  
ASF Bin2:  
ASF Bin3:  
FORMFEED (*AUTOCUT)  
FORMFEED (*AUTOCUT)  
FORMFEED (*AUTOCUT)  
DRAWER (1)  
DRAWER (2)  
DRAWER (3)  
In OS/400 Version 3 Release 2 and Release 7, the FORMFEED parameter has been enhanced; you can  
now explicitly select the rear continuous form input source by using the following parameters:  
Rear CF:  
FORMMEED (*CONT2)  
Using GDDM  
When the 4247 Printer is attached to GDDM in the S/390 environment, you can select media input  
sources by using the IPDSBIN processing option.  
The IPDSBIN processing option has the format (IPDSBIN,m,n), where m is the main document bin and n  
is the header page bin. The values for 4247 Printer are:  
0 = printer default  
1 = front CF  
2 = rear CF  
5 = ASF Bin1  
6 = ASF Bin2  
7= ASF Bin3  
65 = envelopes  
97-100 = manual feed bin  
GDDM will not handle the linking of bins. You must specify the correct value according to the printer setup.  
Using ‘forms’ parameters  
When users specified forms, prior to the 4247 printer, for continuous forms printers with only a single  
continuous forms paper source, they used the FORMS parameters in JCL or, for the AS/400, the  
FORMTYPE parameter. You can still use this method to direct the operator change to the correct forms for  
the job. But you cannot use this method to cause the printer to switch between the Front and Rear  
continuous forms sources.  
Operator-Adjustable Forms  
To align data on preprinted forms, the 4247 Printer operator can adjust the physical top and left margins,  
which will offset the page image on the printing medium. The horizontal (left margin) adjustment range is  
from −6.9 mm (−0.27 inches) to +38.35 mm (+1.51 inches). The vertical (top margin) adjustment range is  
from −30.5 mm (−1.2 inches) to +38.1 mm (+1.5 inches). This adjustment does not affect the size of the  
valid printable area; however, using this adjustment can produce positioning errors if the horizontal  
adjustment is too large for the form being used.  
Print-Quality Levels for IPDS Models  
The 4247 Printer allows you to select different levels of print quality. Higher quality corresponds to slower  
print speeds. To select a print-quality level, use the QUALITY subcommand on the COPYGROUP  
command in the form definition. To use Fast Draft Quality, you must enable it using a printer configuration  
menu on the operator panel. Refer to your printer publications on how to do this. If the printer is not  
configured, all requests to print using Fast Draft will automatically be printed in DP Quality. Specify the  
values shown in Table 92 on the QUALITY subcommand to get the correct print-quality level.  
Table 92. 4247 Printer Print-Quality Selection Values  
Print-Quality Level  
Reserved  
Hexadecimal Value Range  
X'00'  
Decimal Value Range  
Fast Draft Quality  
X'01' through X'2A'  
1 through 42  
Chapter 24. 4247 Printer (4247) 135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 92. 4247 Printer Print-Quality Selection Values (continued)  
Print-Quality Level  
DP Quality  
Hexadecimal Value Range  
Decimal Value Range  
43 through 85  
86 through 170  
171 through 254  
255  
X'2B' through X'55'  
X'56' through X'AA'  
X'AB' through X'FE'  
X'FF'  
DP Text Quality  
NLQ Quality  
Printer Customized Default  
Not all symbol sets can be printed at all print-quality levels. Table 93 identifies the print-quality levels that  
can be used for some of the 4247 Printer symbol sets and suggests the name of a corresponding coded  
font that may be used for each symbol set. Refer to the 4247 Printer publications for a list of 4247 Printer  
symbol sets.  
Table 93. 4247 Printer Symbol Sets and Corresponding Coded Fonts  
Symbol Sets  
4247 Printer Print Quality  
Fast Draft  
DP Quality  
DP text  
NLQ  
APL10  
X0AE10  
Courier Bold 10 Pitch  
Courier Bold 12 Pitch  
Courier Bold 15 Pitch  
Courier Double Wide Italic 15 Pitch  
Courier Double Wide 15 Pitch  
Courier Italic 10 Pitch  
Courier Italic 12 Pitch  
Courier Italic 15 Pitch  
Courier 10 Pitch  
X0CB10  
X0CB12  
X0CB15  
X0CW15  
X0CD15  
X0CI10  
X0CB10  
X0CB12  
X0CB15  
X0CW15  
X0CD15  
X0CI10  
X0CI12  
X0CI12  
X0CI15  
X0CI15  
X0CR10  
X0CR12  
X0CR15  
X0EBR9  
X0EIR9  
X0ESR9  
X0CR10  
X0CR12  
X0CR15  
X0EBR9  
X0EIR9  
X0ESR9  
Courier 12 Pitch  
Courier 15 Pitch  
Essay Bold Mixed Pitch  
Essay Italic Mixed Pitch  
Essay Standard Mixed Pitch  
Gothic Text 10 Pitch  
Gothic Bold 10 Pitch  
Gothic Text 12 Pitch  
Gothic Bold 12 Pitch  
Gothic Italic 12 Pitch  
Gothic Text 15 Pitch  
Katakana  
X0GB10  
X0GB12  
X0GI12  
X0GT10  
X0GT12  
X0GT15  
X0KN10  
X0GB10  
X0GB12  
X0GI12  
X0GT10  
X0GT12  
X0GT15  
X0KN10  
OCR-A  
X0AAO  
X0BOA  
OCR-B  
PSF selects symbol sets according to the following hierarchy:  
1. If you select a symbol set that matches the print quality specified in the form definition, PSF prints the  
file.  
136 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. If you select a symbol set but do not specify a print quality, the print quality selected in the printer  
configuration or the printer default print quality is used.  
3. If you select a symbol set that does not match the print quality specified, the printer attempts to print  
the text using a “best fit” font, which it selects. Some pages may be duplicated, and some information  
on the page in error may be missing.  
4. If you select a symbol set that is not available on the 4247 Printer, PSF does not print the remainder of  
the file.  
5. With PSF for AS/400, if you select a symbol set that is not available on the 4247 Printer, and you  
specified absolute fidelity, PSF does not print the remainder of the file. If you specified content fidelity,  
PSF substitutes another symbol set and prints the file.  
Printer Capabilities  
The capabilities of the 4247 Printer are different from those of most of the other printers supported by PSF  
in the following ways:  
v .Differences in the contents of the character sets in the fonts provided by PSF and in the symbol sets  
resident in the 4247 Printer may result in inconsistent printed output between the two types of fonts.  
v Although the 4247 Printer can print with downloaded symbol sets, it uses only resident symbol sets  
when driven by PSF.  
v The PSF for OS/390 and PSF/VSE default fonts specified with the CHARS parameter in the PRINTDEV  
statement cause errors in which PSF issues messages saying “resource not found”. Change or override  
the CHARS parameter to use a 4247 Printer symbol set.  
v The 4247 Printer prints both text and images in only 0° character orientation. All other orientations other  
than 0° are supported for graphics. The 4247 Printer does not support rotated fonts.  
v The 4247 Printer prints images with 144-pel resolution..  
v The 4247 Printer does not support multiple subgroups within a copy group in a form definition. Printing  
of multiple copies of individual pages within a subgroup is not supported.  
Chapter 24. 4247 Printer (4247) 137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
138 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 25. 4400 Thermal Label Printer (4400)  
The IBM 4400 Thermal Label printers are a family of high-quality, direct thermal and thermal transfer  
printers designed for printing labels and tags.  
Figure 50. 4400 Model 004 Thermal Label Printer with Validator Option Attached  
Table 94 summarizes the printer characteristics.  
Table 94. 4400 Thermal Label Printers  
Printer Characteristics  
Characteristic Value  
4400 Model 004/006  
Characteristic Value  
4400 Model 008  
Maximum printing rate: inches per  
second (ips)  
8 ips at 300 dpi  
10 ips at 203 dpi  
6 ips at 300 dpi  
8 ips at 203 dpi  
Print technology  
Thermal  
Datastreams  
ASCII, CodeV and IGP, IPDS, SCS  
Form type  
Continuous  
1 standard  
1 standard  
n/a  
Number of input areas  
Number of output areas  
Finisher attachments  
Manual forms feed  
no  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 94. 4400 Thermal Label Printers (continued)  
Envelope printing  
n/a  
no  
MICR printing  
Duplex printing  
no  
Color  
no  
Operator-adjustable forms  
Printhead resolution (dots-per-inch)  
yes  
203 dpi (at 8 ips)  
300 dpi (at 10 ips)  
Printable Area  
The size of the printable area is set using a printer configuration option or by using the Set Media Size  
IPDS command. If the defined printable area is not large enough to contain the page of data, the 4400  
Thermal Label Printer stops printing, issues a negative acknowledgement reply (NACK), and enters home  
state.  
Media Specifications  
The 4400 Thermal Printers accepts the following media:  
Media types:  
Roll or fanfold; die-cut or continuous; labels, tags and tickets; paper, film or synthetic stock;  
thermal transfer or direct thermal  
Media widths:  
Model 004  
0.75 inches to 4.5 inches (19 to 114 mm)  
Model 006  
2.0 inches to 6.8 inches (51 to 171 mm)  
Model 008  
3.0 inches to 8.75 inches (76 to 222 mm)  
Media thickness:  
0.0025 inches to 0.010 inches (0.07 to 0.25 mm)  
Roll core diameter:  
3.0 inches (76 mm)  
Maximum roll diameter  
8.0 inches (203 mm)  
Thermal transfer ribbons:  
Standard ribbon length: 2,050 feet (625 m)  
140 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Attachments  
The IBM 4400 Thermal Label Printers attach to the systems, controllers, and processors described below:  
Table 95. Attachments for the 4400 Thermal Label Printer  
Interface Type  
System/Control Unit/Processor  
Attachment  
ASCII  
AS/400  
ASCII Workstation Controller port on 9402 (except  
Model Y10), 9404, and 9406  
3197, 3477, 3486/87/88  
3174 Controller  
ES/9370  
Terminal (Parallel port only)  
Asynchronous Emulation Adapter  
ASCII Subsystem  
Micro Channel 370  
RS/6000  
ASCII serial or parallel port  
ASCII serial or parallel port  
ASCII serial or parallel port  
ASCII serial or parallel port  
ASCII serial or parallel port  
Coaxial ports (Release A3.0 or higher)  
Workstation Subsystem  
PC, PS/2  
IBM-Compatible PCs  
Non-IBM Systems  
3174 Controllers  
ES/9370, ES/9000  
Processors  
Coax  
Controller port (#6020 or #6120  
via 3174 Controller  
S/390 Parallel Enterprise Servers  
AS/400  
Twinax  
Twinaxial Workstation Controller port on 9402, 9404,  
and 9406  
AS/400 Advanced 36  
S/36  
Twinaxial Workstation Controller  
Workstation Controller port on 5360, 5362, 5363,  
and 5364  
5394 and 5494 Control Unit  
Ethernet  
Workstation port  
LAN  
Ethernet 10/100 BaseT Adapter  
Software Requirements  
The following table summarizes the IPDS support by platform.  
Table 96. IPDS Support for the 4400 Thermal Printer  
Base Support:  
PSF/MVS V2.2.0  
PSF for OS/390  
PSF/VSE V2.2.1  
PSF/400 V4.3 or  
later  
PSF V3.1.0 or later  
Base Support:  
4028 Dev. Type  
3816 Dev. Type  
240 DPI Resolution  
300 DPI Resolution  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Roll Input  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Roll Output  
AFP/IPDS Towers:  
(Not including lf3)  
All  
All  
All  
All  
Printer Connectivity:  
Ethernet TCP/IP  
Twinax  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Chapter 25. 4400 Thermal Label Printer (4400) 141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 96. IPDS Support for the 4400 Thermal Printer (continued)  
Base Support:  
PSF/MVS V2.2.0  
PSF for OS/390  
PSF/VSE V2.2.1  
PSF/400 V4.3 or  
later  
PSF V3.1.0 or later  
Base Support:  
Font Download  
Raster  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Resident AFP Font Collection  
4028  
Core  
Yes  
Coordinated  
IBM 4400 IPDS  
Infoprint Manager Summary:  
Table 97. IPDS Support with Infoprint Manager for the 4400 Thermal Printer  
Infoprint Manager for AIX V3.2 or  
later  
Infoprint Manager for NT 1.1 or  
later  
Base Support:  
4028 Dev. Type  
3816 Dev. Type  
240 DPI Resolution  
Yes  
Yes  
300 DPI Resolution  
Roll Input  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Roll Output  
AFP/IPDS Towers:  
(Not including lf3)  
All  
All  
Printer Connectivity:  
Ethernet TCP/IP  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Font Download  
Raster  
Resident AFP Font Collection  
4028  
Core  
Yes  
Yes  
Coordinated  
Printer Emulations  
With a coax interface, the IBM 4400 Printer emulates the following IBM Coax Printer models:  
v Non-IPDS  
– 3287 Models 1 and 2  
–
– 4234 Model 1  
v IPDS  
– 4028  
– 3816  
With a twinax interface, the IBM 4400 printer emulates the following IBM twinax models:  
v 4234 Model 2  
v 5225  
142 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note: Refer to the IBM 4400 Thermal Label Printer Coax/Twinax Programmer’s Reference Manual for  
details and limitations concerningthe twinax and coax emulations.  
The ASCII Emulation software provides the following emulations:  
v Printer Protocols  
– IBM Proprinter III XL  
– Epson FX-1050  
– Printronix P-Series  
– Printronix P-Series XQ  
– Printronix Serial Matrix  
v Page Orientations:  
– Portrait/Inverted Portrait  
– Landscape/Inverted Landscape  
v Graphics:  
– Bit Image Graphics  
– P-Series Compatible Plot Mode  
v Vertical Page Formatting  
– Printronix P-Series Electronic Vertical Format Unit (EVFU)  
– Serial Matrix Vertical Formatting Unit (VFU)  
v Character Sets:  
– IBM PC  
– ECMA-94 Latin 1  
– Multinational  
– DEC Multinational  
– IBM Code Page 437 and 850  
– International symbol sets in the following categories:  
- Arabic Sets  
- Cyrillic Sets  
- European Sets  
- Greek Sets  
- Hebrew Sets  
- Turkish Sets  
v Font Typefaces:  
– Courier  
– Letter Gothic  
– OCR-A  
– OCR-B  
– CG Triumvirate Bold Condensed  
– Ability to download True Type.  
Refer to the IBM 4400 Thermal Label Printer ASCII Programmer’s Reference Manual for details and  
limitations concerning the ASCII emulations  
When the Ethernet 10/100 BaseT Network Interface Card is installed, the following Network Operating  
Systems and protocols are supported:  
Table 98. Ethernet Support for the 4400 Thermal Printer  
Operating System  
Protocol  
OS/2 Warp 3 & 4  
OS/400 (V3.2 and later)  
Windows 98  
TCP/IP  
Windows NT  
Windows 2000  
UNIX1  
Chapter 25. 4400 Thermal Label Printer (4400) 143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 98. Ethernet Support for the 4400 Thermal Printer (continued)  
Operating System  
Protocol  
Windows 95  
NetBIOS over TCP/IP  
IPX/SPX and TCP/IP  
Novell NetWare V3.11, and later  
Novell NetWare V4.01, and later  
1. The Ethernet Interface supports network printing under various TCP/IP environments including most variations of  
UNIX.  
Refer to the IBM 4400 Ethernet Interface User’s Manual for details and limitations concerning the Ethernet  
NIC Network Support.  
144 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 26. 6400 Line Matrix Printer (6400)  
This section describes the 6400 Printer’s characteristics. In this publication, these printers are called the  
6400 printers, unless a functional difference between models occurs. The 6400 Printer is a  
continuous-forms, line-dot matrix, impact printers that use the shuttle-matrix print technology to print text,  
images, graphics, and bar codes at up to 1500 lpm for the 6400 Printer depending on the model.  
Figure 51. 6400 Printer  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 99 summarizes the printer characteristics.  
Table 99. 6400 Line Matrix Printers  
Printer Characteristics  
Characteristic Value  
Maximum printing rate: lines per minute (lpm)  
500 lpm (050/P50)  
1000 lpm (010/P10)  
1,500 lpm (015)  
Print technology  
Impact Dot Matrix  
Datastreams  
PPDS, Epson, ASCII, SCS, IPDS  
Form type  
Continuous  
Number of input areas  
Number of output areas  
Finisher attachments  
Manual forms feed  
1 standard  
1 standard  
n/a  
n/a  
Envelope printing  
n/a  
MICR printing  
no  
Duplex printing  
no  
Color  
no  
Operator-adjustable forms  
Printhead resolution (pels-per-inch)  
Maximum characters per second (cps) per month (duty cycles)  
yes  
120 x 144  
n/a  
Printable Area  
The size of the printable area is set using a printer configuration option or by using the Set Media Size  
IPDS command. If the defined printable area is not large enough to contain the page of data, the 6400  
Printer stops printing, issues a negative acknowledgement reply (NACK), and enters home state.  
Media Specifications  
The 6400 Line Matrix Printer accepts the following media:  
Media types:  
One to six-part forms  
Media widths:  
3 inches to 17 inches (76 mm to 432 mm) with tear strips; when using rear exit, the maximum is  
16 inches (406 mm)  
Media lengths:  
3 inches to 24 inches (76 mm to 610 cm)  
146 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Attachments  
The IBM 6400 Model 004 Printer attaches to systems, controllers, and processors as described below:  
Table 100. System, Controller, and Processors Attachments for the 6400 Printer  
Interface Type  
System/Control Unit/Processor  
Attachment  
ASCII  
AS/400  
ASCII Workstation Controller port on 9402  
(except Model Y10), 9404, and 9406  
3197, 3477, 3486/87/88  
3174 Controller  
Terminal (Parallel port only)  
Asynchronous Emulation Adapter  
ASCII Subsystem  
ES/9370  
Micro Channel370  
RS/6000  
ASCII serial or parallel port  
ASCII serial or parallel port  
ASCII serial or parallel port  
ASCII serial or parallel port  
ASCII serial or parallel port  
ASCII serial or parallel port  
Coaxial ports (Release A3.0 or higher)  
LAN Attachments  
PC, PS/2  
IBM-compatible PCs  
Non-IBM systems  
3174 Controllers  
ES/9370, ES/9000 Processors  
Coax  
Workstation Subsystem Controller port (FC  
6020 or 6120)  
S/390 Parallel Transaction Servers  
AS/400  
via 3174 Controller  
Twinax  
Twinaxial Workstation Controller port on  
9402, 9404, and 9406  
AS/400 Advanced 36  
S/36  
Twinaxial Workstation Controller  
Workstation Controller port on 5360, 5362,  
5363 and 5364  
5394 5494 Control Unit  
Workstation port  
IBM 6400 Model 004 Printer ASCII Software Support:  
The IBM 6400 Model 004 Printer can use the IBM Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS) in IBM Proprinter  
III XL emulation or the Epson FX 1050 emulation when attached to Serial (RS-232C/RS-422A) interfaces,  
or the IBM PC ASCII (Centronics) Parallel interface. For more information, refer to the 6400 ASCII  
Programmer’s Reference (S246-0118).  
Also, native IBM 6400 Printer support is provided for the IBM RS/6000 systems. Drivers are supplied on  
the printer configuration utility diskette.  
Table 101. ASCII Support for the 6400 Printer  
System  
Software - Minimum Level  
OS/2 2.1  
Emulation  
IBM PS/2, IBM PC  
Proprinter III XL, Epson FX  
Proprinter III XL, Epson FX  
Proprinter III XL, Epson FX  
Proprinter III XL, Epson FX  
Proprinter III XL, Epson FX  
Proprinter III XL, Epson FX  
Proprinter III XL, Epson FX  
OS/2 LAN Server 1.0  
OS/2 Extended Services 1.0  
OS/2 Communications Manager/2 1.0  
DOS 3.3 through 6.3  
Microsoft Windows 3.1  
AIX Version 3.1.5  
IBM RS/6000  
Chapter 26. 6400 Line Matrix Printer (6400) 147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 101. ASCII Support for the 6400 Printer (continued)  
System  
Software - Minimum Level  
OS/400 Version 2.3 Host Print Transform  
OS/400 Version 2.3  
Emulation  
IBM AS/400  
Proprinter III XL, Epson FX  
Proprinter III XL, Epson FX  
Proprinter III XL, Epson FX  
Proprinter III XL, Epson FX  
PC Support/400 Version 2.3  
IBM 5250 Enhanced Emulation for DOS  
Version 2.4  
IBM 5252 Emulation for Windows Version 1.1 Proprinter III XL, Epson FX  
Personal Communications for AS/400 for  
Windows Version  
Proprinter III XL, Epson FX  
Proprinter III XL, Epson FX  
Proprinter III XL, Epson FX  
Personal Communications for AS/400 for  
OS/2 Version 4.0  
Client Access/400 Version 3.1  
3174 with AEA  
Release A5.4 or later, Release B4.0 or later, Proprinter III XL, Epson FX  
or Release C1.1 or later  
Network Operating System Support  
The Network Print Server features are supported in the following environments:  
Table 102. Caption. Description  
Protocol  
Operating System  
IPX/SPX  
Novell NetWare 3.11 and above  
Novell NetWare 4.01 and above using bindery emulation  
TCP/IP  
Novell NetWare 3.11 and above  
Novell NetWare 4.01 and above using bindery emulation  
IBM LAN Server 1.3 and above  
Microsoft LAN Manager 2.0c and above  
Windows NT 3.1 and above  
AIX 3.2.5, 4.1  
NETBIOS/NETBEUI  
IBM LAN Server 1.3 and above  
Microsoft LAN Manager 2.0c and above  
Windows NT 3.1 and above  
Supported TCP/IP print methods are LPD, FTP, and Reverse Telnet.  
Operator-Adjustable Forms  
Using the Set Top of Forms key on the operator panel, the operator can select where the first line of  
printing is relative to the top edge of the paper.  
To align data on preprinted forms, the 6400 Printer operator can adjust the physical top and left margins,  
which offsets the page image on the printing medium. The horizontal (left margin) adjustment range is  
from −6.9 mm (−0.27 inches) to +38.35 mm (+1.51 inches). The vertical (top margin) adjustment range is  
from −30.5 mm (−1.2 inches) to −38.1 mm (+1.5 inches). This adjustment does not affect the size of the  
valid printable area; however, using this adjustment can produce positioning errors if the horizontal  
adjustment is too large for the form being used.  
148 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Print-Quality Levels in IPDS Mode  
The 6400 Printer allows you to select different levels of print quality. A higher print-quality level  
corresponds to slower print speeds. To select a print-quality level, use the QUALITY subcommand on the  
COPYGROUP command in a form definition created using Page Printer Formatting Aid/370 (PPFA/370).  
You must enable Draft Quality by using a printer configuration menu on the operator panel. Refer to your  
printer publications on how to do this. If the printer is not configured, all requests to print using Draft  
Quality are automatically printed in DP Quality. Specify the values shown in Table 103 on the QUALITY  
subcommand to get the correct print-quality level.  
Table 103. 6400 Printer Print-Quality Selection Values  
Print-Quality Level  
Reserved  
Hexadecimal Value Range  
X'00'  
Decimal Value Range  
DP Quality  
X'01' through X'55'  
X'56' through X'AA'  
X'AB' through X'FE'  
X'FF'  
1 through 85  
86 through 170  
171 through 254  
255  
DP Text Quality  
NLQ Quality  
Printer Customized Default  
Not all symbol sets can be printed at all print-quality levels. Table 104 identifies the print-quality levels that  
can be used for some of the 6400 Printer symbol sets and suggests the name of a corresponding coded  
font that can be used for each symbol set. Refer to the 6400 Printer publications for a more complete list  
of 6400 Printer symbol sets.  
Table 104. 6400 Printer Symbol Sets and Corresponding Coded Fonts  
Symbol Sets  
6400 Printer Print Quality  
Draft  
DP  
NLQ  
APL10  
X0AE10  
X0AE10  
X0CB10  
X0CB12  
X0CB15  
X0CW15  
X0CD15  
X0CI10  
X0CI12  
X0CI15  
X0CR10  
X0CR12  
X0CR15  
X0EBTR  
X0EITR  
X0ESTR  
Courier Bold 10 Pitch  
Courier Bold 12 Pitch  
Courier Bold 15 Pitch  
Courier Double Wide Italic 15 Pitch  
Courier Double Wide 15 Pitch  
Courier Italic 10 Pitch  
Courier Italic 12 Pitch  
Courier Italic 15 Pitch  
Courier 10 Pitch  
Courier 12 Pitch  
Courier 15 Pitch  
Essay Bold Mixed Pitch  
Essay Italic Mixed Pitch  
Essay Standard Mixed Pitch  
Gothic Text 10 Pitch  
Gothic Bold 12 Pitch  
Gothic Italic 12 Pitch  
Gothic Text 10 Pitch  
Gothic Text 12 Pitch  
X0GB10  
X0GB12  
X0GI12  
X0GT10  
X0GT12  
X0GB10  
X0GB12  
X0GI12  
X0GT10  
X0GT12  
Chapter 26. 6400 Line Matrix Printer (6400) 149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 104. 6400 Printer Symbol Sets and Corresponding Coded Fonts (continued)  
Symbol Sets  
6400 Printer Print Quality  
Draft  
DP  
NLQ  
Gothic Italic 12 Pitch  
Gothic Text 13 Pitch  
Gothic Text 13 Pitch  
Gothic Text 13 Pitch  
Gothic Text 13 Pitch  
Gothic Text 13 Pitch  
Gothic Text 15 Pitch  
Gothic Text 18 Pitch  
Katakana  
X0GT12  
X0GT13  
X0D224  
X0D225  
X0D226  
X0D227  
X0GT15  
X0GT18  
X0GT12  
X0GT13  
X0D224  
X0D225  
X0D226  
X0D227  
X0GT15  
X0GT18  
X0KN10  
X0LB12  
X0KN10  
Letter Gothic Bold 12 Pitch  
OCR-A  
X0LB12  
X0AOA  
OCR-B  
X0OCRB  
PSF selects symbol sets according to the following hierarchy:  
1. If you select a symbol set that matches the print quality specified in the form definition, PSF prints the  
file.  
2. If you select a symbol set but do not specify a print quality, the print quality selected in the printer  
configuration or the printer default print quality is used.  
3. If you select a symbol set that does not match the print quality specified, the printer attempts to print  
the text using a “best fit” font, which it selects.  
4. PSF for OS/390, PSF/VM, and PSF/VSE If you select a symbol set that is not available on the 6400  
Printer, PSF does not print the remainder of the file.  
5. With PSF for AS/400, if you select a symbol set that is not available on the 6400 Printer, and you  
specified absolute fidelity, PSF does not print the remainder of the file. If you specified content fidelity,  
PSF substitutes another symbol set and prints the file.  
Printer Capabilities  
The capabilities of the 6400 Printer are different from those of most of the other printers supported by PSF  
in the following ways:  
v Differences in the contents of the character sets in the fonts provided by PSF and in the symbol sets  
resident in the 6400 Printer may result in inconsistent printed output between the two types of fonts.  
v The 6400 Printer prints only with resident symbol sets.  
v The PSF for OS/390 and PSF/VSE default fonts specified with the CHARS parameter in the PRINTDEV  
statement cause errors in which PSF issues messages saying “resource not found”. Change or override  
the CHARS parameter to use a 6400 Printer symbol set.  
v The 6400 Printer prints text and images in 0° and 180° character rotation and prints graphics in all four  
rotations. The 6400 Printer does not print text in 90° or 270° rotation.  
v The 6400 Printer has a 120 x 140-pel printhead, but the printer microcode enables the 6400 Printer to  
print with simulated 144 x 144-pel resolution.  
v The 6400 Printer does not support multiple subgroups within a copy group in a form definition, nor does  
it print multiple copies of individual pages within a subgroup.  
150 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 27. Infoprint 62 Printer (4370)  
This section describes the Infoprint 62 printer characteristics. The Infoprint 62 (Models 002 and 003) are  
continuous-form printers that use LED electrophotographic print technology to print text, images, graphics,  
and bar codes.  
Figure 52. Infoprint 62 Printer  
Table 105 summarizes the printer characteristics for the Infoprint 62 printers.  
Table 105. Infoprint 62 Printer Characteristics  
Printer Characteristic  
Print technology  
Datastreams  
Characteristic Value  
Light Emitting Diode  
IPDS  
Form type  
Continuous  
Number of input bins  
Standard: Stack height up to 3000 sheets of 64 gsm  
paper  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 105. Infoprint 62 Printer Characteristics (continued)  
Printer Characteristic  
Characteristic Value  
Number of output bins  
Standard: Stack height up to 3000 sheets of 64 gsm  
paper  
Optional: Stack height up to 2000 sheets with Power  
Stacker  
Finisher attachments  
Manual forms feed  
Envelope printing  
MICR printing  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
no  
Duplex printing  
no  
Color  
no  
Adjust print-quality levels  
Printhead resolution  
yes  
240 dots-per-inch (4370–002)  
300 dots-per-inch (4370–003)  
Maximum printing rates for letter (8.5 x 11 inches)  
inches per second  
8.8  
inches per minute  
528  
Maximum printing rates for letter in pages per minute1  
1–up landscape (8.5 inches long) simplex  
1–up landscape (8.5 inches long) duplex  
2–up portrait (11 inches long) simplex  
2–up portrait (11 inches long) duplex  
Maximum printing rates for A4 (210 x 297 mm)  
mm per second  
62  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
225.78  
mm per minute  
13,546.8  
Maximum printing rates for A4 in pages per minute1  
1–up landscape (210 mm long) simplex  
1–up landscape (210 mm long) duplex  
2–up portrait (297 mm long) simplex  
2–up portrait (297 mm long) duplex  
Maximum usage in pages per month (duty cycles)2  
Letter: 1–up landscape (8.5 inches long)  
Letter: 2–up landscape (11inches long)  
A4: 1–up landscape (210 mm long)  
A4: 2–up landscape (297 mm long)  
64  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
600,000 simplex  
n/a  
620,000 simplex  
n/a  
1. Maximum printing rate is the maximum number of pages of the indicated size and configuration that can be  
printed at the constant speed of paper movement shown for each printer. Rates for pages of different sizes and  
configuration can be calculated by dividing the form length into the printer speed. Actual printing rate will be less  
if the printer cannot reach this rate due to complexity or density of the data or the ability of the system to deliver  
data at this rate.  
2. Maximum usage is based on operating 7 days a week, 24 hours a day, at maximum printing rate with normal  
maintenance and operations activity. IBM does not recommend reaching this monthly maximum on consistent  
basis.  
152 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printable Area  
Width The maximum print width for the Infoprint 62 is 14.6 inches (370.84 mm), which is the width of the  
print head. The maximum width for any given form cannot be wider than the width of the form,  
minus 1.0 inches (25.4 mm). That is 0.5 inches (12.7 mm) on each side of the print line.  
Length  
The printer is designed to print lengthwise to the perforation at its rated speed. As with other  
continuous forms printers, print quality degradation occurs near the perforation. No degradation  
occurs at 0.33 inches (8.5 mm) the perforation for character data, and 0.5 inches (12.7 mm) for  
solid area fill, logos, or images.  
Figure 53 shows an example of the printable area of a form. The printable area shown is 8.17 by 10.66  
inches.  
8.32inches  
Top  
8.17inches  
Top  
0.090inch  
0.090inch  
0.090inch  
Default  
0.167inch  
Default  
0.167inch  
0.167inch  
MediaOrigin  
0, 0  
MediaOrigin  
0, 0  
Printable  
Area  
10.82inches  
0.090inch  
Printable  
Area  
10.66inches  
0.167inch  
Figure 53. Printable Area in IPDS Mode on the Infoprint 62  
Media Specifications  
The Infoprint 62 accepts the following media:  
Media types:  
Preprinted or blank forms, pre-punched forms, perforated forms, security forms, approved paper  
labels, color paper  
Media widths:  
7 inches to 16 inches (178 to 406 mm); maximum print width is 14.6 inches (371 mm)  
Media lengths:  
3 inches to 22 inches (/76.2 to 559 mm) standard; 7 inches to 12 inches (178 to 305 mm) with  
optional Power Stacker  
Media weights:  
17 to 54 lbs. (64 to 204 gsm) letter basis; 17 to 44 lbs. (64 to 165 gsm) bond; 44 to 125 lbs. (71 to  
204 gsm) tag and label  
Attachments  
The IBM Infoprint 62 Continuous Forms Printer must be attached to either an Ethernet or Token-Ring LAN,  
or a S/390 Parallel Channel or ESCON Channel. The standard adapter is Ethernet 10BaseT. Attachment  
to Ethernet 10Base2, Token Ring, or a S/390 Parallel Channel or ESCON require available features.  
Token-Ring  
Chapter 27. Infoprint 62 Printer (4370) 153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The IBM Infoprint 62 Printer Token-Ring Attachment (#4121) will attach to the following devices:  
v 8228 Token-Ring Multistation Access Unit attached to an AS/400, PS/2, or RS/6000 processor  
v 8230 Token-Ring Controlled Access Unit attached to an AS/400, PS/2, or RS/6000 processor  
v 8228 Token-Ring Multistation Access Unit attached to a 3172, 3746, 3725, 3174, 3745, or 3720  
attached to a 3090, ES/9000, or 308X processor.  
v 8230 Token-Ring Controlled Access Unit attached to a 3172, 3746, 3725, 3745, 3174, or 3720 attached  
to a 3090, ES/9000, or 308X processor.  
v The printer may be located a maximum distance of 100 meters (328 feet) from the 8228 Multistation  
Access Unit or from the 8230 Controlled Access Unit.  
v The distance between the 8228 Multistation Units can be increased with either the 8220 or 8219 Optical  
Fiber Repeater.  
Ethernet  
The Infoprint 62 standard Ethernet 10BaseT attachment will attach to the following devices:  
v Twisted pair cabling attached to an RS/6000, PS/2, or AS/400  
v Twisted pair cabling attached to an IBM 3172 or 3745 attached to a 3090, ES/9000, or 308X processor.  
v An IBM 8250 or 8260 Twisted Pair Hub  
The Infoprint 62 Ethernet 10Base2 attachment (FC #4162) will attach to the following devices:  
v Thin Ethernet Coaxial attached to a RS/6000, PS/2, or AS/400  
v Thin Ethernet Coaxial attached to an IBM 3172 or 3745 attached to a IBM 3090, ES/9000, or 308X  
processor.  
System/390 Parallel Channel:  
System/390 parallel channel attachment is supported in the PSF for OS/390, PSF/MVS, PSF/VM, and  
PSF/VSE printing environments.  
For S/390 parallel channel attachment, a control unit position on a S/370 parallel block multiplexer channel  
is required on an IBM 3090, ES/9000 processor, a S/390 Parallel Enterprise Server, or a Multiprise 2000  
Server.  
Attachment is also supported via the 9034 ESCON Converter Model 1 for the S/390 Parallel Channel.  
ESCON Channel  
The ESCON channel is supported in the PSF for OS/390, PSF/MVS, PSF/VM, and PSF/VSE printing  
environments.  
v The IBM Infoprint 62 may be attached natively to IBM ESCON channel (3090-J, 9021, 9121, 9221,  
9672, 2003).  
v Attachment is also supported via the 9032/9033 ESCON Directors and 9036 ESCON Remote Channel  
Model 1 and Model 2.  
The ESCON attachment may be shared between multiple MVS systems. To allow access by a different  
host, the operator must drain the printer and vary it offline to one host before varying it online to the  
second host.  
A “Multi-Host Environment” ESCON configuration option is provided that when used with PSF for OS/390  
or PSF/MVS ASSIGN/UNASSIGN support guarantees a printer on a shared attachment cannot be online  
to multiple hosts concurrently. A second host trying to assign the printer will be denied access with a notice  
that the printer is assigned elsewhere. Multi-Host Environment support increases configuration flexibility  
and simplifies operational procedures for ESCON-attached printers.  
The Multi-Host Environment is supported only by OS/390 V1R3.0 or higher operating with either of the  
following:  
154 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v PSF 3.1.0 for OS/390  
v PSF/MVS 2.2.0 with APAR OW29992  
v PSF for OS/390  
All host systems (which may be VM guests) must be OS/390 V1R3.0 or higher.  
Chapter 27. Infoprint 62 Printer (4370) 155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
156 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A. Migrating Your 3800 Printer Applications  
Compatibility among PSF-Supported Printers  
The following sections describe compatibility considerations when routing jobs among PSF-supported  
printers.  
Page Presentation  
Page presentation refers to the position of a printed page of data on a sheet. PSF supports two page  
presentations:  
v Portrait, or narrow forms, in which the printed page is viewed with the shorter edges of the form at the  
top and the bottom of the page and the longer edges at the sides of the page  
v Landscape, or wide forms, in which the printed page is viewed with the longer edges of the form at the  
top and the bottom of the page and the shorter edges at the sides of the page  
All currently marketed PSF-supported printers have the same default media origins. Because the media  
origin relates to the print direction (ACROSS, DOWN, BACK, and UP), it also is used in determining the  
page presentation. For continuous-forms printers, the ability to use forms that feed through the printer with  
either a narrow or a wide leading edge adds another factor to the determination of page presentation.  
See Figure 54 on page 158 for examples of media origins and print directions supported by PSF printers.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Default  
Media  
Origin  
0,0  
Default  
Media  
Origin  
0,0  
Across  
Up  
w n D o  
k c B a  
Narrow Forms for Continuous  
Form Printers  
Wide Forms for Continuous  
Form Printers  
Default  
Media  
Origin  
0,0  
Across  
k c B a  
Cut-Sheet Printers  
Default  
Media  
Origin  
0,0  
Default  
Media  
Origin  
0,0  
Across  
Across  
Narrow Formsfor3800  
Wide Formsfor3800  
Figure 54. Media Origins and Print Directions for PSF-Supported Printers  
Page-presentation and print-direction controls are included in the form definition to allow presentation  
compatibility across PSF-supported printers. The result of these controls is to change the media origin for  
the pages printed using the copy group containing the controls. Not all printers support changing of the  
media origin. The print direction specified in the page definition or in the composed-text data does not  
need to be changed when a form definition containing these compatibility controls is used. Rather, the print  
direction in the page definition or composed-text data should be used to determine which print-direction  
control to specify in the form definition.  
158 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
You can build form definitions for page-presentation compatibility using PPFA. For more information, refer  
to IBM Page Printer Formatting Aid: User’s Guide.  
When Not to Use Compatibility Form Definitions  
You do not need to use form definitions that contain page-presentation and print-direction controls when  
you are using:  
v Only cut-sheet printers.  
v Only narrow forms on a continuous form printer (other than a 3800).  
v Only a 3800.  
v Print data that is formatted in the BACK or UP direction, which is specified in the page definition or by  
the program formatting the data.  
When To Use Compatibility Form Definitions  
You do need to use form definitions that contain page-presentation and print-direction controls when you  
are:  
v Printing data that was formatted for a newer continuous forms printer. See “Example: ACROSS Print  
Direction with Wide Forms” on page 161.  
v Using wide forms on an AFCCCU printer when the print data is formatted in the DOWN print direction.  
v Using both narrow and wide forms on an AFCCU continuous forms printer.  
Compatibility between an AFCCU continuous forms printer and 3800  
PSF provides form definitions that you can use for page-presentation compatibility between a 3800 and an  
AFCCU continuous forms printer. Figure 55 on page 160 shows the output on the 3800 and on the other  
printers using these form definitions.  
The examples in Figure 55 on page 160 assume that you are using the same forms on the printers; that is,  
not changing from wide to narrow forms between printers, or from narrow to wide forms between printers.  
However, you could change forms in any of the four examples without affecting the page presentation of  
your output as long as the print direction in the form definition matches the print direction in the page  
definition or composed-text data.  
If you migrate an application from one form to another, remember that the top and left margins change  
places.  
Note: The compatibility form definitions shown in Figure 55 on page 160 specify a page position of 0.0  
inch across and 0.5 inch down. This page position is within the printable area of the 3800 as well  
as that of the AFCCU continuous forms printers.  
Appendix A. Migrating Your 3800 Printer Applications 159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
or create a  
form definition  
specifying  
the direction  
If you want output  
use this  
specified in the  
page definition is:  
formatted for the  
IBM-supplied  
form definition:  
3800 (as shown below)  
to look the same on  
the AFCCU Continuous Form Printers  
ABCD  
Landscape Presentation  
Across Direction  
F10101LA  
F10101PD  
F10101PA  
ACROSS  
Portrait Presentation  
Down Direction  
DOWN  
ABCD  
Portrait Presentation  
Across Direction  
ACROSS  
Landscape Presentation  
Down Direction  
F10101LD  
DOWN  
NOTE: You can use these form definitions for printing on  
any of the Continuous Form Printers  
Figure 55. PSF-Supplied Form Definitions.. These form definitions are for Compatibility Between the 3800 and the  
AFCCU continuous forms printers. Note that the second and fourth entries use data that is formatted in the DOWN  
print direction.  
Compatibility between Cut-Sheet Printers and AFCCU continuous forms printers  
PSF provides form definition F1C10110 for page-presentation compatibility between cut-sheet printers and  
AFCCU continuous forms printers. See “Example: DOWN Print Direction with Wide Forms” on page 161  
160 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
on how to use this form definition.“Example: ACROSS Print Direction with Narrow Forms” on page 162  
contains an example of when page-presentation controls are not needed for printing the same file on  
cut-sheet and AFCCU continuous forms printers.  
A factor to consider if you are creating your own form definition for compatibility between cut-sheet printers  
and an AFCCU continuous forms printer is the printable area of the printers.  
Example: ACROSS Print Direction with Wide Forms  
If your data is formatted in the ACROSS print direction for landscape page presentation, as is commonly  
used for a 3800, and will be printed on wide forms on an AFCCU continuous forms printers, you must use  
a form definition with correct page-presentation controls to produce readable output. If not, the print data  
may go beyond the valid printable area on the AFCCU continuous forms printer, as shown in Figure 56  
because the hardware origin for the AFCCU continuous forms printer is different from the hardware origin  
of the 3800.  
Default Media  
Origin  
Default Media  
Origin  
ABCDEFGHIJKLM  
3800 Printer  
AFCCU Continuous Form Printers  
Figure 56. Valid-Printable-Area Error: AFCCU Continuous Forms Printer Output with Incorrect Form Definition  
If, however, you use a form definition with the correct page-presentation controls, your output will be  
printed correctly, as shown in Figure 57 In this example, you could use the PSF-supplied form definition,  
F10101LA, which specifies a landscape page presentation and an ACROSS print direction. This form  
definition can also be used for data formatted in an ACROSS print direction to print in the landscape page  
presentation on narrow forms. The page-presentation controls are not required in this case, but you can  
now use this form definition regardless of whether the data is to print on wide forms or on narrow forms.  
ABCD  
ABCD  
3800 Printer  
AFCCU Continuous Form Printer  
Figure 57. Using PSF Form Definition F10101LA to Prevent Valid-Printable-Area Errors  
Example: DOWN Print Direction with Wide Forms  
If your data is formatted in the DOWN print direction for landscape page presentation on a cut-sheet  
printer or on 3800 narrow forms and will be printed on wide forms on an AFCCU continuous forms printer,  
you must use a form definition with correct page-presentation controls to produce readable output. If not,  
the data will be printed in the landscape page presentation; however, the data will be upside down, as  
shown in Figure 58 on page 162, because the hardware origin for an AFCCU continuous forms printer is  
located on the leading-left corner of the short side of the form, regardless of whether a narrow form or a  
wide form is used.  
Appendix A. Migrating Your 3800 Printer Applications 161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Hardware  
Origin  
Hardware  
Origin  
1
a P g e  
a P g e  
Hardware  
Origin  
Hardware  
Origin  
2
AFCCU Continuous Form Printers  
Cut-Sheet Pages  
Figure 58. Upside-Down Printing: AFCCU Continuous Forms Printers Output with Incorrect Form Definition  
If, however, you use a form definition with the correct page-presentation controls, your output will be  
printed correctly, as shown in Figure 59. In this example, when migrating from a cut-sheet printer, you can  
use the PSF-supplied form definition, F1C10110, which specifies the landscape page presentation and the  
DOWN print direction. If you are migrating from 3800 narrow forms instead of cut sheets, you can use the  
PSF-supplied form definition, F10101LD, which specifies the landscape page presentation and the DOWN  
print direction.  
The F1C10110 form definition can also be used for data formatted in the DOWN print direction to print on  
narrow forms on an AFCCU continuous forms printer. The page-presentation controls are not required in  
this case, but you can now use this form definition regardless of whether the data is to print on wide forms  
or on narrow forms on the AFCCU continuous forms printer. See “Example: ACROSS Print Direction with  
Narrow Forms” for more information.  
Pa ge1  
Pa ge2  
AFCCU Continuous Form Printers  
Cut-Sheet Pages  
Figure 59. Using PSF Form Definition F1C10110 to Prevent Presentation Errors  
Example: ACROSS Print Direction with Narrow Forms  
If your data is formatted in the ACROSS print direction for portrait page presentation on a cut-sheet printer  
and will be printed on narrow forms on an AFCCU continuous forms printer, the form definition you specify  
162 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
does not need to contain page-presentation controls to produce readable output on these printers.  
However, you must consider the differences in printable areas between the printers.  
Page 1  
Page 1  
Page 2  
Page 2  
Cut-Sheet Pages  
AFCCU Continuous Form Printers  
Figure 60. No Compatibility Form Definition Required  
When you replace an IBM 3800 printer with IBM’s Infoprint 3900 printer or Infoprint 4000 printer, you need  
to migrate the applications that were running on the 3800 printer. Printing Systems has offerings that assist  
in migrating the applications.  
The 3800-3 and 3800-6 printers have two different operating modes:  
v 3800 Advanced Function Presentation (AFP) mode operating under Print Services Facility (PSF)  
v 3800-1 compatibility mode (also called “line mode”) operating under JES alone.  
There are migration considerations for applications running in either of these modes. This document  
describes the migration considerations and IBM’s solution for them. This document covers migration for  
IBM 3800 printers only. It does not cover migration from OEM printers that emulate 3800 printers. In  
general, migration issues are the same for functions that faithfully emulate 3800 printer functions.  
However, OEM printers may include functions that were not supported on 3800. Notably Siemens (now  
OCE) printers included an “enhanced” line mode, also called “e-mode” that added additional formatting  
capabilities. These functions are not discussed in this document and are not addressed by the offerings  
described. If you are migrating from an OEM printer, contact Printing Systems Technical Support for  
information specific to that printer.  
In addition to having a unique non-AFP operating mode, the 3800 printer is the only IBM printer equipped  
with a forms flash. In either 3800 AFP mode or 3800 line mode, the operator can load what is essentially a  
large photo negative into the printer, and the printer will flash that negative onto the printed pages. If  
applications are using a forms flash, this function must be replaced with an Electronic Overlay for AFP  
applications, or with a flash diskette if the application is migrated to hardware line-mode.  
3800 AFP Mode  
The 3800-3 printer was the first IBM printer to support AFP. In general, 3800 AFP operates the same as  
AFP on the newest Infoprint 4000 printers. But there are some differences caused by improvements in  
implementation over the years. These differences are:  
Fonts The 3800 AFP fonts are now called “unbounded box” fonts. All AFP printers since the 3800 use a  
more advanced format of raster fonts called “bounded box”. The 3800 AFP fonts will not print on  
any other AFP printer. You must have bounded-box fonts instead. If your applications are using  
only IBM-supplied fonts, there is no problem. All the AFP fonts supplied by IBM for the 3800 are  
Appendix A. Migrating Your 3800 Printer Applications 163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
also supplied in bounded-box format for the 3900 and Infoprint 4000. However, if your applications  
use customized fonts, these fonts must be converted to bounded-box format to enable printing on  
a 3900 or 4000.  
Form Origin  
The 3800 form origin is always top/left - just inside the left tractor strip on the leading edge of the  
paper. Later AFP continuous-forms printers (3835, 3900, and Infoprint 4000) have the capability to  
set the form origin to other corners of the sheet, based on PRESENT and DIRECTION parameters  
in the Form Definition. The default orientation is the top left of the short edge of the physical sheet,  
which provides compatibility with cut-sheet printers. For forms that are longer than they are wide  
(for example 11 inches long by 9.5 inches wide), the default origin for these printers is the same  
as for the 3800. Unfortunately for forms that are wider than they are long (for example 12 inches  
wide by 8.5 inches long), the default for non-3800 printers is not the same as the 3800 printer  
origin. One option is to create a form definition for each job which specifies the correct options to  
place the origin at the 3800 position. Another option is to use a function provided by PSF/MVS 2.2,  
allowing you to set bits in PSF Exit 7 indicating jobs for which 3800 form origin will be applied.  
Logic in the exit can select specific job, jobs of certain classes, or any other criteria which could be  
deduced from the job JCL available to the exit.  
3800 Compatibility Mode  
No other AFP printers have a 3800-1 compatibility mode. Jobs running in 3800-1 compatibility mode, or  
“line-mode” as it is sometimes called, usually present the largest challenge to printer upgrade. These jobs  
use non-AFP resources:  
v Forms control buffers (FCB)  
v Library characters sets (LCS)  
v Graphical character modules (GRAPHMODs)  
v Copy modifications (COPYMODs)  
In addition, printing of characters is handled differently in line mode for situations where characters print  
partially off the page, or where characters of different sizes are merged together in the same print line.  
It is strongly recommended that customers perform a full conversion of their jobs to AFP to gain the  
advantages of AFP and simplify their operational procedures. However for those customers who cannot or  
do not wish to convert their applications, there are two offerings that address 3800 compatibility mode  
jobs:  
Hardware RPQs for specific 3900 and Infoprint 4000 printers  
These RPQs allow the printers to emulate 3800 compatibility processing. The RPQs and specific  
printers are:  
v RPQ 8B3997: 3900-01  
v RPQ 8B3937: 3900-0W1, 3900-0W3, Infoprint 4000 IS1 (240 dpi and 229 ipm only)  
PSF/MVS 2.2 function “3800 Line Mode conversion”  
This is a standard feature of PSF/MVS 2.2 that allows PSF to process many 3800 compatibility  
jobs without change to the job, JCL, or resources.  
In general, the hardware RPQ should be used for accounts that do not have PSF, or do not plan to  
migrate to AFP in the near future. The PSF function should be used for accounts that are currently running  
PSF but are unable to convert their 3800 line-mode applications to AFP in a timely fashion. However, there  
are other differences in the characteristics, limitations, and implementation options of these two offerings  
which may play a factor in the decision of whether to use one or the other of them. The major  
considerations are:  
v 3800 Compatibility Hardware RPQ:  
– If also running AFP jobs, operator must switch printer between AFP mode and line-mode  
– Uses 3800 line-mode resources (character sets, GRAPHMODs, and so forth)  
– Does not require PSF, unless AFP printing is also desired  
164 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
– Performance limitation for jobs with dense or complex data  
v PSF/MVS Line-Mode Function:  
– Can intermix line-mode and AFP job. Do not need to switch printer mode.  
– Requires AFP bounded-box fonts.  
– Requires PSF/MVS.  
– Cannot handle jobs which use COPYMODS.  
v Both options:  
– If using 3800 Forms Flash, flashes must be converted  
– 3800 Tape-to-Print feature is not supported  
– Post-Processing equipment, supplies, paper, and attachments must be compatible with the 3900 or  
4000 printers  
Hardware RPQ for 3800 Compatibility  
The 3800 Compatibility Mode RPQ provides a separate microcode load for the supported 3900 or 4000  
printer that enables it to run as a 3800-3 or -6 operating in 3800-1 compatibility mode. This RPQ is  
intended to facilitate the migration of 3800 workloads without the need to convert resources or JCL, or  
install higher levels of software. The RPQ is supported only when the printer is attached via a S/370  
parallel channel. The RPQ is also supported only on operating systems which supported the 3800-3  
operating in 3800-1 compatibility mode: MVS and VM.  
With this RPQ, the printer operates in either of two modes: normal AFP mode, or 3800 compatibility mode.  
PSF is not required if the account elects to run only in 3800 compatibility mode. PSF is required for  
running the printer in normal AFP mode. Details for defining the printer and switching it between  
Compatibility Mode and AFP mode are included with the RPQ.  
With the exception of the forms flash, the 3900 or 4000 operating in compatibility mode should process all  
3800 compatibility mode print streams in the same fashion as the 3800. In particular, the FCB, LINECT,  
COPIES, COPYMOD, SETPRT, GRAPHMOD, MODIFY, CHARS, TRC, OPTCD=J, and line merge  
functions should operate as usual.  
The 3800 Tape-to-Print feature is NOT supported with the 3900 or 4000, even with this RPQ installed.  
3800 Forms Flash is not physically supported by the 3900 or 4000. Each forms flash must be replaced by  
an electronic version of the forms flash. A Services Offering is available to create these electronic forms  
flashes; there is no tool available for this.  
The electronic flash is created as a file on a diskette which can be loaded into the printer controller. The  
flash can be maintained on diskette, or stored on the printer hard drive (up to 8 flash files can be stored  
on the printer hard drive). Once the electronic flash has been created, operational procedures are similar  
to those for loading of the forms flash. When the JCL forms flash parameter creates a console message to  
load the forms flash, the operator will instead enter a console request to load one of the flash files stored  
in the printer, or load the 3.5–inch diskette containing the electronic overlay in the diskette reader of the  
3900 or 4000 controller. Each overlay will be on a separate diskette. The elapsed time for this operator  
activity should be the same or less than that required for physically loading the forms flash. It is probable  
that an installation will have several such diskettes, one for each electronic overlay needed. Operational  
procedures must be updated accordingly, and consideration given to storage and organization of the  
diskettes. Since the overlay diskettes are conventional DOS diskettes, normal PC utilities can (and should)  
be used to create backup copies of the overlay diskettes. At least one set should be stored in a safe area  
outside the immediate printer area for backup purposes. Current practices for backup copies of forms  
flashes should be reviewed for applicability.  
Performance Considerations  
The controllers inside the 3800 and the 3900-01 printers were specifically designed to maximize  
throughput of printer data. By contrast, the 3900-0W1, 3900-0W3, and Infoprint 4000 IS1 printers use as  
Appendix A. Migrating Your 3800 Printer Applications 165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
thir controllers IBM RISC processors that are not specialized for printer data. This is not an issue when  
printing in AFP mode. PSF sends IPDS data to the printer in large blocks which the RISC processors  
handle quite efficiently. However, in line mode there is no PSF and no IPDS. Instead, the operating system  
is sending the data in CCW records, one CCW per print record. The RISC processors are not tuned to  
receiving, processing, and acknowledging many small individual records in a short time frame. The more  
print records per inch of paper length, the higher processing rate is required.  
In general, a job which averages more than 66 print records per 11 inches of paper may not print at rated  
speed. Many jobs defined with more than 6 lines per inch will average less than 66 records per 11 inches,  
since records are not printed on every line of every page, and since the 3800 has a 1/2–inch unprintable  
border at top and bottom of each sheet. However, jobs defined with 6 lines per inch can average more  
than 66 records per 11 inches if multiple records are printed per line. This can occur if COPYMODS are  
used, or if a technique called line-merge is used. Line-merge is a 3800 technique for printing multiple  
records on the same print line. Each of these records requires its own CCW. For this reason, applications  
should be reviewed carefully, and arrangements can be made with IBM Printing Systems Division to test  
jobs which might have performance problems.  
RPQ Installation Considerations  
Procedures for installing, operating, maintaining the new 3900 or 4000 printer must be carefully planned  
and followed, as with any new printer installation. Some considerations for this step are reviewed in the  
final section of this document.  
v Forms flashes must be converted to electronic overlays, and procedures set in place for usage, storage,  
organization and back up of the electronic flashes.  
v Operators must be trained in the procedures for executing Compatibility Mode functions on the new  
printer. Documentation on the new operator functions and options is included with the RPQ.  
v The RPQ is installed from diskettes by the CE. The diskettes contain microcode for operating  
compatibility mode and also for new printer console options for managing the printer in Compatibly  
Mode.  
v Critical applications should be tested prior to production cut-over. Adequate lead time should be allowed  
for overlay generation and testing with applications.  
PSF/MVS Line Mode Function  
PSF/MVS 2.2 includes a function for 3800 Line Mode Conversion. This capability is documented in the  
PSF/MVS 2.2 System Programmer’s Guide, S544-3672. This function allows many jobs which executed in  
compatibility mode on the 3800-3 or 3800-6 printers to run without application or JCL changes on a 3900.  
Infoprint 4000, or other AFP printer. This function differs from the hardware RPQs in these significant  
areas:  
v PSF/MVS is required for function. (With the hardware RPQ, PSF is not required if only compatibility  
mode jobs are being processed. However PSF is required if AFP print jobs are also to be processed.)  
v AFP jobs can be intermixed in the job stream with compatibility mode jobs. The printer does not have to  
be switched between two different modes of operation. This may make it easier for your customer to  
begin the step toward full AFP implementation.  
v AFP fonts must be supplied in place of the 3800 character sets and GRAPHMODs.  
v 3800 jobs which use the COPYMOD function cannot be processed by PSF Line Mode.  
How PSF/MVS Line Mode Works  
The PSF/MVS Line Mode function allows PSF to dynamically build and use inline page definition and form  
definition resources for compatibility mode jobs. The resources are built using information in the job’s FCB  
and JCL parameters for LINECT, COPIES, and FLASH.  
PSF accesses the job’s FCB in SYS1.IMAGELIB to obtain information for building the page definition.  
Page height will include the full printable page area to allow room for character ascenders and descenders  
166 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
that may have been truncated by a 3800 executing in compatibility mode. In compatibility mode, the 3800  
will print a partial character, even if the top or bottom of the character extends beyond the printable area.  
PSF will not print a partial character. If any part of the character is off the page, an error is generated.  
However, the 3800 had a 1/2–inch unprintable area at top and bottom of the sheet. Including this area in  
the PSF page size guarantees that characters which could be printed on the 3800 in line mode are also  
printable under PSF Line Mode.  
PSF uses information on the dimensions of paper currently loaded in the printer to create a form definition  
that contains the presentation options for orienting the print on the paper in the same direction as the 3800  
would. The form definition can also contain unique page offsets identified for the job in PSF Exit 4. If a  
forms flash is used for the job, the form definition will reference an electronic overlay of the same name.  
The account must ensure that an electronic overlay with the same name (prefixed “O1”) has been created  
and placed in the PSF resource library.  
In addition, the account must ensure that all 3800 character sets and GRAPHMODs are available as AFP  
bounded-box fonts in the PSF resource library. AFP versions of all 3800-supplied character sets are  
supplied with PSF/MVS. Equivalent AFP fonts must be created or substituted for any non-standard  
character sets used by compatibility mode print jobs.  
The PSF/MVS Line Mode function cannot be used to process jobs which specify the JCL keyword  
MODIFY=xxxx. These jobs use the 3800 COPYMOD function. There is no equivalent for the COPYMOD in  
PSF Line Mode capability. Jobs using COPYMODS must be converted to AFP, or printed using the  
hardware 3800 compatibility RPQ. If a job using COPYMODs is encountered, PSF will issue an error  
message and place the job on HOLD.  
You should also be alert for jobs which use a special post-processing routine and character set to create  
the 3800-1 version of rotated print. While it may be possible to convert the rotated character set for the  
AFP printer, it is much easier to remove the rotate post processing step and use standard AFP fonts and  
AFP capabilities to rotate the job.  
Invoking PSF/MVS Line Mode Function  
The PSF/MVS Line Mode function is triggered through PSF/MVS Exit 4 for jobs which print through the  
JES Spool. If accounts are using PSF Direct Printing, instead of using the JES Spool, Line Mode can be  
enabled for Direct Printing using Exit 14. Samples APSUX04X and APSUX14X are provided in the  
SAMPLIB shipped with PSF/MVS. For simplicity, for the remainder of this document we will reference only  
Exit 4. Accounts using PSF Direct Printing will find similar functions available in Exit 14.  
To activate Line Mode processing, in Exit 4 you indicate which jobs should be processed as Line Mode.  
Since the exit has access to all the JCL parameters for the job, you may choose to identify jobs based on  
any of these parameters, for example: Job Name or Job Class. You may also set up a table in the exit to  
indicate special print offsets for different jobs based on any of the parameters available to the exit. This  
allows PSF Line Mode function to emulate the print offsets that could be entered by 3800 operators for  
matching print to special forms.  
PSF/MVS Line Mode will provide compatibility mode processing only for those jobs selected by Exit 4.  
However, not all jobs selected by the Exit will be processed in Line Mode. Any job that has a PAGEDEF or  
FORMDEF parameter coded in its JCL will be ignored for compatibility mode processing. PSF will assume  
that the job has been designed for AFP printing and process it as a normal AFP job.  
As noted above, the PSF Line Mode function cannot process jobs that use COPYMODs. If a job which  
specifies MODIFY in the JCL is identified in Exit 4 for line mode processing, PSF will issue an error  
message and request that the job be held by the system. Note that if the same job were not identified in  
Exit 4, it would print as a normal AFP job with the MODIFY parameter simply ignored.  
Appendix A. Migrating Your 3800 Printer Applications 167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Considerations for Line-Merge Jobs  
Additional processing is needed for jobs which use an application technique called line-merge to mix  
character sets on the same print line. On the 3800 this is done by coding Table Reference Characters  
(TRCs) and a “print-no-space” carriage control byte in the print records. This coding will also cause a line  
merge on an AFP printer; however, the line merge operates differently. The 3800 merges character per  
character, the AFP printers merge pel per pel. If the merge occurs between characters of different widths  
(pitches), the resulting print position will be different on an AFP printer than on the 3800.  
The PSF Line Merge Function provides special processing for jobs that use line merge. If Exit 4 indicates  
that the job uses Line Merge, PSF will process every record of job (instead of just the first record in the  
data set) examine each record for line merge, and reproduce the 3800 line merge positioning. Because of  
the extra processing involved, PSF only does this for jobs which indicate in Exit 4 that the processing is  
needed. If you do not know which of its jobs use line merge, a good approach is to examine print job JCL  
to identify jobs that are using multiple fonts and therefore may be mixing these fonts on a printline using  
line merge. These jobs would require both of the following JCL parameters:  
v OPTCD=J which indicates that table reference characters (TRCs) are used to select different fonts for  
different records.  
v CHARS=(xxxx,yyyy,....) indicating multiple character sets.  
If all the character sets listed in the CHARS parameter are fixed pitch and all of them have the same pitch,  
such as GT10 and GB10, you will not have a problem. The line merge will work the same on the AFP  
printer, without extra processing by PSF Line Mode. But if any of the character sets in the CHARS  
parameter are mixed pitch, such as the tri-pitch BITR, or if any two have different pitches, such as GT10  
and GT12, then you have a potential line-merge problem. For these it would be wise to indicate additional  
Line Merge processing.  
Printers Supported by PSF/MVS Line Mode  
PSF/MVS Line Mode was designed for processing 3800 jobs on continuous form AFP printers such as  
3835, 3900, and Infoprint 4000. It can also be used to print 3800 jobs on AFP cut-sheet printers, if the  
print jobs will fit on the cut-sheet paper. While 3800 jobs that printed on 8.5 inch wide paper should easily  
fit on cut sheet paper, those designed for 12 inch or 14 inch paper probably will not. PSF/MVS Line Mode  
will not rotate 3800 jobs on cut-sheet printers to try and make them fit the paper.  
PSF/MVS Line Mode will not support printing on a 3800 printer. Some accounts may wish to transfer jobs  
from compatibility mode to AFP mode on a 3800 printer. However because of limitations of the 3800, the  
PSF/MVS Line Mode function will not process jobs destined for a 3800 printer. An error message will be  
issued. PSF will terminate processing of the job and request that the job be held by the system.  
The PSF/MVS Line Mode function can be used with Cut-Sheet Emulation. Cut-Sheet Emulation is an  
automatic 2-UP provided by Infoprint 4000 printers in conjunction with PSF. Line Mode jobs can also be  
printed in duplex, on a duplex printer. A special bit must be set in Exit 4 to indicate that duplexing is  
desired.  
Implementing PSF/MVS Line Mode  
The following steps must be taken to use PSF/MVS Line Mode processing:  
v Install PSF/MVS 2.2.  
v Ensure AFP fonts are available in the PSF resource library for all 3800 LCSs and GRAPHMODs used  
by the jobs being processed.  
v Ensure Electronic Overlays are created and available in the PSF resource library for all 3800 forms  
flashes used.  
v Screen the 3800 jobs to identify any using COPYMODS or merging lines with different sized characters.  
– COPYMODS cannot be processed using PSF Line Mode  
– Jobs merging fonts of different sizes must be flagged for extra processing by PSF.  
168 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v Modify PSF/MVS Exit 4 to indicate jobs that require Line Mode Processing and those that require  
additional line-merge processing.  
Now you are ready to process 3800 compatibility mode jobs on your AFP printer.  
3900 or 4000 Installation Considerations  
As with installation of any new printer, particularly one in the 3900 or 4000 class, careful preparation must  
be made for installing, operating, and maintaining the new printer. The IBM Introduction and Planning  
Guide for the printer should be carefully reviewed, and installation checklists should be carefully followed.  
The list below cannot be considered a comprehensive list. However, it does point out some of the issues  
to be considered when upgrading from a 3800 printer to a 3900 or 4000.  
v If installing the 3900 or 4000 for use only with the Hardware RPQ for 3800 compatibility, the printer  
would be defined to the system as a 3800 Line Printer. System definitions would not need to be  
changed. However if the new printer will be used to process AFP print jobs as well as compatibility print  
jobs, it must also be defined to the operating system and to PSF as a 3900 or 4000 printer.  
v Review attachment requirements for the new printer. For example, Infoprint 4000 printers and the 3900  
wide and duplex printers require a minimum data streaming rate of 1.9 MB, and are not supported on  
3044 Model 1 channel extenders. If you are using non-IBM channel extenders, check with your  
channel-extender vendor regarding support for the new printer.  
v The specifications of all paper stocks used should be reviewed to insure they meet the specifications for  
the new printer. For example, the 3800 could accept paper weights as low as fifteen pounds; the lowest  
weight for the 3900 is sixteen pounds.  
v Supplies (toner, developer, and so forth) must be ordered for the new machine.  
v BTS equipment must be installed or modified as needed.  
Appendix A. Migrating Your 3800 Printer Applications 169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
170 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B. Font Information for IPDS Printers  
Font Terminology, Names of Font Groups, and Font Structure  
The first few pages of this appendix describe font terminology, the names of groups of fonts, and font  
structure. The appendix then lists the fonts available in the printers that contain resident fonts.  
IBM ships fonts in a product called the IBM AFP Font Collection. To learn more about the AFP Font  
collection, refer to the Fonts Summary for AFP Font Collection and the Technical Reference for IBM  
Expanded Core Fonts. The AFP Font Collection contains the following fonts:  
v IBM Expanded Core Fonts  
– Boldface  
– BookMaster Latin1  
– BookMaster Specials  
– Courier  
– Courier APL2  
– Gothic Katakana  
– Gothic Text  
– Helvetica  
– IBM Logo  
– Letter Gothic  
– OCR(OCR-A and OCR-B)  
– Prestige  
– Times New Roman  
IBM Font Structure and Terminology  
In IBM font terminology, a font has three components:  
v Coded font  
v Font character set  
v Code page  
Coded Font  
Code Page  
FontCharacterSet  
Characters IDs  
Code points  
Characters  
Character properties  
Printing attributes  
Figure 61. Font Components  
Coded Font  
A coded font translates your request for type (for example, text you previously entered at a computer  
terminal) into characters for printing. A coded font, which associates a specific code page with a specific  
font character, consists of two parts:  
v References to specific font character sets  
v References to specific code pages  
1. A pel is a pixel, picture element, or dot. The sequence of dots that form a character is called a raster pattern. The number of dots  
per inch that a printer generates is called the :hp1.print resolution:ehp1. or pel density. A resolution of 240 pels means that a  
printer prints 240 pels per inch both vertically and horizontally, or 57 pels per square inch (240 x 240).  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A character must be included in the specified font character set and listed on the specified code page  
before it can be printed.  
Font Character Set  
A font character set contains the characters of a single type family, typeface, and type size. In addition, a  
font character set specifies character properties and printing attributes.  
FontCharacterSet  
Character Shapes  
CharacterProperties  
Printing Attributes  
Baseline  
Position  
Character ID  
Character rotation  
Maximum ascender  
Point size  
Figure 62. Composition of a Font Character Set  
Characters, Character Properties, and Printing Attributes: Characters are the letters, numerals,  
punctuation marks, or other symbols of a font.  
Character properties describe how a character is positioned relative to the characters around it. Some  
character properties include the following:  
v The baseline of a character, showing its alignment on the writing line  
v The dimensions of space in which the character is printed  
v The position of the character within that space  
v The identifier of the character (the character ID or graphic character ID)  
Each character is assigned a character ID; for example, the character A (uppercase A) is assigned the  
character ID LA020000.  
The purpose of a character ID is to distinguish the character from other, similar characters. For  
example, the following characters look similar; however, they are different and are assigned different  
character IDs:  
Minus sign (−)  
Character ID SA000000  
Hyphen (-)  
Character ID SP100000  
Em dash (—)  
Character ID SM900000  
The printing attributes define how the font character set will be printed. Some printing attributes include  
rotation of characters, maximum ascender, and point size.  
Code Page  
A code page maps each character of text to the characters in a font character set. Figure 63 on page 173  
shows how a code page maps text to the characters in a font character set. As you enter your text at a  
computer terminal, each keyboard character is translated into a code point. When the text is printed, each  
code point is matched to a character ID on the code page you specified. The character ID is then matched  
to the image of the character in the font character set you specified. The image in the character set is the  
image that is printed.  
172 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A
A
Coded Font  
CodePage  
Character  
FontCharacterSet  
Code  
Point  
C1  
Character  
Character  
ID  
ID  
Graphic  
A
LA020000  
LA020000  
Figure 63. Translation of a Keyboard Character into a Printed Character  
A character ID is an 8-byte character data string. A code point is an 8-bit binary number representing one  
of 256 potential characters (the maximum number of characters available on a code page). Code points  
are usually shown as hexadecimal representations of their binary values.  
Binary  
11000001  
Decimal  
193  
Hexadecimal  
C1  
Figure 64 on page 174 shows an example of part of a code page. When the printer receives hexadecimal  
code point C1 for the code page shown (code page T1V10037), it prints an uppercase A (character ID  
LA020000).  
Appendix B. Font Information for IPDS Printers 173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
T1V10037 Country Extended: United States, Canada  
CPGID  
37  
GCSGID  
697  
Undefined Code Point  
SP010000  
Type  
ExpCore  
4028  
Compatibility  
Licensed Program  
Hex Codes  
1st  
2nd  
4-  
5-  
6-  
7-  
8-  
9- A- B- C- D- E- F-  
-0  
-1  
-2  
-3  
-4  
-5  
-6  
SP010000 SM030000 SP100000  
LO610000 LO620000 SM190000  
SM170000 SD150000 SM110000 SM140000 SM070000  
ND100000  
SP300000 LE110000 SP120000 LE120000 LA010000 LJ 010000 SD190000 SC020000 LA020000 LJ 020000 SA060000 ND010000  
LA150000 LA150000 LA160000 LE160000 LB010000 LK010000 LS010000 SC050000 LB020000 LK020000 LS020000 ND020000  
LA170000 LE170000 LA180000 LE180000 LC010000 LL010000 LT010000 SD630000 LC020000 LL020000 LT020000 ND030000  
LA130000 LE130000 LA140000 LE140000 LD010000 LM010000 LU010000 SM520000 LD020000 LM020000 LU020000 ND040000  
LA110000 LI110000 LA120000 LI120000 LE010000 LN010000 LV010000 SM240000 LE020000 LN020000 LV020000 ND050000  
LA190000 LI150000 LA200000 LI160000 LF010000 LO010000 LW010000 SM250000 LF020000 LO020000 LW020000 ND060000  
Figure 64. Part of IBM Code Page T1V10037  
Different Code Pages  
Code pages accommodate various national languages by using characters and special symbols  
appropriate to the language. Code pages can have identical character IDs assigned to different code  
points.  
For example, the character é (lowercase e accent acute, character ID LE110000) has the following code  
point assignments in two different code pages:  
v Hexadecimal code point 51 in code page T1V10037 (Country Extended: United States, Canada,  
Figure 64)  
v Hexadecimal code point 5A in code page T1V10280 (Country Extended: Italy)  
Global Resource IDentifier (GRID)  
You might encounter the term GRID in other Advanced Function Presentation (AFP) publications. A GRID,  
an acronym for Global Resource Identifier, is used by AFP printers to identify resident fonts, to perform  
font substitution, and by some operating systems and applications to identify fonts used in text. A GRID is  
often used by PSF to determine if a printer-resident font is available for activation or if a font must be  
downloaded.  
GRID values are also used in font substitution scenarios. For example, if a font is requested that is not  
resident in the printer, nor is it resident on the host system, an alternate font may be selected for download  
(or activation) by PSF. GRID tables are built into PSF for this purpose. These tables are also used to  
cross-reference font resources names and GRID values.  
A GRID is similar to a coded font in that it identifies a character set, a code page, and the size of the  
characters to be printed. It does this by using the following four identifiers that can be used to uniquely  
identify font resources:  
174 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v A Font Global IDentifier (FGID) is used to identify a typeface. For example, FGID 2305 is assigned to  
Helvetica Bold. Note that FGID 2305 applies to ANY Helvetica Bold typeface regardless of the language  
complement being used.  
v A Code Page Global IDentifier (CPGID) is used to identify a code page. For example, CPGID 1148 is  
used to identify code page T1001148.  
v A Graphic Character Set Global IDentifier (GCSGID) is used to identify a unique collection (list) of  
characters and is how the language complement is specified. For example, GCSGID 2039 is used to  
identify the characters required to support the Latin1 language complement. Not that GCSGID 2309  
applies to ANY Latin1 language complement regardless of the typeface being used.  
Since a GCSGID simply identifes a list of characters, it can (and is) used in both character sets and  
code pages. When used in a code page, the GCSGID identifies the list of characters contained in the  
code page and is the value most commonly used in a GRID. The printers and PSF have GCSGID  
superset/subset tables that are used to resolve the requested GCSGID down to a font that supports it.  
v Font Width is used to provide size criteria. The FGID and GCSGID together provide enough information  
to determine the typeface and language complement. Font width indicates which point size to use. Font  
width, however, is not a point size value. It is based on 1440ths, a unit of measure commonly used by  
printers and formatters.  
GRID Width Calculations: For uniformly spaced fonts, the font width calculation is 1440 divided by the  
pitch. Pitch is the number of characters that can fit in 1 horizontal inch.  
Table 106. Font Width Calculation for Uniformly Spaced Fonts  
Width  
240  
168  
144  
120  
108  
96  
Pitch  
6
Calculation  
1440/6  
8.57  
10  
1440/8.57  
1440/10  
12  
1440/12  
13.3  
15  
1440/13.3  
1440/15  
84  
17.1  
20  
1440/17.1  
1440/20  
72  
For mixed-pitch character sets, the width calculation is the width of the 12–pitch space character (that is,  
1440 divided by 12).  
Table 107. Font Width Calculation for Mixed-Pitch Character Sets  
Width  
Pitch  
Calculation  
120  
12  
1440/12  
For proportionally spaced (typographic) fonts, the width calculation is one-third the point size converted to  
1440ths of an inch. There are approximatley 72 points to 1 inch or 20 1440ths per point.  
Table 108. Font Width Calculation for Proportionally Spaced Fonts  
Width  
40  
Points  
Calculation  
(6x20)/3  
6
47  
7
(7x20)/3  
53  
8
(8x20)/3  
60  
9
(9x20)/3  
67  
10  
(10x20)/3  
Appendix B. Font Information for IPDS Printers 175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 108. Font Width Calculation for Proportionally Spaced Fonts (continued)  
Width  
73  
Points  
11  
Calculation  
(11x20)/3  
(12x20)/3  
(14x20)/3  
(16x20)/3  
(18x20)/3  
(20x20)/3  
(24x20)/3  
(30x20)/3  
(36x20)/3  
(48x20)/3  
(60x20)/3  
(72x20)/3  
80  
12  
93  
14  
107  
120  
133  
160  
200  
240  
320  
400  
480  
16  
18  
20  
24  
30  
36  
48  
60  
72  
Tables Listing Printer-Resident Fonts  
This rest of this appendix contains tables listing fonts resident in specific printers. These fonts can be  
shipped on diskettes, cartridges, font cards, in printer microcode, or in some type of printer storage,  
depending on the printer. With PSF/MVS and PSF/VSE, you can use a utility to mark host versions of  
these fonts that will allow PSF to activate the fonts resident in the printers. On PSF/MVS, the utility is  
called APSRMARK; on PSF/VSE, APTRMARK. PSF/VM, PSF/400, and PSF/6000 use tables to map  
resident fonts to the equivalent host fonts, providing access to the resident fonts on select printers.  
Notes:  
1. The lists of printer resident fonts in this appendix may not be complete. Your printer may contain fonts  
not listed here. Also, your PSF libraries may contain host-equivalent fonts that are not resident in your  
printer. In either case, using fonts not listed in this section may produce unexpected results.  
2. Some of the fonts listed in these tables are IBM font licensed programs, which may or may not be  
installed in your PSF font libraries. Before marking a font on PSF/MVS with APSRMARK or on  
PSF/VSE with APTRMARK, ensure that the host-equivalent font is available.  
3. For some of the bold fonts listed, the bold printing is done by your printer. Refer to your printer  
publications for more information.  
4. Fonts shipped with the IBM AFP Font Collection are already marked and do not have to be marked  
using APSRMARK or APTRMARK, thereby enabling you to use the fonts resident in the AFCCU  
printers.  
Abbreviations Used in the Tables  
The tables throughout this appendix use the following abbreviations:  
DEC Decimal (a numbering system based on 10)  
FGID Font typeface global identifier  
FW  
GCSGID  
Graphic character set global identifier  
Font width (the width of the space character in 1/1440ths-inch units)  
CPGID  
Code page global identifier  
GRID Global resource identifier  
HEX  
IB  
Hexadecimal (a numbering system based on 16)  
Italic Bold  
IM  
Italic Medium  
176 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Point Vertical height (number in 1/72 of an inch)  
PPDS Page Printer Data Stream  
PS  
RB  
Proportional Space Font  
Roman Bold  
RIDF Resource ID Format  
RL  
RM  
RT  
Roman Light  
Roman Medium  
Resource Type  
TYPO Typographic spacing (proportionally spaced, measured vertically in points [1/72 of an inch])  
Fonts Resident in the AFCCU Printers  
This section lists the resident fonts and code pages for the AFCCU printers: Infoprint 60, Infoprint 62,  
Infoprint 3000, Infoprint 4000, and Infoprint Color 130 Plus. The AFCCU printers support the resident fonts  
as Type 1 scalable outline fonts, depending on the PSF support. The default font is Courier Roman  
Medium 12 pitch (10 point), using code page 500, version 2. The GRID for the default font is FGID=416,  
GCSGID=1269, CPGID=500, and font width=120. The host equivalents of the AFCCU resident fonts are  
shipped in the IBM AFP Font Collection and are marked PUBLIC, so that on PSF/MVS 2.2.0 with APAR  
OW08340, you can use them to activate the printer resident fonts. You do not need to run any  
APSRMARK jobs to mark them.  
If the IBM AFP Font Collection is not installed, you can run the following APSRMARK jobs on PSF/MVS to  
mark the host equivalents of the resident fonts: APSWMCPG, APSWMCR, APSWMHLV, APSWMTNR, and  
APSW4028.  
Activating Resident Fonts in the AFCCU Printers  
Use one of the following IPDS commands to activate resident fonts in the AFCCU printers.  
Load Font Equivalence Command: The Load Font Equivalence (LFE) command maps font local  
identifiers specified in text, graphics, or bar code data, to font Host Assigned IDs (HAIDs) and to Global  
Resource IDs (GRIDs). If the GRID specified in the LFE command matches a GRID contained in the  
printer, the font is activated.  
Activate Resource (Load Resource Equivalence) Command: The Activate Resource (AR) command  
(previously known as Load Resource Equivalence) maps Host Assigned IDs to global names of another  
format. The format for the global name is identified by a resource type and resource ID combination. If the  
printer contains a font that matches the global name in the AR command, that font is activated.  
Table 109 shows the combinations of resource types (RT) and resource ID formats (RIDF) supported by  
the AFCCU printers.  
Table 109. Resource Type and Resource ID Formats  
Resource Type  
RT HEX  
X'01'  
X'01'  
X'06'  
X'07'  
X'08'  
X'08'  
X'10'  
X'10'  
Resource ID Format  
IBM GRID  
RIDF HEX  
X'03'  
Single-Byte Coded Raster Font  
Single-Byte Coded Raster Font  
Code Page  
MVS Host Available  
IBM Grid  
X'06'  
X'03'  
Font Character Set  
Coded Font Format  
IBM GRID  
X'07'  
Single-Byte Coded Font Index  
Single-Byte Coded Font Index  
Coded Font  
X'03'  
MVS Host Unalterable  
Coded Font Format  
IBM GRID  
X'06'  
X'07'  
Coded Font  
X'03'  
Appendix B. Font Information for IPDS Printers 177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IBM Expanded Core Fonts Resident in the AFCCU Printers  
The Expanded Core Fonts shown in Table 110 through Table 116 on page 180 are supported as resident,  
scalable fonts. These tables show the valid Font Global ID (FGID) and code pages for each font.  
XOA-RRL Replies for Font Character Sets: The resident font set supports a font character set of any  
valid font width when queried as an individual font character set. When queried for a list of font character  
sets, using Execute Order Anytime (XOA)-Request Resource List (RRL), the resident character sets are  
reported with a font width of zero. A font width of zero indicates that the font is scalable. All of the following  
fonts are scalable.  
See Table 118 on page 181 for the code pages associated with these fonts.  
Table 110. Arabic Expanded Core Fonts  
Typeface  
FGID  
HEX  
FGID  
DEC  
GCSGID  
HEX  
GCSGID  
DEC  
Font Character Set  
Boutros Typing Roman Bold  
01A4  
01A0  
01AC  
01A8  
0903  
0902  
0901  
0420  
0416  
0428  
0424  
2307  
2306  
2305  
04F0  
04F0  
04F0  
04F0  
04F0  
04F0  
04F0  
1264  
1264  
1264  
1264  
1264  
1264  
1264  
CZ4404  
CZ4204  
CZ4504  
CZ4304  
CZH504  
CZH304  
CZH404  
Boutros Typing Roman Medium  
Boutros Typing Italic Bold  
Boutros Typing Italic Medium  
ITC Boutros Modern Rokaa Italic Bold  
ITC Boutros Modern Rokaa Italic Medium  
ITC Boutros Modern Rokaa Roman Bold  
ITC Boutros Modern Rokaa Roman  
Medium  
0900  
2304  
04F0  
1264  
CZH204  
ITC Boutros Setting Italic Bold  
0907  
0906  
0905  
0904  
2311  
2310  
2309  
2308  
04F0  
04F0  
04F0  
04F0  
1264  
1264  
1264  
1264  
CZN504  
CZN304  
CZN404  
CZN204  
ITC Boutros Setting Italic Medium  
ITC Boutros Setting Roman Bold  
ITC Boutros Setting Roman Medium  
Table 111. Hebrew Expanded Core Fonts  
Typeface  
FGID  
HEX  
FGID  
DEC  
GCSGID  
HEX  
GCSGID  
DEC  
Font Character Set  
Narkissim Italic Bold  
0907  
0906  
0905  
0904  
0903  
0902  
0901  
0900  
01AC  
01A8  
01A4  
01A0  
2311  
2310  
2309  
0424  
2307  
2306  
2305  
2304  
0428  
0424  
0420  
0416  
04F1  
04F1  
04F1  
04F1  
04F1  
04F1  
04F1  
04F1  
04F1  
04F1  
04F1  
04F1  
1265  
1265  
1265  
1265  
1265  
1265  
1265  
1265  
1265  
1265  
1265  
1265  
CZN505  
CZN305  
CZN405  
CZN205  
CZH505  
CZH305  
CZH405  
CZH205  
CZ4505  
CZ4305  
CZ4405  
CZ4205  
Narkissim Italic Medium  
Narkissim Roman Bold  
Narkissim Roman Medium  
Narkiss Tam Italic Bold  
Narkiss Tam Italic Medium  
Narkiss Tam Roman Bold  
Narkiss Tam Roman Medium  
Shalom Italic Bold  
Shalom Italic Medium  
Shalom Roman Bold  
Shalom Roman Medium  
178 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 112. Latin1 Expanded Core Fonts  
Typeface  
FGID  
HEX  
FGID  
DEC  
GCSGID  
HEX  
GCSGID  
DEC  
Font Character Set  
Boldface  
4F00  
01AC  
01A8  
01A4  
01A0  
0130  
0903  
0902  
0901  
0900  
0190  
0194  
01B0  
013E  
013F  
0905  
0907  
0906  
0904  
20224  
0428  
0424  
0420  
0416  
304  
07F7  
04F5  
04F5  
04F5  
04F5  
07F7  
04F5  
04F5  
04F5  
04F5  
04F7  
04F7  
04F7  
04F7  
04F7  
04F5  
04F5  
04F5  
04F5  
2039  
1269  
1269  
1269  
1269  
2039  
1269  
1269  
1269  
2039  
2039  
2039  
2039  
2039  
2039  
1269  
1269  
1269  
1269  
CZ8400  
CZ4500  
CZ4300  
CZ4400  
CZ4200  
CZ6200  
CZH500  
CZH300  
CZH400  
CZH200  
CZ5200  
CZ5400  
CZ7200  
CZ7400  
CZ7300  
CZN400  
CZN500  
CZN300  
CZN200  
Courier Italic Bold  
Courier Italic Medium  
Courier Roman Bold  
Courier Roman Medium  
Gothic Text  
Helvetica Italic Bold  
Helvetica Italic Medium  
Helvetica Roman Bold  
Helvetica Roman Medium  
Letter Gothic  
2307  
2304  
0428  
0424  
400  
Letter Gothic Bold  
Prestige  
404  
432  
Prestige Bold  
318  
Prestige Italic  
319  
Times New Roman Bold  
Times New Roman Italic Bold  
Times New Roman Italic Medium  
Times New Roman Medium  
2309  
2311  
2310  
2308  
Table 113. Latin2/3/5 Expanded Core Fonts  
Typeface  
FGID  
HEX  
FGID  
DEC  
GCSGID  
HEX  
GCSGID  
DEC  
Font Character Set  
Courier Italic Bold  
01AC  
01A8  
01A4  
01A0  
0903  
0902  
0901  
0900  
0905  
0907  
0906  
0904  
0428  
0424  
0420  
0416  
2307  
2306  
2305  
2304  
2309  
2311  
2310  
2308  
04F5  
04F5  
04F5  
04F5  
04F5  
04F5  
04F5  
04F5  
04F5  
04F5  
04F5  
04F5  
1269  
1269  
1269  
1269  
1269  
1269  
1269  
1269  
1269  
1269  
1269  
1269  
CZ4502  
CZ4302  
CZ4402  
CZ4202  
CZH500  
CZH302  
CZH402  
CZH202  
CZN402  
CZN502  
CZN302  
CZN202  
Courier Italic Medium  
Courier Roman Bold  
Courier Roman Medium  
Helvetica Italic Bold  
Helvetica Italic Medium  
Helvetica Roman Bold  
Helvetica Roman Medium  
Times New Roman Bold  
Times New Roman Italic Bold  
Times New Roman Italic Medium  
Times New Roman Medium  
Table 114. Latin4 Expanded Core Fonts  
Typeface  
FGID  
HEX  
FGID  
DEC  
GCSGID  
HEX  
GCSGID  
DEC  
Font Character Set  
Courier Italic Bold  
01AC  
0428  
04F5  
1269  
CZ4507  
Appendix B. Font Information for IPDS Printers 179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 114. Latin4 Expanded Core Fonts (continued)  
Typeface  
FGID  
HEX  
FGID  
DEC  
GCSGID  
HEX  
GCSGID  
DEC  
Font Character Set  
Courier Italic Medium  
01A8  
01A4  
01A0  
0903  
0902  
0901  
0900  
0905  
0907  
0906  
0904  
0424  
0420  
0416  
2307  
2306  
2305  
2304  
2309  
2311  
2310  
2308  
04F5  
04F5  
04F5  
04F5  
04F5  
04F5  
04F5  
04F5  
04F5  
04F5  
04F5  
1269  
1269  
1269  
1269  
1269  
1269  
1269  
1269  
1269  
1269  
1269  
CZ4307  
CZ4407  
CZ4207  
CZH507  
CZH307  
CZH407  
CZH207  
CZN407  
CZN507  
CZN307  
CZN207  
Courier Roman Bold  
Courier Roman Medium  
Helvetica Italic Bold  
Helvetica Italic Medium  
Helvetica Roman Bold  
Helvetica Roman Medium  
Times New Roman Bold  
Times New Roman Italic Bold  
Times New Roman Italic Medium  
Times New Roman Medium  
Table 115. Symbols Expanded Core Fonts  
Typeface  
FGID  
HEX  
FGID  
DEC  
GCSGID  
HEX  
GCSGID  
DEC  
Font Character Set  
Courier Roman Bold  
01A4  
01A0  
0901  
0900  
0905  
0904  
0420  
0416  
2305  
2304  
2309  
2308  
04FB  
04FB  
04FB  
04FB  
04FB  
04FB  
1275  
1275  
1275  
1275  
1275  
1275  
CZ4401  
CZ4201  
CZH401  
CZH201  
CZN401  
CZN201  
Courier Roman Medium  
Helvetica Roman Bold  
Helvetica Roman Medium  
Times New Roman Bold  
Times New Roman Bold  
Table 116. Cyrillic Greek Expanded Core Fonts  
Typeface  
FGID  
HEX  
FGID  
DEC  
GCSGID  
HEX  
GCSGID  
DEC  
Font Character Set  
Courier Italic Bold  
01AC  
01A8  
01A4  
01A0  
0903  
0902  
0901  
0900  
0905  
0907  
0906  
0904  
0428  
0424  
0420  
0416  
2307  
2306  
2305  
2304  
2309  
2311  
2310  
2308  
0514  
0514  
0514  
0514  
0514  
0514  
0514  
0514  
0514  
0514  
0514  
0514  
1300  
1300  
1300  
1300  
1300  
1300  
1300  
1300  
1300  
1300  
1300  
1300  
CZ4503  
CZ4303  
CZ4403  
CZ4203  
CZH503  
CZH303  
CZH403  
CZH203  
CZN403  
CZN503  
CZN303  
CZN203  
Courier Italic Medium  
Courier Roman Bold  
Courier Roman Medium  
Helvetica Italic Bold  
Helvetica Italic Medium  
Helvetica Roman Bold  
Helvetica Roman Medium  
Times New Roman Bold  
Times New Roman Italic Bold  
Times New Roman Italic Medium  
Times New Roman Medium  
180 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 117 lists the scalable OCR, APL, and Katakana fonts resident in the AFCCU printers.  
Table 117. OCR, APL, and Katakana Fonts Resident in the AFCCU Printers  
Typeface  
FGID  
HEX  
FGID  
DEC  
GCSGID  
HEX  
GCSGID  
DEC  
CPGID  
HEX  
CPGID  
DEC  
Font Character Set  
CZ420P  
125, 136,  
38E  
293, 310,  
910  
APL  
0133  
0142  
307  
322  
0518  
0518  
1304  
1304  
125, 136,  
38E  
293, 310,  
910  
APL Bold  
CZ440P  
OCR A  
OCR B  
0131  
0132  
305  
306  
03C8  
03C9  
968  
969  
36C, 37C  
36D, 37D  
122, 381,  
876,892  
877, 893  
290, 897,  
CZ4407  
CZ4207  
Katakana Gothic  
0130  
304  
051A  
1306  
CZH507  
403, 411 1027, 1041  
Code Pages for the IBM Expanded Core Fonts: Table 118 lists the code pages used with the resident  
IBM Expanded Core Fonts. Although all the IBM Expanded Core fonts code pages are referenced in  
Table 118, the AFCCU printers support only the Latin1 Country Extended, Latin1 EBCDIC Publishing,  
Latin1 ASCII, and Latin EBCDIC DCF code pages.  
Table 118. Code Pages for the Expanded Core Fonts  
Language Supoorted  
CPGID  
HEX  
CPGID  
DEC  
GCSGID HEX GCSGID DEC Code Page Name  
Latin 1 Country Extended Code Pages:  
US English, Canadian English,  
Canadian French, Dutch, Brazilian  
Portuguese, Portugeuse  
0025  
0037  
02B9  
0697  
T1V10037  
German  
0111  
0112  
0113  
0113  
0116  
0118  
0119  
011A  
0273  
0274  
0275  
0277  
0278  
0280  
0281  
0282  
02B9  
02B9  
02B9  
02B9  
02B9  
02B9  
02B9  
02B9  
0697  
0697  
0697  
0697  
0697  
0697  
0697  
0697  
T1V10273  
T1V10274  
T1V10275  
T1V10277  
T1V10278  
T1V10280  
T1V10281  
T1V10282  
Belgian  
Brazilian  
Danish, Norwegian  
Finnish, Swedish  
Italian  
Japanese  
Portuguese  
Castillian Spanish, Latin American  
Spanish  
011C  
0284  
02B9  
0697  
T1V10284  
UK English  
011D  
0129  
0285  
0297  
02B9  
02B9  
0697  
0697  
T1V10285  
T1V10297  
French, Catalan  
Multinational, Belgium French,  
Belgium Dutch, Swiss French, Swiss  
German, Swiss Italian  
01F4  
0367  
0500  
0871  
02B9  
02B9  
0697  
0697  
T1V10500  
T1V10871  
Icelandic  
Latin 1 EBCDIC Publishing Code Pages:  
Multinational, Belgium French,  
Belgium Dutch, Swiss French, Swiss  
German, Swiss Italian  
0169  
0361  
0479  
1145  
T1000361  
German  
Belgian  
017E  
017F  
0382  
0383  
0479  
0479  
1145  
1145  
T1000382  
T1000383  
Appendix B. Font Information for IPDS Printers 181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 118. Code Pages for the Expanded Core Fonts (continued)  
Language Supoorted  
CPGID  
HEX  
CPGID  
DEC  
GCSGID HEX GCSGID DEC Code Page Name  
Latin 1 Country Extended Code Pages:  
Brazilian Portuguese  
Canadian French  
0180  
0181  
0182  
0183  
0184  
0185  
0186  
0187  
0188  
0189  
018A  
018B  
0384  
0385  
0386  
0387  
0388  
0389  
0390  
0391  
0392  
0393  
0394  
0395  
0479  
0479  
0479  
0479  
0479  
0479  
0479  
0479  
0479  
0479  
0479  
0479  
1145  
1145  
1145  
1145  
1145  
1145  
1145  
1145  
1145  
1145  
1145  
1145  
T1000384  
T1000385  
T1000386  
T1000387  
T1000388  
T1000389  
T1000390  
T1000391  
T1000392  
T1000393  
T1000394  
T1000395  
Danish, Norwegian  
Finnish, Swedish  
French, Catalan  
Italian  
Japanese  
Portuguese  
Castillian Spanish  
Latin American Spanish  
UK English  
US English, Canadian English  
Latin 1 ASCII Code Pages:  
Multinational, US English, UK English,  
Dutch, German, Finnish, French,  
Italian, Spanish, Swedish  
01B5  
0352  
0437  
0850  
0397  
0304  
0919  
0980  
T1000437  
T1000850  
Multinational (Same as all Country  
extended Code Pages)  
Portugese (Primary = 850)  
Icelandic (Primary = 850)  
Canadian French (Primary = 850)  
Nordic (Primary = 850)  
IBM PC Desktop Publishing  
IOS Latin 1  
035C  
035D  
035F  
0361  
03EC  
0333  
0860  
0861  
0863  
0865  
1004  
0819  
03DE  
03DF  
03E1  
03E3  
047A  
02B9  
0990  
0991  
0993  
0995  
1146  
0697  
T1000860  
T1000861  
T1000863  
T1000865  
T1001004  
T1000819  
Latin 2/3/4/5 EBCDIC and ASCII Code Pages:  
Croatian, Czech, East German,  
Hungarian, Polish, Romanian, Slovak,  
Slovenian  
0354  
0852  
0306  
0982  
T1000852  
Latin2 Multilingual  
Latin2 ISO/ ANSI 8 Bit  
Latin3 Multilingual PC  
Latin3 Multilingual  
Latin4 ISO/ASCII  
0366  
0390  
0355  
0389  
042D  
0392  
0359  
0398  
0402  
0870  
0912  
0853  
0905  
1069  
0914  
0857  
0920  
1026  
03BF  
03BF  
0307  
0506  
04E8  
04E8  
03DB  
0480  
0480  
0959  
0959  
0983  
1286  
1256  
1256  
0987  
1152  
1152  
T1000870  
T1000912  
T1000853  
T1000905  
T1001069  
T1000914  
T1000857  
T1000920  
T1001026  
Latin4 EBCDIC  
Latin5 PC  
Latin5 ISO/ANSI 8 Bit  
Latin5  
Latin EBCDIC DCF Code Pages:  
DCF Release 2 Compatibility  
US Text Subset  
03EA  
03eb  
1002  
1003  
046C  
046D  
1132  
1133  
T1001002  
T1DCDCFS  
182 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 118. Code Pages for the Expanded Core Fonts (continued)  
Language Supoorted  
CPGID  
HEX  
CPGID  
DEC  
GCSGID HEX GCSGID DEC Code Page Name  
Latin 1 Country Extended Code Pages:  
Text with Numeric Spacing  
GML List Symbols  
042C  
040F  
1068  
1039  
04EB  
04EA  
1259  
1258  
T1001068  
T1001039  
Cyrillic and Greek EBCDIC and ASCII Code Pages:  
Cyrillic Multilingual (Primary = 1025)  
Cyrillic ISO/ASCII 8 Bit  
Cyrillic PC  
0370  
0393  
0357  
0362  
0401  
01A7  
032D  
0353  
0365  
036B  
040F  
0880  
0915  
0855  
0866  
1025  
0423  
0813  
0851  
0869  
0875  
1039  
03C0  
047E  
03D9  
03E4  
047E  
00DA  
039D  
0305  
03E6  
039D  
04EA  
0960  
1150  
0985  
0996  
2250  
0218  
0925  
0981  
0998  
0925  
1258  
T1000880  
T1000855  
T1000866  
Cyrillic #2 PC  
Cyrillic Multilingual  
Greek 183 (Primary = 875)  
Greek ISO/ASCII 8 Bit  
Greek PC (Primary = 869)  
Greek PC  
T1000813  
T1000851  
T1000869  
T1000875  
T1001039  
Greek  
GML List Symbols  
Arabic EBCDIC and ASCII Code Pages:  
Arabic Bilingual  
01A4  
0360  
03F0  
0405  
0416  
040F  
0420  
0864  
1008  
1029  
1046  
1039  
00EB  
03E2  
048A  
0482  
0499  
04EA  
0235  
0994  
1162  
1154  
1177  
1258  
T1000420  
T1000864  
T1001008  
T1001029  
T1001046  
T1001039  
Arabic PC  
Arabic ISO/ASCII 8 Bit  
Arabic Extended ISO/ASCII 8 Bit  
Arabic Extended ISO/ASCII 8 Bit  
GML List Symbols  
Hebrew EBCDIC and ASCII Code Pages:  
Hebrew ISO/ASCII 8 Bit  
Hebrew Publishing  
Hebrew  
0394  
0916  
1028  
0424  
03AD  
04AF  
03AD  
0941  
1199  
0941  
T1000916  
T1001028  
T1000424  
0404  
01A8  
Hebrew Character Set A (Primary =  
424)  
0323  
0803  
047B  
1147  
T1000803  
Hebrew PC (Primary = 862)  
Hebrew PC  
0358  
035E  
040F  
0856  
0862  
1039  
03DA  
03E0  
04EA  
0986  
0992  
1258  
T1000856  
T1000862  
T1001039  
GML List Symbols  
Symbols:  
Symbols, Set 7  
0103  
0383  
043F  
040E  
0443  
0444  
016B  
0259  
0899  
1087  
1038  
1091  
1092  
0363  
0154  
0154  
04E9  
04E9  
04A7  
04A7  
0276  
0340  
0340  
1257  
1257  
1191  
1191  
0630  
T1000259  
T1000899  
T1001087  
T1001038  
T1001091  
T1001092  
T1000363  
Symbols, Set 7 ASCII  
Symbols, Adobe  
Symbols, Adobe ASCII  
Symbols, Modified Set 7  
Symbols, Modified Set 7 ASCII  
Symbols, Set 8  
Appendix B. Font Information for IPDS Printers 183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 118. Code Pages for the Expanded Core Fonts (continued)  
Language Supoorted  
CPGID  
HEX  
CPGID  
DEC  
GCSGID HEX GCSGID DEC Code Page Name  
Latin 1 Country Extended Code Pages:  
T1M00829,  
T1000829  
Math Symbols  
033D  
0829  
038D  
0909  
For more information about core fonts and the AFCCU printers, see the Font Summary for AFP Font  
Collection, S544–5633.  
184 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C. Related Publications  
The following publications contain additional information about Printing Systems printers and printing  
software.  
You can use any of the following methods to send comments about the publications:  
v Reader’s Comment Form in each publication  
v Internet id:  
v IBM Mail Exchange id: IEA USIB4TDB  
v Fax number: 1-800-524-1519  
Many of the following publications can be found on the Printing Systems home page at  
http://www.ibm.com/printers.  
The titles and the order numbers for publications can change from time to time. To verify the current title or  
order number for a publication, contact your IBM representative.  
Table 119. Advanced Function Presentation Publications  
Publication  
Order Number  
S544–5284  
SK2T–2921  
G544–3876  
S544–3884  
S544–3702  
IBM Page Printer Formatting Aid: User’s Guide  
Printing and Publishing Collection Kit  
Guide to Advanced Function Presentation  
Advanced Function Presentation: Programming Guide and Line Data Reference  
Overlay Generation Language/370: User’s Guide and Reference  
Table 120. Data Stream and Object Architectures  
Publication  
Order Number  
SC31–6802  
S544–3417  
S544–3766  
SC31–6803  
SC31–6804  
SC31–6805  
Mixed Object Document Content Architecture Reference  
Intelligent Printer Data Stream Reference  
Bar Code Object Content Architecture Reference  
Presentation Text Object Content Architecture Reference  
Graphics Object Content Architecture Reference  
Image Object Content Architecture Reference  
Table 121. IBM AFP Fonts Publications  
Publication  
Order Number  
S544–5228  
S544–5633  
G544–3796  
S544–5726  
G544–3122  
G544–5229  
S544–3802  
Technical Reference for IBM Expanded Core Fonts  
Font Summary for AFP Font Collection  
IBM AFP Fonts: Type Transformer User’s Guide  
AFP Font Collection: Type Transformer for Windows User’s Guide  
IBM AFP Fonts: Introduction to Typography  
IBM AFP Fonts: Licensed Program Specifications  
IBM AFP Fonts: Technical Reference for Code Page  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 122. IBM AFP DBCS Fonts Publications  
Publication  
Order Number  
S544–5685  
S544–5686  
S544–568  
Technical Reference for AFP Font Collection Japanese Fonts  
Technical Reference for AFP Font Collection Korean Fonts  
Technical Reference for AFP Font Collection Simplified Chinese Fonts  
Technical Reference for AFP Font Collection Traditional Chinese Fonts  
S544–5688  
Table 123. IBM Infoprint Manager for AIX Publications  
Publication  
Order Number  
S544–5422  
S544–5475  
S544–5595  
S544–5596  
AFP Upload Configuration Guide Using SNA Server/6000  
Infoprint Manager: Reference Information  
Infoprint Manager for AIX: Administrator’s Guide  
Infoprint Manager for AIX: User’s and Operator’s Guide  
Table 124. IBM Infoprint Manager for Windows NT and Windows 2000 Publications  
Publication  
Order Number  
G544–5716  
S544–5475  
G544–5717  
Infoprint Manager for Windows NT and Windows 2000: Planning Guide  
Infoprint Manager: Reference  
Infoprint Manager for Windows NT and Windows 2000: Getting Started  
Table 125. IBM Infoprint Server for OS/390 V2R8- V2R10  
Publication  
Order Number  
G544–5690  
S544–5692  
S544–5693  
G544–5694  
G544–5696  
G544–5697  
OS/390 Infoprint Server V2R8 - V2R10 Messages and Diagnosis  
OS/390 Infoprint Server V2R8 - V2R10 User’s Guide  
OS/390 Infoprint Server V2R8 - V2R10 Operation and Administration  
OS/390 Infoprint Server V2R8 - V2R10 Customization  
OS/390 Infoprint Server V2R8 - V2R10 Introduction  
OS/390 Infoprint Server V2R8 - V2R10 Migration  
Table 126. IBM Infoprint Server for OS/390 V2R8- V2R10  
Publication  
Order Number  
S544–5742  
G544–5743  
S544–5744  
S544–5745  
G544–5746  
G544–5747  
z/OS Infoprint Server Introduction  
z/OS Infoprint Server Migration  
z/OS Infoprint Server Customization  
z/OS Infoprint Server Operation and Administration  
z/OS Infoprint Server User’s Guide  
z/OS Infoprint Server Messages and Diagnosis  
Table 127. Network Printer 12 Publications  
Publication  
Order Number  
G544–5371  
S544–5370  
G544–5499  
Network Printer 12 Quick Setup Guide  
Network Printer 12 Users’Guide  
Ethernet and Token Ring Quick Configuration Guide  
186 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 127. Network Printer 12 Publications (continued)  
Publication  
Order Number  
G544–5240  
G544–5506  
G544–5241  
S544–5344  
G544–5312  
Ethernet and Token Ring Configuration Guide  
IPDS Installation Instruction  
Twinax/Coax Configuration Guide  
PCL/PostScript Technical Reference  
IPDS and SCS Technical Referencee  
Table 128. Network Printer 17 Publications  
Publication  
Order Number  
G544–5346  
S544–5343  
G544–5499  
G544–5240  
G544–5506  
G544–5241  
S544–5344  
G544–5312  
Network Printer 17 Quick Setup Guide  
Network Printer 17 User’s Guide  
Ethernet and Token Ring Quick Configuration Guide  
Ethernet and Token Ring Configuration Guide  
IPDS Installation Instruction  
Twinax/Coax Configuration Guide  
PCL/PostScript Technical Reference  
IPDS and SCS Technical Referencee  
Table 129. Infoprint Color 8 Printer Publications  
Publication  
Order Number  
G544–5707  
S544–5708  
ipc8ug0  
Infoprint Color 8: Quick Start  
Infoprint Color 8: Handy Reference  
Infoprint Color 8: User’s Guide1  
Infoprint Color 8: Ethernet/Token Ring Installation and Configuration Guide  
S544–5709  
1. This publication is only available as online information. It can be found in the IBM Printing Systems Digital Library  
at www.ibm.com/printers  
Table 130. InfoPrint 12 Publications  
Publication  
Order Number  
G544–5751  
Infoprint 12: User’s Guide  
Infoprint 12: Network Printer Card User’s Guide  
Infoprint 12: Online Reference1  
G544–5727  
IP12REF English R1  
1. This publication is only available as online information. It can be found in the IBM Printing Systems Digital Library  
at www.ibm.com/printers  
Table 131. Infoprint 20 Printer Publications  
Publication  
Order Number  
G544–5512  
S544–5516  
G544–5499  
G544–5240  
S544–5344  
InfoPrint 20 Quick Reference Card  
InfoPrint 20 User’s Guide  
Ethernet and Token Ring Quick Configuration Guide  
Ethernet and Token Ring Configuration Guide  
PCL/PostScript Technical Reference  
Appendix C. Related Publications 187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 131. Infoprint 20 Printer Publications (continued)  
Publication  
Order Number  
IPDS and SCS Technical Referencee  
G544–5312  
Table 132. Infoprint 21 Printer Publications  
Publication  
Order Number  
G544–5700  
G544–5701  
G544–5499  
G544–5240  
G544–5241  
InfoPrint 21 Quick Reference Card  
InfoPrint 21 User’s Guide  
Ethernet and Token Ring Quick Configuration Guide  
Ethernet and Token Ring Configuration Guide  
Twinax/Coax Configuration Guide  
Table 133. Infoprint 32 and Infoprint 40 Printer Publications  
Publication  
Order Number  
G544–5480  
G544–5484  
S544–5344  
G544–5499  
G544–5241  
G544–5312  
InfoPrint 32 Infoprint 40 Quick Reference Card  
InfoPrint 32 Infoprint 40 User’s Guide  
PCL/PostScript Technical Reference  
Ethernet and Token Ring Quick Configuration Guide  
Twinax/Coax Configuration Guide  
IPDS and SCS Technical Referencee  
Table 134. Infoprint 60 Printer Publications  
Publication  
Order Number  
G544–5242  
S544–5432  
S544–5604  
S544–5643  
G544–3915  
S544–3977  
S544–5522  
S544–5649  
InfoPrint 60 Introduction and Planning Guide  
InfoPrint 60 User’s Guide  
InfoPrint 60 Finisher User and Planning Information  
InfoPrint 60 Finisher Application Design Guide  
Cut-Sheet Paper Reference for use with IBM Electrophotographic Printers  
InfoPrint 60 Attachment Configuration Handbook  
InfoPrint 60 Variable Size Paper and Tabs Guide  
InfoPrint 60 PCL Supplement  
Table 135. Infoprint 70 Printer Publications  
Publication  
Order Number  
SA18–7727  
SC18–2495  
GA18–7726  
InfoPrint 70: Using Your Infoprint 70  
InfoPrint 70: Quick Reference Card  
InfoPrint 70: Introduction and Planning Guide  
Table 136. Infoprint 2000–DP1 Printer Publications  
Publication  
Order Number  
S544–5764  
G544–5765  
G544–5766  
Infoprint 2000 for IPDS Printing: User’s Guide  
Infoprint 2000 Model DP1 for IPDS:Planning and Configuration Guide  
Infoprint 2000 Model DP1 for IPDS:Quick Reference Guide  
188 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 137. Infoprint 62 Publications  
Publication  
Order Number  
S544–5385  
G544–5384  
G544–3921  
Infoprint 62 Operator’s Guide  
Infoprint 62 Introduction and Planning Guide  
Continuous Forms - Forms Design Reference  
Table 138. Infoprint 3000 Printer Publications  
Publication  
Order Number  
G544–5563  
S544–5564  
G544–3921  
G544–5565  
Infoprint 3000 Introduction and Planning Guide  
Infoprint 3000 Operator’s Guide  
Continuous Forms - Forms Design Reference  
Infoprint 3000 Infoprint 4000 and 3900 Advanced Function Printers Safety Information  
Table 139. Infoprint 4000 Printer Publications  
Publication  
Order Number  
S544–5428  
G544–5427  
G544–3921  
G544–5427  
G544–3876  
G544–5325  
Infoprint 4000 Operator’s Guide  
Infoprint 4000 and 3900 Advanced Function Printers Operator’s Guide  
Continuous Forms - Forms Design Reference  
Introduction and Planning Guide  
Print On Demand Executive Summary and Planning Guide  
Print On Demand User’s Guide  
Table 140. Infoprint Color 100 Printer Publications  
Publication  
Order Number  
G544–5612  
G544–5648  
S544–5611  
Infoprint Color 100 Introduction and Planning Guide  
IBM Infoprint Color 100 Print Media Guide  
Infoprint Color 100 Operator’s Guide  
Table 141. Infoprint Color 130 Plus Printer Publications  
Publication  
Order Number  
G544–5772  
G544–5781  
G544–5771  
Infoprint Color 130 Plus: Installation Planning Guide  
Infoprint Color 130 Plus: Quick Reference Guide  
Infoprint Color 130 Plus Operator’s Guide  
Table 142. 4230 Printer Publications  
Publication  
Order Number  
SA40-0564  
4230 Printer User’s Guide Models 102 and 202  
4230 Printer Models 101, 1S2, 201, 2S2, 4S3, and 5S3  
SA40-0593  
Table 143. 4232 Printer Publications  
Publication  
Order Number  
4232 Printer User’s Guide Models 102 and 202  
SA24-4386  
Appendix C. Related Publications 189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 144. 4247 Printer Publications  
Publication  
Order Number  
SA24-4408  
S544-5780  
SA24–4404  
SA24-4409  
SA24-4411  
4247 Models 001, 002 User’s Guide  
4247 Model 003 User’s Guide  
4247 Model A00 User’s Guide  
4247 Models 001, 002 with Coaxial Attachment Quick Reference Guide  
4247 Models 001, 002 with Twinaxial Attachment Quick Reference Guide  
Table 145. 4400 Printer Publications  
Publication  
Order Number  
G544–5730  
G544–5731  
G544–5769  
G544–5733  
G544–5734  
G544–5735  
G544–5736  
G544–5737  
4400 Series Thermal Printers: Quick Start Guide  
4400 Series Thermal Printers: User’s Guide  
10/100Base–T Ethernet™ Interface User’s Manual  
4400 Series Thermal Printers: ASCII Programmer’s Reference Manual  
4400 Series Thermal Printers: IGP Programmer’s Reference Manual  
4400 Series Thermal Printers: Code V™ Programmer’s Reference Manual  
4400 Series Thermal Printers: Coax/Twinax Programmer’s Reference Manual  
4400 Series Thermal Printers: IPDS Programmer’s Reference Manual  
Table 146. 6400 Line Matrix Printer  
Publication  
Order Number  
S544–5640  
S544–5641  
GC31-3878  
6400 Line Matrix Printers Setup Guide Cabinet and Pedestal Models  
6400 Line Matrix Printers Operator’s Guide Cabinet and Pedestal Models  
6400 Line Matrix Printers Ethernet Interface User’s Manual  
Table 147. Print Services Facility for OS/390 Publications  
Publication  
Order Number  
S544–5430  
Print Services Facility for OS/390 User’s Guide  
Print Services Facility for OS/390: Customizaion  
S544–5622  
Table 148. Print Services Facility/VM Publications  
Publication  
Order Number  
S544–3677  
Print Services Facility/VM: Application Programming Guide  
Print Services Facility/VM: System Programming Guide  
S544–3680  
Table 149. Print Services Facility/VSE Publications  
Publication  
Order Number  
S544–3666  
Print Services Facility/VSE: Application Programming Guide  
Print Services Facility/VSR: System Programming Guide  
S544–3665  
190 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 150. Print Services Facility for AS/400 Publications  
Publication  
Order Number  
SC41–3713  
SC41–9620  
AS/400 Printer Device Programming  
AS/400 Data Description Specifications  
Table 151. Other AFP Products Publications  
Publication  
Order Number  
SC33-6134  
GH20-9158  
S544-3702  
S544-3700  
SH12-5280  
Composed Document Print Facility: Data Stream Interface, Typographic Fonts Interface  
Document Composition Facility and Document Library Facility: General Information  
Overlay Generation Language/370: User’s Guide and Reference  
Page Printer Formatting Aid/370: User’s Guide and Reference  
Using Image Handling Facility  
Appendix C. Related Publications 191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
192 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
Synonymous with. This appears in the commentary  
of a preferred term and identifies less desirable or less  
specific terms that have the same meaning.  
Glossary  
Source Identifiers  
This publication includes terms and definitions  
from the IBM Dictionary of Computing,  
SC20-1699.  
A
ABIC. See Adaptive Bilevel Image Compression  
accumulator. (1) A register in which the result of an  
operation is formed. (I) (A) (2) A 3800 hardware feature  
that provides a separate storage area to hold data in  
raster form. It can be used either for composing a sheet  
of data that combines a large amount of variable and  
constant data or for storing an electronic overlay in  
raster form so that the overlay is merged with variable  
data as the page is printed.  
Definitions reprinted from the American National  
Dictionary for Information Processing Systems are  
identified by the symbol (A) following the  
definition.  
Definitions reprinted from a published section of  
the International Organization for Standardization  
(ISO) Vocabulary-Information Processing or from a  
published section of Vocabulary-Office Machines  
developed by Subcommittee 1, Joint Technical  
Committee 1, of the International Organization for  
Standardization and the International  
Electrotechnical Committee (ISO/IEC JTC1/SC1)  
are identified by the symbol (I) following the  
definition. Because many ISO definitions are also  
reproduced in the American National Dictionary for  
Information Processing Systems, ISO definitions  
may also be identified by the symbol (A).  
Adaptive Bilevel Image Compression (ABIC). A 4-bit  
image capable of displaying up to 16 shades of gray.  
Advanced Function Common Control Unit  
(AFCCU). Used to describe all printers that have  
controllers based on RS/6000 and Power PC  
technology.  
Advanced Function Image and Graphics feature.  
hardware feature that can be purchased and installed  
on an AFP printer to support printer microcode image  
decompression of IOCA data streams that were  
A
compressed using standard compression routines. AFIG  
also corrects the resolution of an input image to match  
the printer’s resolution, thereby providing resolution  
independence for scanned input.  
Definitions reprinted from working documents,  
draft proposals, or draft international standards of  
ISO Technical Committee 97, Subcommittee 1  
(Vocabulary), Joint Technical Committee 1 are  
identified by the symbol (T) following the definition,  
indicating that final agreement has not yet been  
reached among its participating members.  
Advanced Function Presentation (AFP). A set of  
licensed programs, together with user applications, that  
use the all-points-addressable concept to print on  
presentation devices. AFP includes creating, formatting,  
archiving, retrieving, viewing, distributing, and printing  
information. See presentation device.  
Definitions that are specific to IBM products are so  
labeled; for example, “In SNA”, or “In the 3820”.  
AFCCU. Advanced Function Common Control Unit  
References  
The following cross-references are used in this  
AFIG. See Advanced Function Image and Graphics  
feature.  
glossary:  
AFP. See Advanced Function Presentation.  
Contrast with. This refers to a term that has an  
opposite or substantively different meaning.  
AFP data stream. A presentation data stream that is  
processed in AFP environments. MO:DCA-P is the  
strategic AFP interchange data stream, and IPDS is the  
strategic AFP printer data stream.  
See. This refers the reader to multiple-word terms in  
which this term appears.  
AFPDS. A term formerly used to identify the  
composed-page MO:DCA-based data stream  
interchanged in AFP environments. See also MO:DCA  
and AFP data stream.  
See also. This refers the reader to terms that have a  
related, but not synonymous, meanings.  
Synonym for. This appears in the commentary of a  
less desirable or less specific term and identifies the  
preferred term that has the same meaning.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
all points addressable (APA). The ability to address,  
reference, and position text, overlays, and images at  
any defined position or pel on the printable area of the  
paper. This capability depends on the ability of the  
hardware to address and to display each picture  
element.  
C
cassette. In a cut-sheet printer, a movable paper  
storage enclosure. See also bin.  
CCITT. See International Telegraph and Telephone  
Consultative Committee.  
alternate medium source. The ability to select print  
medium from more than one source (bin).  
changeable media origin. The ability of the printer to  
accept a command that changes the point on the  
medium where printing begins.  
APA. All points addressable.  
APAR. See Authorized program analysis report.  
channel-attached. In PSF, a device that is linked to  
the host system using only S/390 channel protocols. For  
example, a 3800 printer cabled to the host system with  
a S/390 channel adapter is considered a  
application program. (1) A program that performs a  
particular data processing task, such as inventory  
control or payroll. (2) A program that produces the print  
data set.  
channel-attached printer. Contrast with SNA-attached.  
character. (1) A member of a set of elements used for  
the representation, organization, or control of data.  
Characters may be letters, digits, punctuation marks, or  
other symbols represented in the form of a spatial  
arrangement of adjacent or connected strokes or in the  
form of other physical conditions in data media. (2) A  
letter, numeral, punctuation mark, or special graphic  
used for the production of text. (3) In bar codes, a  
single group of bars and spaces that represent an  
individual number, letter, punctuation mark, or other  
symbol. (4) A byte of data. (5) See alsographic  
character.  
authorized program analysis report (APAR).  
report of a problem caused by a suspected defect in a  
current unaltered release of a program.  
A
A4 paper. Paper size that is 210 by 297 mm (8.27 by  
11.7 inch).  
A5 paper. Paper size that is 148 by 210 mm (5.83 by  
8.27 inch).  
B
Bar Code Object Content Architecture (BCOCA). An  
architected collection of constructs used to interchange  
and present bar code data.  
character graphic. See also graphic character.  
character graphic. A visual representation of a  
character, other than a control character, that is  
normally produced by writing, printing, or displaying. (T)  
bar code symbology. A bar code language. Bar code  
symbologies are defined and controlled by various  
industry groups and standards organizations. Bar code  
symbologies are described in the public domain bar  
code specifications. Synonymous with symbology.  
character identifier. The standard identifier for a  
character regardless of its style. For example, all  
uppercase As have the same character identifier.  
baseline. The imaginary line on which successive  
characters are aligned in the inline direction.  
character rotation. The alignment of a character with  
respect to its character baseline, measured in degrees  
in a clockwise direction. Examples are 0°, 90°, 180°,  
and 270° Zero-degree character rotation exists when a  
character is in its customary alignment with the  
baseline.  
BCOCA. See Bar Code Object Content Architecture.  
bin. A paper source on cut-sheet printers. See also  
cassette.  
character set. (1) A finite set of different graphic or  
control characters upon which agreement has been  
reached and that is considered complete for some  
purpose; for example, each of the characters in ISO  
Standard 646 7–bit Coded Character Sets for  
Information Processing Interchange. (2) For page  
printers, the font library member that contains the  
character graphics and their descriptions.  
bounded-box font. A font designed to use bounded  
character boxes. Contrast with unbounded-box font.  
BTS. Burster-trimmer-stacker.  
burst. To separate continuous-forms paper into single  
sheets.  
burster-trimmer-stacker (BTS). A printer hardware  
feature that separates continuous forms into single  
sheets, trims the carrier strip from both edges of the  
forms, and stacks the sheets.  
code page. A set of assignments, each of which  
assigns a code point to a character. Each code page  
has a unique name or identifier. Within a given code  
page, a code point is assigned to one character. More  
194 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
than one character set can be assigned code points  
from the same code page. See also coded font.  
programs such as DCF can create text data consisting  
entirely of structured fields. Synonym for MO:DCA-P  
data.  
code page global identifier (CPGID). (1) A 5-digit  
registered identifier used to specify a particular  
assignment of code points to graphic characters. (2)  
See also graphic character set global identifier.  
compressed pattern storage (CPS). Storage that  
holds the extended (double-byte) fonts for the 3800  
Model 6 or Model 8 printers.  
code point. A 1-byte code representing one of 256  
potential characters.  
compression algorithm. An algorithm used to  
compress image data. Compression of image data can  
decrease the volume of data required to represent an  
image.  
coded font. (1) A font library member that associates  
a code page and a font character set. For double-byte  
fonts, a coded font associates more than one pair of  
code pages and font character sets. (2) A font that can  
be fully described using a code page, character set,  
type style, posture, weight classification, and width  
classification. For actual presentation, a size must be  
specified. Some coded fonts require all of these  
attributes. Others, called symbol sets, require only code  
page and character set. See also code page and  
character set.  
concatenated data set. In MVS, a group of logically  
connected data sets that are treated as one data set for  
the duration of a job step. See also data set., partitioned  
data set., and library..  
conditional processing. A page-definition function  
that allows input data records to partially control their  
own formatting.  
continuous forms. A series of connected forms that  
feed continuously through a printing device. The  
connection between the forms is perforated to allow the  
user to tear them apart. Before printing, the forms are  
folded in a stack arrangement with the folds along the  
perforations. Contrast with cut-sheet paper.  
coded overlay. An overlay that is stored in the printer  
in a coded (not raster) format. Contrast with raster  
pattern overlay.  
color selection. The ability to specify a color other  
than black to achieve more than one color of printed  
data. For example, the 4224-2C2 supports selection of  
several colors, depending on the color of ribbon  
installed in the printer. Other printers support the  
selection of black or the color of the medium,. which  
can cause white lettering on a background that has  
been shaded black, for example.  
continuous-forms stacker. An output assembly on a  
continuous-forms printer that refolds and stacks the  
continuous forms after printing.  
copy group. (1) One or more copies of a sheet of  
paper. Each copy can have modifications, such as text  
suppression, page position, forms flash, overlays,  
paper-source, and duplex printing. (2) In Print Services  
Facility, an internal object in a form definition that  
identifies the overlays and defines page placement and  
modifications to the form. (3) Synonymous with medium  
map.  
command. A request from a terminal or a specification  
in a batch-processing print file for the operation of a  
particular program.  
common-use forms. A set of paper sizes selected as  
being the most common in use throughout the world.  
copy modification. In the 3800 Printing Subsystem  
Model 1, a feature that allows the printing of predefined  
data on all pages of specified copies of a print file.  
communication attached. In PSF, a device that is  
SNA-attached and that uses a communication controller.  
For example, a 3812 printer attached to a 3174 control  
unit that is attached to a 3175 Communication  
Controller can be considered to be a  
Core Interchange font. Synonym for IBM Core  
Interchange font.  
communication-attached printer. Contrast with local  
attached.  
CPGID. See code page global identifier.  
CPS. Compressed pattern storage.  
CSE. Cut-sheet emulation  
compatibility mode. A mode of operation for printing  
the output of 3800 Model 1 application programs on a  
3800 page printer with little or no change to the  
application or JCL. Contrast with page mode.  
current print position. The picture element that  
defines the character reference point or the upper-left  
corner of an image.  
composed text. Text data and text-control information  
that dictates the format, placement, and appearance of  
data to be printed.  
cut-sheet emulation (CSE). The ability of a  
continuous-forms printer to provide output that is similar  
to output from a cut-sheet printer. Some  
continuous-forms printers provide an operator option to  
enable cut-sheet emulation mode.  
composed-text data. Obsolete term for text data that  
has been composed into pages. Text formatting  
Glossary 195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
cut-sheet paper. The medium that is cut into  
uniform-size sheets before being loaded into the printer.  
Contrast with continuous forms.  
deferred printing mode. A printing mode that spools  
output through JES to a data set instead of printing it  
immediately. Output is controlled using JCL statements.  
Contrast with direct printing mode.  
D
Device resolution. Printers can also be categorized  
by the resolution they support. For example, .br 240-pel  
resolution is supported by such printers as: 3800, 3820,  
381x, 3160, 3930, the AFCCU-based 3900 family of  
printers, and the group 3 printers. 240- or 300-pel  
(configurable) is supported by the 3130 printer. 300-pel  
resolution is supported by such printers as: 391X, 3935,  
4028, the PPDS and the PCL printers (such as the  
4019 and 4029). 600-pel resolution is supported by the  
InfoPrint 4000 DR1/DR2 printer, as well as the Network  
Printers 12, 17, and 24.  
DASD. Direct access storage device.  
data check. A synchronous indication of a condition  
caused by invalid data or incorrect positioning of data.  
Reporting of some data checks can be suppressed.  
data control block (DCB). A control block used by  
access method routines in storing and retrieving data.  
data map. An internal object in a page definition that  
specifies fonts, page segments, fixed text, page size,  
and the placement and orientation of text. Synonymous  
with page format.  
direct access storage device (DASD). A computer  
storage device in which access time is effectively  
independent of the location of the data.  
data set. A named set of records stored and  
processed as a unit. See also file., concatenated data  
set, partitioned data set, and sequential data set.  
direct printing. A PSF for OS/390 printing mode that  
allows PSF exclusive use of the printer. Output is  
printed directly and is not controlled by the Job Entry  
Subsystem (JES).  
data types. The type of data objects that can be  
printed by the printer. Each type of data object has its  
own architecture. An overview of the architectures is  
presented in the Mixed Object Document Content  
Architecture Reference.  
disabled mechanisms. The ability to identify one  
mechanism of the printer as disabled. An example is the  
ability to print from one medium source when the other  
source is disabled.  
Two types of text data are: PTOCA PT1 and PTOCA  
PT2. PT1 provides the basic function needed to control  
text data. PT2 provides additional migration controls for  
underscoring, overstriking, and making a temporary  
baseline move.  
Distributed Print Function (DPF). A component of  
PSF for OS/2 that you can use to print jobs sent to PSF  
for OS/2 from PSF for OS/390, PSF/VM, PSF/VSE, or  
PSF for AS/400. DPF receives host PSF output and  
resources for spooling and printing with PSF for OS/2.  
DPF also stores PSF for OS/390 and PSF/VSE  
resources in the DPF resource library, so that the host  
system does not have to send PSF resources each time  
documents are spooled. Through DPF, PSF for OS/2  
2.0 provides a function similar to that provided by  
Remote PrintManager (RPM) Version 3.0 under DOS.  
Two types of image data are: IOCA FS10 image and IM  
image. IOCA image provides more function than IM  
Image; for example, compression and resolution  
independence is possible with IOCA image.  
Some printers support vector graphics called GOCA  
DR/2V0.  
Some printers also have the capability of printing  
BCOCA BCD1 bar code data without requiring special  
fonts or special processing in the host system.  
document. (1) A machine-readable collection of one or  
more objects that represent a composition, a work, or a  
collection of data. (2) A publication or other written  
material.  
DCB. Data control block.  
DCF. .See Document Composition Facility.  
Document Composition Facility (DCF). An IBM  
licensed program that provides a text formatter called  
SCRIPT/VS. SCRIPT/VS can process files marked up  
with a unique set of controls and tags.  
Decompression Performance Enhancement feature.  
A feature you can purchase and install on your AFP  
printer to provide printer hardware image  
decompression of IOCA data streams that were  
compressed using standard compression routines. The  
DPE capability improves the decompression  
performance offered with the AFIG feature.  
double-byte coded font. A font in which the  
characters are defined by 2 bytes; the first defining a  
coded font section, and the second defining a code  
point. Double-byte coded fonts are required to support  
languages requiring more than 256 graphic characters.  
Two bytes are required to identify each graphic  
character. Kanji is printed using a double-byte font.  
Contrast with single-byte coded font.  
default. An alternate value, attribute, or option that is  
assumed when none has been specified, and one is  
needed to continue processing.  
196 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
download. To transfer data from one computer for use  
on another one. Typically, users download to a printer,  
from a larger computer to a diskette or fixed disk on a  
smaller computer, or from a system unit to an adapter.  
F
FCB. See forms control buffer.  
FGID. See font global identifier.  
downloaded fully described fonts. The IPDS form of  
host fonts downloaded to a printer. PSF converts pairs  
of host font character sets and code pages into IPDS  
form before downloading to the printer for printing.  
file.  
v In PSF for OS/2, a collection of related data.  
v In PSF for OS/390, a member of a partitioned data  
set or a sequential data set.  
DPE. See Decompression Performance Enhancement  
feature.  
v In PSF/VM, a CMS file.  
v In PSF/VSE, a member in a library.sublibrary.  
DPF. See Distributed Print Function.  
fixed metrics. Measurement information in specific  
units such as pels, inches, or centimeters for individual  
or collections of graphic characters. See also font  
metrics.  
drain. An operator action to halt the flow of jobs to a  
printer, usually to stop the printer or to change print  
options.  
fold memory. The ability of a form to refold at the fold  
perforation after exposure to heat during the fusing  
process.  
duplex printing. Printing on both sides of a sheet of  
paper. Contrast with simplex printing. See also normal  
duplex printing and tumble duplex printing.  
font. (1) A family or assortment of characters of a  
given size and style; for example, 9 point Bodoni  
Modern. (A). (2) One size and one typeface in a  
particular type family, including letters, numerals,  
punctuation marks, special characters, and ligatures. (3)  
A paired character set and code page that can be used  
together for printing a string of text characters. A  
double-byte font can consist of multiple pairs of  
character sets and code pages. (4) See coded font,  
double-byte coded font, and symbol set..  
E
EBCDIC. Extended binary-coded decimal interchange  
code.  
electronic overlay. A collection of constant data, such  
as lines, shading, text, boxes, or logos, that is  
electronically composed in the host processor and  
stored in a library, and that can be merged with variable  
data during printing. Contrast with page segment. See  
also page overlay and medium overlay.  
font character set. Synonym for character set.  
font global identifier. (1) A number that identifies the  
character style and size for certain printers. (2) A unique  
value that identifies the type family, typeface, and,  
sometimes, the point size of a character set.  
Enterprise System Connection. See ESCON  
channel.  
ESA. Enterprise System Architecture.  
ESCON channel. A channel having an Enterprise  
Systems Connection channel-to-control unit I/O interface  
that uses serial-by-bit optical cable as a transmission  
medium.  
font metrics. Measurement information that defines  
individual character values, such as height, width, and  
space, as well as overall font values, such as averages  
and maximums. Font metrics may be expressed in  
specified fixed units, such as pels, or in relative units  
that are independent of both the resolution and size of  
the font.  
exception. A condition that exists when the printer:  
v Detects an invalid or unsupported command, order,  
control, or parameter value from the host.  
v Finds a condition requiring host-system notification.  
v Detects a condition that requires the host system to  
resend data.  
font pruning. An action in which PSF reduces the  
number of characters downloaded to the printer by  
sending only those characters in a character set that  
are actually referenced by the code page. Font pruning  
can save time needed to download the characters and  
can reduce the amount of raster pattern storage used  
by the printer but can increase processor use.  
exception highlighting. The markings placed on the  
printed page to indicate the source of a data stream  
error. Two types of highlight markings are used:  
v
Print-error marker: a solid rectangle.  
Print-error vector: a line drawn from a printed error  
code to the point on the page where the error  
occurred.  
v
font width. (1) A characteristic value, parallel to the  
character baseline, that represents the size of all  
graphic characters in a font. (2) In a font character set,  
nominal font width is a font-designer defined value  
corresponding to the nominal character increment for a  
font character set. The value is generally the width of  
extended binary-coded decimal interchange code  
(EBCDIC). A coded character set of 256 eight-bit  
characters.  
Glossary 197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
the space character and is defined differently for fonts  
with different spacing characteristics.  
G
v For fixed-pitch, uniform character increment fonts: the  
fixed character increment, which is also the space  
character increment.  
GCSGID. See graphic character set global identifier.  
GDDM. See Graphical Data Display Manager.  
v For PSM fonts: the width of the space character.  
v For typographic, proportionally-spaced fonts: 1/3 of  
the vertical font size, which is also the default size of  
the space character  
global resource identifier (GRID). An 8-byte identifier  
used to identify an external name of a font, or, in  
AS/400, to identify fonts used in text. A GRID, which  
identifies a character-set and code-page combination,  
consists of the GCSGID, CPGID, FGID, and font width.  
The font designer can also define a minimum and a  
maximum horizontal font size to represent the limits of  
scaling. (3) In font referencing, the specified font width  
is the desired size of the font when the characters are  
presented. If this size if different from the nominal  
horizontal font size specified in a font character set, the  
character shapes and character metrics might need to  
be scaled prior to presentation.  
GOCA. See Graphics Object Content Architecture.  
graphic character. A visual representation of a  
character, other than a control character, that is  
normally produced by writing, printing, or displaying. (T)  
graphic character set global identifier (GCSGID).  
(1) A unique value that identifies the list of graphic  
character identifiers included in a component. (2) See  
alsocode page global identifier.  
form. A division of the physical medium; multiple forms  
can exist on a physical medium. For example, a roll of  
paper might be divided by a printer into rectangular  
pieces of paper, each representing a form. Envelopes  
are an example of a physical medium that comprises  
only one form. The IPDS architecture defines four types  
of forms: cut-sheets, continuous forms, envelopes, and  
computer output on microfilm. Each type of form has a  
top edge. A form has two sides, a front side and a back  
side. Synonymous with sheet.  
Graphical Data Display Manager. A series of IBM  
programs that can create, among other functions,  
device-independent visual data such as page segments  
and send it to devices such as displays, plotters,  
printers, and personal computers.  
Graphics Object Content Architecture (GOCA). An  
architected collection of constructs used to interchange  
and present graphics data.  
form definition. A resource used by PSF that defines  
the characteristics of the form that includes overlays to  
be used (if any), paper source (for cut-sheet printers),  
duplex printing, text suppression, the position of  
composed-text data on the form, and the number and  
modifications of a page.  
gray-scale image. The ability to print an image in  
shades of gray as well as in black.  
GRID. See global resource identifier.  
guaranteed print labeling. A method of print labeling  
that ensures the integrity of the identification label by  
preventing the user from writing over the label. If  
attempts are made to override print labeling, processing  
of the print file is terminated, and an audit record is  
written.  
format. (1) The shape, size, and general makeup of a  
printed document. (2) To prepare a document for  
printing. (3) The arrangement of text on the page.  
forms control buffer (FCB). A buffer for controlling  
the vertical format of printed output. The forms control  
buffer is a line-printer control that is similar to the  
punched-paper, carriage-control tape used on IBM 1403  
printers. On AFP page printers, the forms control buffer  
is replaced by the page definition. See page definition..  
group 3. A term used in VM-specific environments to  
define channel-attached high-end printers such as the  
3825, 3827, 3828, 3829, 3835-1, 3835-2, and 3900-1.  
Group 3 printers are also referred to as CCU (Common  
Control Unit) printers, because the hardware control unit  
was based on a common design. Because this  
publication encompasses more than VM-specific  
information, the term :q.group 3:eq. is not used in this  
publication, except for definition purposes in the  
Glossary section.  
forms flash. In the 3800, a printer function that prints  
photographic images with variable text data that is  
composed into pages. The printer operator must insert a  
frame containing a photographic negative into the  
printer to use the forms-flash function.  
fully described font. In the IPDS architecture, an  
LF1-type raster font containing font metrics, descriptive  
information, and the raster representation of character  
shapes, for a specific graphic character set. A fully  
described font can be downloaded to the printer using  
the Load Font Control and Load Font commands.  
Synonym for raster font. See downloaded fully  
group 4. A term used in VM-specific environments to  
define SNA-attached that use coax or twinax, and  
include such printers as the 3130, 381x, 3930, 3935,  
391x, and 4028. The group 4 printers can be  
communications-attached with 37xx or 3x7x controllers,  
or through an SNA token ring LAN. Because this  
publication encompasses more than VM-specific  
described fonts and resident fully described fonts.  
198 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
information, the term “group 4” is not used in this  
publication, except for definition purposes in the  
Glossary section.  
across these systems with full fidelity. These fonts are  
also compatible with fonts provided by Microsoft on their  
DOS/Windows workstations and with the base fonts  
provided by Adobe on their PostScript printers, providing  
document portability across both IBM and non-IBM  
computer systems. The fonts are provided in the  
Courier, Times New Roman, and Helvetica type families  
in both roman medium and bold weights and in italic  
medium and bold weights.  
H
hard page segment. (1) A page segment that is  
declared in the Map Page Segment structured field and  
loaded in the printer as a resource that can be reused  
during the job without being reloaded to the printer. (2)  
Within another element, as an inline resource. (3)  
Contrast with soft page segment.  
IBM MMR. See IBM Modified Modified Read.  
IBM Modified Modified Read (MMR). A compression  
algorithm.  
hardcopy. (1) A copy of a display image generated on  
an output device such as a printer or plotter, and which  
can be carried away. (T) (2) A printed copy of machine  
output in a visually readable form; for example, printed  
reports, listings, documents, and summaries.  
IM image command set. In the IPDS architecture, a  
collection of commands used to present IM image data  
in a page, page segment, or overlay.  
image. Toned and untoned pels arranged in a pattern.  
hardware default font. The font used by the printer if  
image data. Rectangular arrays of raster information  
no other font is specified.  
that define an image.  
hexadecimal. Pertaining to a numbering system with  
base of 16; valid numbers use the digits 0 through 9  
and characters A through F, where A represents 10 and  
F represents 15.  
Image Object Content Architecture. An architected  
collection of constructs used to interchange and present  
images.  
IMM. See IBM Modified Modified Read.  
host system. (1) A data processing system that  
prepares programs and the operating environments for  
another computer or controller. (2) The data processing  
system to which a network is connected and with which  
the system can communicate.  
impact printer. A printer in which printing results from  
mechanical impacts. (I) (A) Contrast with nonimpact  
printer.  
impression. The data printed on one side of a sheet.  
Printer speed is often measured in terms of impressions  
per minute (ipm).  
HP-PCL. Hewlett-Packard Printer Control Language,  
the data stream used by a type of Hewlett-Packard  
printer, some of which are supported by PSF for OS/2  
and PSF for AIX.  
inline. Synonymous with inline direction.  
inline direction. The direction of successive  
characters in a line of text. Synonym for inline..  
I
IBM Compatibility fonts. A group of fonts supplied as  
part of Print Services Facility, Print Management Facility,  
and Application System/400. Many of these fonts are  
derived from fonts created for specific IBM printers  
(such as the IBM 3800 Model 1, the IBM 6670  
Information Distributor, and the IBM Proprinter) or  
applications (such as Document Composition Facility).  
The fonts are called compatibility fonts because they  
allow applications created for the 3800 Model 1 and  
6670 to be migrated to newer page printers without  
having to change the fonts specified in the applications.  
Examples of IBM compatibility fonts include APL,  
Boldface, Document, Essay, Format, Gothic, Letter  
Gothic, Orator, Prestige, Roman, Script, Serif, and Text  
type families as well as a set of Proprinter Emulation  
fonts.  
Intelligent Printer Data Stream (IPDS). An  
architected host-to-printer data stream that contains  
both data and controls defining how the data is to be  
presented.  
interface. A shared boundary. An interface may be a  
hardware component to link two devices or a portion of  
storage or registers accessed by two or more computer  
programs. (A)  
International Telecommunications  
Union-Telecommunications Standardization Sector  
(ITU-TSS). See International Telegraph and Telephone  
Consultative Committee (CCITT).  
International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative  
Committee. An organization (one of four permanent  
organs of the International Telecommunication Union  
[ITU], headquartered in Geneva, Switzerland) that is  
concerned with the problems relating to international  
telephony and telegraphy. The CCITT Plenary Assembly  
IBM Core Interchange fonts. A group of fonts  
supplied as part of Print Services Facility that are  
common across all SAA and AIX operating systems and  
whose objective is to facilitate document interchange  
Glossary 199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
meets at regular intervals to prepare a list of technical  
questions related to telephone and telegraph services.  
The Assembly assigns these questions to study groups,  
which then prepare recommendations to be presented  
at the next plenary meeting. Approved  
recommendations are published for the use of  
engineers, scientists, and manufacturers around the  
world.  
with line data to mix different fonts on the same line, to  
underscore or overstrike, and on impact printers to  
create darker print.  
line printer. A device that prints a line of characters as  
a unit. (I) (A) Contrast with page printer.  
lines per inch (lpi). (1) .The number of lines that can  
be printed vertically within an inch. (2) A unit of  
measurement for the specification of the placement of  
the baseline.  
The committee’s name has been changed to  
International Telecommunications Union-  
Telecommunications Standardization Sector (ITU-TSS).  
local attached. In PSF, an SNA-attached device that  
does not have a communications controller in its  
configuration. For example, a 3812 printer connected to  
a channel-attached 3174 control unit defined to the host  
system through VTAM is considered to be a  
local-attached printer. Contrast with communication  
attached.  
IOCA. See Image Object Content Architecture.  
IPDS. See Intelligent Printer Data Stream.  
J
JCL. Job control language. See job control language.  
logical page. A presentation space. One or more  
object areas or data blocks may be mapped to a logical  
page. A logical page has specifiable characteristics,  
such as size, shape, orientation, and offset. The shape  
of a logical page is the shape of a rectangle. Orientation  
and offset are specified relative to a medium coordinate  
system. See also page.  
JES. Job entry subsystem. See job entry system.  
job control language (JCL). A control language used  
to identify a job to an operating system and to describe  
the requirements of the job.  
job entry subsystem (JES). A system facility for  
spooling, job queuing, and managing I/O.  
logical page origin. (1) The point on the logical page  
from which positions of images, graphics, page  
overlays, and text with 0-degree inline direction are  
measured. (2) The point on the logical page  
K
represented by Xp=0, Yp=0 in the Xp coordinate system.  
kanji. Nonphonetic Chinese characters used in  
Japanese written language. In a font representing kanji  
characters, each character is represented by a  
double-byte font.  
lpi. Lines per inch.  
LU type 1. An SNA logical unit type that provides a  
communication protocol among host application  
programs and terminals. Some printers also use this  
protocol to communicate with host application programs.  
L
LAN. Local Area Network  
LU type 6.2. An SNA logical unit type that converges  
functions from existing LU types to provide a single,  
interchangeable communication protocol.  
landscape page presentation. The position of a  
printed sheet that has its long edges as the top and  
bottom and its short edges as the sides. Contrast with  
portrait page presentation.  
M
library.  
macro. Synonym for macroinstruction.  
v In PSF for OS/2, a directory, a list of files stored on a  
disk or diskette.  
macroinstruction. An instruction that causes the  
execution of a predefined sequence of instructions.  
v In PSF for OS/390, a partitioned data set or a series  
of concatenated data sets.  
v In PSF/VM, a collection of CMS files, generally with  
magnetic ink character recognition (MICR).  
Character recognition of characters printed with ink that  
contains particles of a magnetic material. (I) (A)  
the same file type.  
v In PSF/VSE, a library sublibrary.  
line data. Data prepared for printing on a line printer,  
such as a 3800 Model 1. Line data is usually  
magnetic toner. Toner used with specific printers to  
print magnetic ink character recognition (MICR) fonts.  
characterized by carriage-control characters and table  
reference characters. Contrast with MO:DCA-P data.  
manual forms feed. The ability to manually feed a  
medium into a printing device rather than having the  
device automatically feed the medium.  
line merging. Printing two or more records of line data  
at the same location on the page. Line merging is used  
200 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Map Page Segment structured field (MPS). The Map  
Page Segment structured field identifies the page  
segments to be loaded into the printer and to remain in  
the printer while the entire print file is printed.  
microfilm device. An output device that presents a  
hardcopy on microfilm.  
Mixed Object Document Content Architecture. An  
architected, device-independent data stream for  
interchanging documents.  
marking. A method that refers to the updating of  
certain structured fields that identifies a resource for use  
by Remote PrintManager or as being printer resident.  
mixed-pitch font. A font that simulates a typographic  
font. The characters are in a limited set of pitches; for  
example, 10 pitch, 12 pitch, and 15 pitch.  
maximum speed. The highest speed of which the  
printer is capable in characters per second (cps), lines  
per minute (lpm), or impressions per minute (ipm), for a  
given size sheet.  
MO:DCA. See Mixed Object Document Content  
Architecture.  
MO:DCA-P. Print data that has been composed into  
pages. Text formatting programs such as DCF can  
produce composed text data consisting entirely of  
structured fields.  
media destination. The destination to which sheets  
are sent as the last step in the print process. Some  
printers support several media destinations to allow  
options such as print job distribution to one or more  
specific destinations, collated copies without having to  
send the document to the printer multiple times, and  
routing output to a specific destination for security  
reasons. Contrast with media source.  
MOF. Metric-only font.  
monospaced font. A font in which the graphics  
characters have a uniform character increment.  
Synonymous with uniformly spaced font. Contrast with  
proportionally spaced font.  
media destination by copy. The ability to select the  
destination for an individual copy of a sheet. This  
function is not supported by PSF.  
MPS. See Map Page Segment structured field.  
media origin. The first hardware addressable point on  
the physical medium. The point from which the logical  
page origin is positioned by the medium map. This point  
is represented by Xm=0, Ym=0 in the Xm, Ym coordinate  
system. The media origin is defined relative to the top  
edge of the medium. Synonymous with medium origin.  
Multiple Virtual Storage (MVS). An IBM operating  
system running on a S/370 or S/390 processor.  
multiple-up. The printing of more than one page of  
application data on a single surface of a sheet of paper.  
MVS. See Multiple Virtual Storage.  
media source. The source from which sheets are  
obtained for printing. Some printers support several  
media sources, so that media with different  
characteristics (such as size, color, and type) can be  
selected. Contrast with media destination.  
N
N_UP printing. In basic N_UP printing, the dividing of  
a side of a sheet into a fixed number of equal-size  
partitions. For example, N_UP 4 divides each side of  
the sheet into four equal partitions. In enhanced N_UP  
printing, the sheet can be divided into 8 partitions,  
anywhere on the sheet.  
media source by copy. The ability to select the  
source of the media for each copy of a sheet, when  
making multiple copies of a sheet.  
medium. The physical material (for example, paper)  
on which data is printed. See also form.  
NACK. See negative acknowledgment reply.  
medium map. An internal object in a form definition  
that controls the modifications to a form, page  
narrow forms. Forms that have their longer edges at  
the sides and their shorter edges at the top and bottom.  
placement, and overlays. Synonymous with copy group.  
negative acknowledge reply (NACK). A reply from a  
printer to a host indicating that an exception has  
occurred.  
medium origin. Synonym for media origin.  
medium overlay. An electronic overlay that is invoked  
by the medium map of a form definition for printing at a  
fixed position on the form. See page overlay.  
nonimpact printer. A printer in which printing is not  
the result of mechanical impacts; for example, thermal  
printers, electrostatic printers, and photographic printers.  
(I) (A) Contrast with impact printer.  
MICR. See magnetic ink character recognition.  
MICR printing. The ability of a printer to either print  
with magnetic toner or to allow MICR printing through a  
postprocessing device.  
normal duplex printing. Printing on both sides of the  
paper so that the sheets can be bound on the long  
edge of the paper. Contrast with simplex printing. See  
also tumble duplex printing.  
Glossary 201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
page definition. A resource used by PSF that defines  
the rules of transforming line data into pages and text  
controls.  
O
object. A resource or a sequence of structured fields  
contained within a larger entity, such as a page  
segment or a page.  
page format. Synonym for data map.  
page mode. The mode of operation in which a page  
printer can accept a page of data from a host processor  
to be printed on an all-points-addressable output  
medium. Data may consist of pages containing text,  
images, overlays, or page segments. Contrast with  
compatibility model.  
offset stacking. A function that allows the printed  
output pages to be offset for easy separation of print  
jobs.  
OGL/370. See Overlay Generation Language/370.  
operator-adjustable forms. On certain printers, the  
ability of the operator to adjust the page image on the  
medium to align data for correct placement on  
preprinted forms.  
page origin. Synonym for logical page origin.  
page overlay. An electronic overlay that can be  
invoked for printing and positioned at any point on the  
page by an Include Page Overlay structured field in the  
print data. See medium overlay.  
option. (1) A specification in a statement that may be  
used to influence the execution of the statement. (2) A  
choice offered from a list of possibilities.  
page position. A control in the copy group to assign  
the top-left boundary point of the logical page on a  
sheet for a data set. The page position is determined  
from the media origin.  
orientation. The number of degrees an object is  
rotated relative to a reference; for example, the  
orientation of an overlay relative to the logical page  
origin. Orientation usually applies to blocks of  
information, whereas character rotation applies to  
individual characters. See also text orientation.  
page printer. Any of a class of printers that accepts  
MO:DCA-P pages, constructed of page data and  
images, among other things. Contrast with line printer.  
origin. A picture element (pel) position from which the  
placement and orientation of text, images, and page  
segments are specified. For example, pages, overlays,  
and page segments have origins.  
Page Printer Formatting Aid (PPFA). An IBM  
licensed program you can use to create and store form  
definitions and page definitions, which are resource  
objects used for managing print jobs. By writing a  
command stream specifying form definitions, page  
definitions, or both, for executing PPFA, you can store  
the objects specified in the library. You can then use  
these objects to format printed output.  
outline font. A font technology in which the graphic  
character shapes are represented in digital form by a  
series of mathematical expressions that define the outer  
edges of the strokes. The resulting graphic character  
shapes can be either solid or hollow. Outline fonts can  
be scaled (sized) to any size. The IBM outline font  
character sets have a CZ prefix. Contrast with raster  
font.  
page segment. A resource containing MO:DCA data  
and images, prepared before formatting and included  
during printing. A page segment can contain text and  
images and can be included on any addressable point  
on a page or electronic overlay. A page segment  
assumes the environment of an object in which it is  
included.  
overlay. A collection of constant data, such as lines,  
shading, text, boxes, or logos, that is electronically  
composed in the host processor and stored in a library  
and that can be merged with variable data during  
printing. See also forms flash., page overlay, medium  
overlay, and electronic overlay.  
PAGEDEF. A JCL parameter that specifies a page  
definition. See page definition.  
parameter. (1) A variable that is given a constant  
value for a specified application and that may denote  
the application. (I) (A) (2) An item in a menu for which  
the user specifies a value or for which the system  
provides a value when the menu is interpreted. (3) Data  
passed between programs or procedures.  
Overlay Generation Language/370 (OGL/370). An  
IBM licensed program you can use to design objects for  
electronic overlays, such as lines, boxes, shadings, and  
irregular shapes, to create graphics.  
P
partial page. A page that does not contain all the  
intended data. Partial pages can be printed after an  
error is sensed.  
page. (1) A data stream object delimited by a Begin  
Page structured field and an End Page structured field.  
A page can contain text, image, graphics, and bar code  
data. (2) The final representation of such an object on a  
physical medium. (3) See also logical page.  
202 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
partition. In basic N_UP printing, the division of the  
medium presentation space into a specified number of  
equal-sized areas in a manner determined by the  
current physical medium.  
print direction. (1) The direction in which characters  
are added to a line. (2) In PSF, the specification of inline  
direction for the printing of text.  
print-error marker. See exception highlighting.  
Print-error vector. See exception highlighting.  
partitioned data set (PDS). A data set in direct  
access storage that is divided into partitions, called  
members, each of which can contain a program, part of  
a program, or data. Contrast with sequential data set.  
print job. The data that the user submits to PSF to be  
printed. A print job can request the printing of multiple  
data sets.  
pattern storage (PST). An area of storage that holds  
the raster patterns for fonts and images.  
print labeling. A controlled method of placing  
identification labels on each page of PSF printed output.  
See also guaranteed print labeling.  
PDS. See partitioned data set.  
pel. Synonym for picture element.  
print position. Any location on a medium where a  
PEM. Print-error marker. See exception highlighting.  
PEV. Print-error vector. See exception highlighting.  
character can be printed.  
print quality. (1) The measure of printed output  
against existing standards and in comparison with jobs  
printed previously. (2) The ability of some page printers  
to print data at more than one level of print quality, such  
asdraft and near-letter quality.  
physical medium. A physical entity on which  
information is presented. Examples of a physical  
medium are a display screen, paper, foils, microfilm, or  
labels.  
print-quality levels. The capability on certain printers  
for you to specify more than one level of print quality,  
such as draft or near letter quality.  
picture element. (1) In computer graphics, the  
smallest element of a physical medium that can be  
independently assigned color and intensity. (T) (2) The  
smallest element that can be printed or displayed on a  
physical medium. Picture elements per inch is often  
used as a measurement of presentation granularity.  
Synonymous with pell.  
print server. (1) A functional unit that provides shared  
services to workstations over a network; for example, a  
file server, a print server, or a mail server. (T) (2) In a  
network, a data station that provides facilities to other  
stations; for example, a file server, a print server, or a  
mail server. (A) (3) In the AIX operating system, an  
application program that usually runs in the background  
and is controlled by the system program controller. (4)  
In TCP/IP, a system in a network that handles the  
requests of a system at another site, called a  
client-server.  
pitch. The character size represented by the number  
of characters that can be printed horizontally in an inch;  
for example, 10 pitch has 10 graphic characters per  
inch. Uniformly spaced fonts are measured in pitch.  
Contrast with point.  
point. A unit of about 1/72 inch used in measuring  
type. Contrast with pitch.  
Print Services Facility (PSF). A licensed program that  
manages and controls the input data stream and output  
data stream required by supported IBM page printers.  
PSF combines print data with other resources and  
printing controls to produce AFP output.  
point size. The height of a font in points.  
portrait page presentation. The position of a printed  
sheet that has its short edges as the top and bottom  
and its long edges as the sides. Contrast with  
landscape page presentation.  
printable area. The area on a sheet of the paper  
where print can be placed.  
PPFA. See .Page Printer Formatting Aid.  
printer. A presentation device that produces character  
shapes, graphics pictures, images, or bar-code symbols  
on a physical medium. Examples of a physical medium  
are a display screen, paper, foils, microfilm or labels.  
See presentation device.  
presentation device. A device that produces  
character shapes, graphics pictures, images, or bar  
code symbols on a physical medium. Examples of a  
physical medium are a display screen, paper, foils,  
microfilm, or labels.  
printer-parameter member. In PSF/VSE, the member  
of a phase library containing user-specified printer  
parameters to print a job on a page printer. The  
printer-parameter macroinstruction provided with  
PSF/VSE stores the user-specified parameters as a  
member of a phase library.  
Presentation Text Object Content Architecture  
(PTOCA). An architected collection of constructs used  
to interchange and present presentation text data.  
print data stream. The data stream created by PSF  
and transmitted to the printer.  
Glossary 203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
printhead resolution. The number of pels that can be  
printed in an inch, both horizontally and vertically.  
hardware product, or device. The RPQ may be used in  
conjunction with programming RPQs to solve unique  
data processing problems.  
program temporary fix (PTF). A temporary solution or  
bypass of a problem diagnosed by IBM as resulting  
from a defect in a current unaltered release of the  
program.  
resident fully described fonts. Fonts stored in a  
printer but that have most of the attributes that can be  
specified for host fonts.  
programming request for price quotation (PRPQ).  
A
resident symbol sets. A type of font stored in a  
printer that has fewer attributes than can be specified  
for fully described fonts.  
customer request for a price quotation on alterations or  
additions to the functional capabilities of system control  
programming or licensed programs. The RPQ may be  
used in conjunction with computing system RPQs to  
solve unique data processing problems.  
resolution. (1) In computer graphics, a measure of the  
sharpness of an image, expressed as the number of  
lines and columns on the display screen. (2) The  
number of pels per unit of linear measure.  
proportionally spaced font. A typographic font, or in  
some usages a mixed-pitch font. See typographic font  
and mixed-pitch font.  
resource. (1) A collection of printing instructions used  
by Print Services Facility in addition to the print data  
set, to produce the printed output. PSF resources  
include coded fonts, font character sets, code pages,  
page segments, overlays, form definitions, and page  
definitions. (2) Any source of aid used for performing a  
task, for example disk storage space, computer  
processing time, and communications lines.  
PSF. See Print Services Facility.  
PSF Direct. A function of PSF for OS/2 of PSF for AIX  
that enables another PSF program (PSF for OS/390,  
PSF/VM, PSF/VSE, or PSF for AS/400), using the  
LU6.2 SNA protocol, to print remotely on PSF for OS/2  
or PSF for AIX printers. The PSF program sends the  
print data stream directly to the PSF for OS/2 or PSF  
for AIX printer, bypassing the OS/2 or RISC/6000 spool.  
The operator of the originating system controls printing  
on the PSF for OS/2 or PSF for AIX printers, as though  
the printers were attached to the originating system.  
rotation. Synonym for character rotation. See also  
orientation.  
routine. A program or sequence of instructions called  
by a program that may have some general or frequent  
use. (I) (A)  
PTF. Program temporary fix.  
RPQ. See request for price quotation.  
PTOCA. See Presentation Text Object Content  
Architecture.  
rule. A solid or patterned line of any weight, extending  
horizontally or vertically across a column, row, or page.  
R
S
raster font. A font technology in which the graphic  
characters are defined directly by the raster bit map.  
Contrast with outline font..  
SCS. See SNA Character String.  
SDLC. Synchronous Data Link Control.  
raster pattern. A pattern of bits with 0 (off) and 1 (on)  
that define the pels in an image. A 1-bit is a toned pel.  
security label. In a trusted computing base, a security  
label used to maintain multiple levels of security on a  
system. This label is a combination of a security class  
and a security level.  
raster pattern overlay. An overlay loaded in the  
printer as a raster pattern rather than as a sequence of  
printer commands. Contrast with coded overlay.  
sense data. (1) Data describing an I/O error. Sense  
data is presented to a host system in response to a  
Sense I/O command. (2) In SNA, the data sent with a  
negative response indicating the reason for the  
response.  
raster pattern storage (RPS). An area of storage that  
holds raster patterns for fonts and images.  
repositioning. A process in which Print Services  
Facility, following an indication from the printer or from  
JES of a potentially recoverable error, locates the  
correct spool record for recomposing one or more  
pages for printing.  
sequential data set. In MVS, a data set whose  
records are organized on the basis of their physical  
positions, such as on magnetic tape. Contrast with  
partitioned data set.  
request for price quotation (RPQ). A customer  
request for a price quotation on alterations or additions  
to the functional capabilities of a computing system,  
sheet. A division of the physical medium on which  
data is presented. The IPDS architecture defines four  
types of sheets: cut-sheet forms, continuous forms,  
204 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
envelopes, and computer output on microfilm. Each  
sheet has a front and a back side. Some types of media  
consist of multiple sheets. For example, a roll of  
continuous forms can be divided at the perforations into  
rectangular sheets. Each sheet usually has carrier or  
tractor-feed strips, also. Microfilm is another example of  
a medium comprising multiple sheets, whereas  
envelopes comprise only one sheet. Synonymous with  
form.  
Examples of devices that may not provide typographic  
quality are dot-matrix printers and displays.  
symbology. Synonym for bar code symbology.  
Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC). A discipline  
for managing synchronous information transfer over a  
data link connection.  
SYSOUT. See system output stream.  
simplex printing. Printing on only one side of the  
paper. Contrast with duplex printing.  
system output stream (SYSOUT). An indicator used  
in a data definition (DD) statement to signify that a data  
set is to be written on a system output unit.  
single-byte coded font. A font in which the characters  
are defined by a 1-byte code point. A single-byte coded  
font has only one coded font section. Contrast with  
double-byte coded font.  
Systems Network Architecture (SNA). In IBM  
networks, the description of the layered logical structure,  
formats, protocols, and operational sequences that are  
used for transmitting information units through networks,  
as well.  
SNA. Systems Network Architecture.  
SNA Character String. In SNA, a character string  
composed of EBCDIC controls, optionally intermixed  
with end-user data, that is carried within a  
request/response unit.  
T
table reference character (TRC). An optional control  
character in an input record that identifies the font to be  
used to print the record. The table reference character  
corresponds to a font number defined in a page  
definition font list or to the order of font names listed in  
the job control CHARS parameter.  
SNA-attached. In PSF, a device linked to the host  
system through VTAM that uses an SNA protocol to  
transfer data. The device does not need to be physically  
connected to the host; some printers are attached to a  
control unit, a communication controller, or both, and  
they can transfer data over telecommunication lines. For  
example, a 3820 attached to a communication controller  
using the LU 6.2 communication protocol to transfer  
data to a communication controller is considered an  
SNA-attached printer. Contrast with channel-attached.  
TCP/IP-attached. Includes all printers attached  
through the 7913, or attached directly to either  
token-ring or Ethernet LAN through TCP/IP. These are  
primarily the group 4 printers (that are attached through  
the 7913) and the AFCCU printers (through direct LAN  
attachment).  
soft page segment. A resource that is not declared in  
the Map Page Segment structured field but is sent to  
the printer inline with data. Contrast with hard page  
segment.  
text. A graphic representation of information on an  
output medium. Text can consist of alphanumeric  
characters and symbols arranged in paragraphs, tables,  
and columns.  
spooled printing. .A printing mode in which a print file  
is sent to a spooling subsystem. The spooling  
subsystem then directs the file to a printer.  
text orientation. A description of the appearance of  
text as a combination of print direction and character  
rotation.  
storage. (1) A unit into which recorded text can be  
entered, in which it can be retained and processed, and  
from which it can be retrieved. (T) (2) The action of  
placing data into a storage device. (I) (3) A storage  
device. (A)  
text suppression. The intentional omission of portions  
of text, specified in a copy group in the form definition.  
throughput. (1) A measure of the amount of work  
performed by a printer over a period of time, for  
example, the number of impressions per minute. (2) A  
measure of the amount of work performed by a  
computer system over a period of time, for example, the  
number of jobs per day. (I) (A)  
structured field. A self-identifying string of bytes and  
its data or parameters.  
subgroup. A set of modifications within a copy group  
that applies to a certain number of copies of a form. A  
copy group can contain more than one subgroup.  
token ring. A network configuration in which tokens  
are passed in a circuit from node to node. A node that is  
ready to send can capture the token and insert data for  
transmission.  
suppression. Synonym for text suppression.  
symbol set. A coded font that is usually simpler in  
structure than a fully described coded font. Symbol sets  
are used where typographic quality is not required.  
Glossary 205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
trace. A record of the execution of a computer  
program. It exhibits the sequences in which the  
instructions were executed. (A)  
space in which printing is allowed. If the logical page is  
a secure overlay, the area in which printing is allowed is  
the physical printable area. If the logical page is not a  
secure overlay, and if a user printable area is defined,  
the area in which printing is allowed is the intersection  
of the physical printable area with the user printable  
area. If a user printable area is not defined, the area in  
which printing is allowed is the physical printable area.  
See also logical page and user printable area.  
TRC. Table reference character.  
tumble duplex printing. Duplex printing for sheets  
that are to be bound on the short edge of the paper  
regardless of whether the printing is portrait or  
landscape. Contrast with normal duplex printing.  
value. A quantity assigned to a constant, a variable, a  
parameter, or a symbol in a command.  
two-channel switch. A hardware feature that allows  
an I/O device to be attached to two channels. A  
dynamic switch can be added, which allows both  
interfaces to be enabled at the same time with channel  
selection determined by programming.  
Virtual Telecommunications Access Method  
(VTAM). A set of programs that maintains control of  
the communication between terminals and application  
programs running under DOS/VS, OS/VS1, and  
OS/VS2 operating systems.  
type size. (1) A measurement in pitch or points of the  
height and width of a graphic character in a font. (2)  
One of the many attributes of a font; other attributes, for  
example, are weight and width.  
VPA. See valid printable area.  
VTAM. Virtual Telecommunications Access Method.  
typeface. A collection of fonts all having the same  
style, weight, and width. Each font differs from the  
others by point size or type family.  
W
wide forms. (1) Forms that have their longer edges at  
the top and bottom and their shorter edges at the sides.  
(2) Forms that have perforations on the longer edge of  
the paper and tractor holes on the shorter edge.  
typographic font. A font in which the distance  
between characters varies. The distance from one  
character to another is adjusted to improve the visual  
flow of text by eliminating excess space.  
X
U
XA. Extended Architecture.  
UCS. Seeuniversal character set.  
X-axis. In printing, an axis perpendicular to the  
direction in which the paper moves through the printer.  
See also Y-axis.  
unbounded-box font. A font designed to use  
unbounded character boxes. Contrast with bounded-box  
font.  
unformatted print records. Line data made up of  
fields of data that have not been formatted into print  
lines. PSF uses a page definition to format these  
records for printing on page printers.  
Y
Y-axis. In printing, an axis parallel with the direction in  
which the paper moves through the printer. See also  
X-axis.  
uniformly spaced font. A font in which the characters  
have the same character increment. Contrast with  
proportionally spaced font.  
universal character set (UCS). A printer feature that  
permits the use of a variety of character arrays.  
UPA. See user printable area.  
user printable area (UPA). The area within the valid  
printable area (VPA) where user-generated data can  
print without causing an exception condition. See also  
valid printable area.  
V
valid printable area (VPA). The intersection of a  
logical page with the area of the medium presentation  
206 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Index  
6400 printer (continued)  
characteristics 145  
Numerics  
3800 printers  
font technologies 12  
migrating applications 157  
4230 printer  
IPDS print-quality levels 149  
media specifications 146  
operator-adjustable forms 148  
printable area 146  
attachment mode 21  
attachments 120  
bar code support 17  
characteristics 119  
font technologies 12  
fonts 122  
printer capabilities 150  
related publications 190  
supported IPDS functions 15  
media specifications 120  
operator-adjustable forms 122  
print-quality levels 122  
printable area 120  
printer capabilities 124  
related publications 189  
supported IPDS functions 15  
4232 printer  
A
activate resource (load resource equivalence) 177  
additional printing information  
Advanced Function Common Control Unit (AFCCU)  
AFCCU  
1
1
default font 177  
description of  
printers  
AFP  
1
attachment mode 22  
attachments 126  
1
characteristics 125  
media specifications 126  
operator-adjustable forms 127  
printable area 126  
related publications 189  
4247 printer  
related publications 185  
AFP font collection 11  
AFP products  
related publications 191  
Arabic Expanded Core Fonts 178  
AS/400 Host Print transform 18  
attachment mode  
attachment mode 22  
attachments 131  
for 4230 printer 21  
bar code support 17  
characteristics 129  
font technologies 12  
IPDS print-quality levels 135  
media specifications 131  
operator-adjustable forms 135  
printable area 130  
printer capabilities 137  
related publications 190  
selecting the printing medium 130  
supported IPDS functions 15  
4400 thermal printer  
attachment mode 22  
attachments 141  
for 4232 printer 22  
for 4247 printer 22  
for 4400 thermal printer 22  
for 6400 printer 22  
for InfoColor 70 printer 21  
for Infoprint 12 printer 19  
for Infoprint 2000–DP1 printer 20  
with AFCCU feature 20  
for Infoprint 2000–NP1 printer 20  
for Infoprint 2000–RP1 printer 20  
for Infoprint 21 printer 19  
for Infoprint 3000–ED1/ED2 printer 20  
for Infoprint 3000–ES1 printer 20  
for Infoprint 32 printer 19  
bar code support 17  
characteristics 139  
Model 004  
media specifications 140  
Model 006  
for Infoprint 40 printer 19  
for Infoprint 4000–ID1/ID2 printer 21  
for Infoprint 4000–ID3/ID4 printer 21  
for Infoprint 4000–ID5/ID6 printer 21  
for Infoprint 4000–IR1/IR2 printer 21  
for Infoprint 4000–IR3/IR4 printer 21  
for Infoprint 4000–IS1 printer 21  
for Infoprint 4000–IS2 printer 21  
for Infoprint 60 printer 20  
for Infoprint 62 printer 23  
for Infoprint 70 printer 20  
for Infoprint Color 100 printer 21  
for Infoprint Color 130 Plus printer 21  
for Infoprint Color 130 printer 21  
for Infoprint Color 8 printer 19  
media specifications 140  
Model 008  
media specifications 140  
printable area 140  
4400 Thermal printer  
related publications 190  
6400 printer  
attachment mode 22  
attachments 147  
bar code support 17  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001  
207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
attachment mode (continued)  
for Network Printer 12 19  
for Network Printer 17 19  
attachments  
continuous form production printer characteristics  
(continued)  
Infoprint 4000–ID1/ID2 printer  
Infoprint 4000–ID3/ID4 printer  
Infoprint 4000–ID5/ID6 printer  
Infoprint 4000–IR1/IR2 printer  
Infoprint 4000–IR3/IR4 printer  
6
6
6
6
6
4230 printer 120  
4232 printer 126  
4247 printer 131  
4400 thermal printer 141  
6400 printer 147  
Infoprint 4000–IS1 printer  
Infoprint 4000–IS2 printer  
4
4
for Infoprint 4000–IS1 printer 82  
for Infoprint 4000–IS2 printer 82  
InfoColor 70 printer 103  
Infoprint 12 printer 39  
continuous forms, narrow and wide 157  
cut sheet production printers characteristics  
Infoprint 2000–DP1 printer  
Infoprint 2000–NP1 printer  
Infoprint 2000–RP1 printer  
4
4
4
Infoprint 20 printer 43  
Infoprint 2000–DP1 printer 71  
Infoprint 2000–NP1 printer 67  
Infoprint 2000–RP1 printer 67  
Infoprint 21 printer 47  
Infoprint 60 printer  
Infoprint 70 printer  
Cyrillic Greek Expanded Core Fonts 180  
4
4
Infoprint 3000–ED1/ED2 printer 75  
Infoprint 3000–ES1 printer 75  
Infoprint 32 printer 54  
Infoprint 40 printer 54  
Infoprint 60 printer 59  
D
data stream and architecture  
related publications 185  
DBCS fonts  
Infoprint 62 printer 153  
Infoprint 70 printer 63  
related publications 186  
double-byte fonts  
Infoprint Color 100 printer 107  
Infoprint Color 130 Plus printer 115  
Infoprint Color 130 printer 111  
Infoprint Color 8 printer 35  
Network Printer 12 27  
related publications 186  
downloaded fonts 12  
E
Network Printer 17 31  
enterprise color printer characteristics  
on Infoprint 4000–ID1/ID2 printer 93  
on Infoprint 4000–ID3/ID4 printer 93  
on Infoprint 4000–ID5/ID6 printer 98  
on Infoprint 4000–IR1/IR2 printer 87  
on Infoprint 4000–IR3/IR4 printer 87  
InfoColor 70 printer  
Infoprint Color 100 printer  
Infoprint Color 130 Plus printer  
Infoprint Color 130 printer  
8
8
8
8
F
B
font character sets, definition 172  
fonts  
bar code support  
on IPDS printers 17  
4028 Font Metrics 171  
AFCCU printers resident 177  
AFP font collection 11  
Arabic Expanded Core fonts 178  
BookMaster 171  
C
captured fonts 12  
code page  
captured 12  
Arabic EBCDIC and ASCII 183  
Cyrillic and Greek EBCDIC and ASCII 183  
Hebrew EBCDIC and ASCII 183  
Latin 2/3/4/5 EBCDIC and ASCII 182  
Latin EBCDIC DCF 182  
Symbols 183  
character attributes 172  
character properties 172  
character sets 172  
code page, definition 172  
coded 171  
Compatibility 171  
Core Interchange 178  
code pages  
for the AFCCU Expanded Core Fonts 181  
coded fonts, definition 171  
compatibility  
Cyrillic Greek Expanded Core fonts 180  
default, for AFCCU printers 177  
downloaded 12  
among PSF-supported printers 157  
page presentation 157  
continuous form production printer characteristics  
Hebrew Expanded Core fonts 178  
IBM Expanded Core 171  
Latin1 Expanded Core fonts 179  
Latin2/3/5 Expanded Core fonts 179  
Latin4 Expanded Core fonts 179  
Infoprint 3000–ED1/ED2 printer  
4
Infoprint 3000–ES1 printer  
4
208 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
fonts (continued)  
Infoprint 2000–DP1 printer  
attachment mode 20  
with AFCCU feature 20  
attachments 71  
load font equivalence 177  
load resource equivalence 177  
Network Printer Resource Utility 14  
OCR, APL, and Katakana AFCCU resident  
fonts 181  
bar code support 17  
characteristics 69  
on 4230 printer 122  
on IPDS printers 12  
PCL Intellifonts 14  
font technologies 12  
media specifications 70  
printable area 70  
PostScript Type1 14  
printer resident 171  
related publications 185  
resident 12  
resident in printers 171  
structure 171  
related publications 188  
supported IPDS functions 15  
Infoprint 2000–NP1 printer  
attachment mode 20  
attachments 67  
characteristics 65  
Symbols Expanded Core fonts 180  
technologies  
media specifications 66  
printable area 66  
IPDS printers 12  
PCL printers 13  
PostScript printers 13  
with PSF 12  
Infoprint 2000–RP1 printer  
attachment mode 20  
attachments 67  
characteristics 65  
media specifications 66  
printable area 66  
terminology 171  
TrueType 14  
XOA-RRL replies 178  
Infoprint 21 printer  
attachment mode 19  
attachments 47  
bar code support 17  
characteristics 45  
H
Hebrew Expanded Core Fonts 178  
font technologies 12  
media specifications 46  
printable area 46  
I
related publications 188  
supported IPDS functions 14  
Infoprint 3000–ED1/ED2 printer  
attachment mode 20  
attachments 75  
IBM Printing Systems internet page  
1
industrial impact and non-impact printer characteristics  
4230 printer  
4232 printer  
4247 printer  
9
9
9
4400 thermal printer 10  
6400 printer 10  
bar code support 17  
characteristics 73  
Infoprint 62 printer 10  
InfoColor 70 printer  
font technologies 12  
media specifications 75  
printable area 74  
attachment mode 21  
attachments 103  
characteristics 101  
media specifications 103  
printable area 102  
Infoprint 12 printer  
related publications 189  
supported IPDS functions 15  
Infoprint 3000–ES1 printer  
attachment mode 20  
attachments 75  
attachments 39  
characteristics 37  
bar code support 17  
characteristics 73  
media specifications 38  
printable area 38  
related publications 187  
Infoprint 20 printer  
font technologies 12  
media specifications 75  
printable area 74  
related publications 189  
supported IPDS functions 15  
Infoprint 32 printer  
attachment mode 19  
attachments 43  
bar code support 17  
characteristics 41  
attachment mode 19  
attachments 54  
font technologies 12  
media specifications 42  
printable area 42  
related publications 187  
supported IPDS functions 14  
bar code support 17  
characteristics 51  
font technologies 12  
media specifications 53  
printable area 53  
Index 209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Infoprint 32 printer (continued)  
related publications 188  
supported IPDS functions 14  
Infoprint 40 printer  
Infoprint 4000–IR3/IR4 printer (continued)  
related publications 189  
supported IPDS functions 15  
Infoprint 4000–IS1 printer  
attachment mode 21  
attachments 82  
attachment mode 19  
attachments 54  
bar code support 17  
characteristics 79  
bar code support 17  
characteristics 51  
font technologies 12  
media specifications 82  
printable area 81  
font technologies 12  
media specifications 53  
printable area 53  
related publications 189  
supported IPDS functions 15  
Infoprint 4000–IS2 printer  
attachment mode 21  
attachments 82  
related publications 188  
supported IPDS functions 14  
Infoprint 4000–ID1/ID2 printer  
attachment mode 21  
attachments 93  
bar code support 17  
characteristics 79  
bar code support 17  
characteristics 89  
font technologies 12  
media specifications 82  
printable area 81  
font technologies 12  
media specifications 92  
printable area 90  
related publications 189  
supported IPDS functions 15  
Infoprint 60 printer  
related publications 189  
supported IPDS functions 15  
Infoprint 4000–ID3/ID4 printer  
attachment mode 21  
attachments 93  
attachment mode 20  
attachments 59  
bar code support 17  
characteristics 57  
bar code support 17  
characteristics 89  
font technologies 12  
media specifications 59  
printable area 58  
font technologies 12  
media specifications 92  
printable area 90  
related publications 188  
supported IPDS functions 14  
Infoprint 62 printer  
related publications 189  
supported IPDS functions 15  
Infoprint 4000–ID5/ID6 printer  
attachment mode 21  
attachments 98  
attachment mode 23  
attachments 153  
bar code support 17  
characteristics 151  
bar code support 17  
characteristics 95  
font technologies 12  
media specifications 153  
printable area 153  
font technologies 12  
media specifications 98  
printable area 96  
printer characteristics  
related publications 189  
supported IPDS functions 15  
4
related publications 189  
supported IPDS functions 15  
Infoprint 4000–IR1/IR2 printer  
attachment mode 21  
attachments 87  
Infoprint 70  
bar code support 17  
Infoprint 70 printer  
bar code support 17  
characteristics 85  
font technologies 12  
media specifications 87  
printable area 86  
attachment mode 20  
attachments 63  
characteristics 61  
font technologies 12  
media specifications 62  
printable area 62  
related publications 189  
supported IPDS functions 15  
Infoprint 4000–IR3/IR4 printer  
attachment mode 21  
attachments 87  
related publications 188  
supported IPDS functions 14  
Infoprint Color 100 printer  
attachment mode 21  
attachments 107  
bar code support 17  
characteristics 85  
font technologies 12  
media specifications 87  
printable area 86  
characteristics 105  
media specifications 107  
printable area 106  
210 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Infoprint Color 100 printer (continued)  
related publications 189  
Infoprint Color 130 Plus printer  
attachment mode 21  
media specifications (continued)  
4232 printer 126  
4247 printer 131  
4400 Model 004 thermal printer 140  
4400 Model 006 thermal printer 140  
4400 Model 008 thermal printer 140  
6400 printer 146  
attachments 115  
bar code support 17  
characteristics 113  
font technologies 12  
InfoColor 70 printer 103  
media specifications 115  
printable area 114  
Infoprint 12 printer 38  
Infoprint 20 printer 42  
related publications 189  
supported IPDS functions 15  
Infoprint Color 130 printer  
attachment mode 21  
Infoprint 2000–DP1 printer 70  
Infoprint 2000–NP1 printer 66  
Infoprint 2000–RP1 printer 66  
Infoprint 21 printer 46  
attachments 111  
characteristics 109  
media specifications 111  
printable area 110  
Infoprint 3000–ED1/ED2 printer 75  
Infoprint 3000–ES1 printer 75  
Infoprint 32 printer 53  
Infoprint 40 printer 53  
Infoprint Color 8 printer  
Infoprint 4000–ID1/ID2 printer 92  
Infoprint 4000–ID3/ID4 printer 92  
Infoprint 4000–ID5/ID6 printer 98  
Infoprint 4000–IR1/IR2 printer 87  
Infoprint 4000–IR3/IR4 printer 87  
Infoprint 4000–IS1 printer 82  
Infoprint 4000–IS2 printer 82  
Infoprint 60 printer 59  
attachment mode 19  
attachments 35  
characteristics 33  
media specifications 34  
printable area 34  
related publications 187  
selecting the printing medium 34  
Infoprint Manager for AIX  
related publications 186  
Infoprint Manager for AIX transform 18  
Infoprint Manager for NT transform 18  
Infoprint Manager for Windows NT and Windows 2000  
related publications 186  
Infoprint Server for OS/390 V2R8- V2R10  
related publications 186  
Infoprint Server for z/OS V1R1  
related publications 186  
Infoprint12 printer  
Infoprint 62 printer 153  
Infoprint 70 printer 62  
Infoprint Color 100 printer 107  
Infoprint Color 130 Plus printer 115  
Infoprint Color 130 printer 111  
Infoprint Color 8 printer 34  
Network Printer 12 26  
Network Printer 17 30  
migrating 3800 printers applications 157  
N
attachment mode 19  
national language code pages 174  
Network Printer 12  
internet page, IBM Printing Systems  
IPDS functions, supported 14  
IPDS print-quality levels  
on 4247 printer 135  
on 6400 printer 149  
IPDS printers  
1
attachment mode 19  
attachments 27  
bar code support 17  
characteristics 25  
font technologies 12  
media specifications 26  
printable area 26  
bar code support 17  
fonts 12  
related publications 186  
supported IPDS functions 14  
Network Printer 17  
L
landscape page presentation 161  
Latin1 Expanded Core Fonts 179  
attachment mode 19  
attachments 31  
bar code support 17  
characteristics 29  
font technologies 12  
media specifications 30  
printable area 30  
Latin2/3/5 Expanded Core Fonts 179  
Latin4 Expanded Core Fonts 179  
load  
font equivalence 177  
resource equivalence 177  
related publications 187  
supported IPDS functions 14  
Network Printer Resource Utility  
fonts 14  
M
media specifications  
4230 printer 120  
overlays 14  
Index 211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
printer capabilities (continued)  
O
on 4247 printer 137  
OCR, APL, and Katakana AFCCU resident fonts 181  
operator-adjustable forms  
on 4230 printer 122  
printer characteristics  
continuous form production printer  
Infoprint 3000 ES1 printer  
4
on 4232 printer 127  
on 4247 printer 135  
on 6400 printer 148  
Infoprint 3000–ED1/ED2 printer  
Infoprint 4000–ID1/ID2 printer  
Infoprint 4000–ID3/ID4 printer  
Infoprint 4000–ID5/ID6 printer  
Infoprint 4000–IR1/IR2 printer  
Infoprint 4000–IR3/IR4 printer  
4
6
6
6
6
6
OS/390 Infoprint Server transform 18  
overlays  
Network Printer Resource Utility 14  
Infoprint 4000–IS1 printer  
Infoprint 4000–IS2 printer  
4
4
P
Infoprint 62 printer  
4
page presentation  
cut sheet production printers  
Infoprint 2000–DP1 printer  
Infoprint 2000–NP1 printer  
Infoprint 2000–RP1 printer  
compatibility 157  
landscape 162  
portrait 161  
upside-down 161  
4
4
4
Infoprint 60 printer  
Infoprint 70 printer  
4
4
portrait page presentation 161, 162  
print medium, selecting  
enterprise color printers  
InfoColor 70 printer  
for 4247 printer 130  
8
for Infoprint Color 8 printer 34  
print-quality levels  
on 4230 printer 122  
printable area  
Infoprint Color 100 printer  
Infoprint Color 130 Plus printer  
Infoprint Color 130 printer  
industrial impact and non-impact printers  
8
8
8
4230 printer  
4232 printer  
4247 printer  
9
9
9
on 4230 printer 120  
on 4232 printer 126  
on 4247 printer 130  
4400 thermal printer 10  
6400 printer 10  
on 4400 thermal printer 140  
on 6400 printer 146  
Infoprint 62 printer 10  
workgroup laser printers  
on InfoColor 70 printer 102  
on Infoprint 12 printer 38  
on Infoprint 20 printer 42  
on Infoprint 2000–DP1 printer 70  
on Infoprint 2000–NP1 printer 66  
on Infoprint 2000–RP1 printer 66  
on Infoprint 21 printer 46  
on Infoprint 3000–ED1/ED2 printer 74  
on Infoprint 3000–ES1 printer 74  
on Infoprint 32 printer 53  
on Infoprint 40 printer 53  
on Infoprint 4000–ID1/ID2 printer 90  
on Infoprint 4000–ID3/ID4 printer 90  
on Infoprint 4000–ID5/ID6 printer 96  
on Infoprint 4000–IR1/IR2 printer 86  
on Infoprint 4000–IR3/IR4 printer 86  
on Infoprint 4000–IS1 printer 81  
on Infoprint 4000–IS2 printer 81  
on Infoprint 60 printer 58  
on Infoprint 62 printer 153  
on Infoprint 70 printer 62  
on Infoprint Color 100 printer 106  
on Infoprint Color 130 Plus printer 114  
on Infoprint Color 130 printer 110  
on Infoprint Color 8 printer 34  
on Network Printer 12 26  
on Network Printer 17 30  
printer capabilities  
Infoprint 12 printer  
Infoprint 20 printer  
Infoprint 21 printer  
Infoprint 32 printer  
Infoprint 40 printer  
2
3
3
3
3
Infoprint Color 8 printer  
2
Network Printer 12  
Network Printer 17  
2
2
printers  
4230 printer 119  
4232 printer 125  
4247 printer 129  
6400 printer 145  
InfoColor 70 printer 101  
Infoprint 12 printer 37  
Infoprint 20 printer 41  
Infoprint 2000–NP1 printer 65  
Infoprint 2000–RP1 printer 65  
Infoprint 21 printer 45  
Infoprint 3000–ED1/ED2 printer 73  
Infoprint 3000–ES1 printer 73  
Infoprint 32 printer 51  
Infoprint 40 printer 51  
Infoprint 4000–ID1/ID2 printer 89  
Infoprint 4000–ID3/ID4 printer 89  
Infoprint 4000–ID5/ID6 printer 95  
Infoprint 4000–IR1/IR2 printer 85  
Infoprint 4000–IR3/IR4 printer 85  
of 4230 printer 124  
of 6400 printer 150  
212 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
printers (continued)  
related publications 185 (continued)  
Infoprint Manager for Windows NT and Windows  
2000 186  
Infoprint 4000–IS1 printer 79  
Infoprint 4000–IS2 printer 79  
Infoprint 60 printer 57  
Infoprint 62 printer 151  
Infoprint 70 printer 61  
Infoprint Server for OS/390 V2R8- V2R10 186  
Infoprint Server for z/OS V1R1 186  
Network Printer 12 186  
Infoprint Color 100 printer 105  
Infoprint Color 130 Plus printer 113  
Infoprint Color 130 printer 109  
Infoprint Color 8 printer 33  
Infoprint–2000 DP1 printer 69  
Network Printer 12 25  
Network Printer 17 187  
PSF/400 191  
PSF for OS/390 190  
PSF/VM 190  
PSF/VSE 190  
resident fonts 11  
Network Printer 17 29  
on 4400 thermal printer 139  
PSF/400  
related publications 191  
PSF font support 12  
AFCCU Arabic Expanded Core fonts 178  
AFCCU Cyrillic Greek Expanded Core fonts 180  
AFCCU Hebrew Expanded Core fonts 178  
AFCCU Latin1 Expanded Core fonts 179  
AFCCU Latin2/3/5 Expanded Core fonts 179  
AFCCU Latin4 Expanded Core fonts 179  
AFCCU printers 177  
AFCCU Symbols Expanded Core fonts 180  
code pages for AFCCU Expanded Core Fonts 181  
OCR, APL, and Katakana AFCCU resident  
fonts 181  
PSF for OS/390  
related publications 190  
PSF/VM  
related publications 190  
PSF/VSE  
related publications 190  
S
R
supported IPDS functions 14  
symbol sets  
related publications 185  
on 4230 printer 122  
Symbols Expanded Core Fonts 180  
4230 printer 189  
4232 printer 189  
4247 printer 190  
4400 Thermal printer 190  
6400 printer 190  
Advanced Function Presentation 185  
AFP products 191  
data stream and architecture 185  
DBCS fonts 186  
double-byte fonts 186  
T
transforms  
AS/400 Host Print 18  
Infoprint Manager for AIX 18  
Infoprint Manager for NT 18  
Infoprint Server for OS/390 18  
fonts 185  
Infoprint 12 printer 187  
Infoprint 20 printer 187  
W
Infoprint 2000–DP1 printer 188  
Infoprint 21 printer 188  
Infoprint 3000–ED1/ED2 printer 189  
Infoprint 3000–ES1 printer 189  
Infoprint 32 188  
workgroup laser printer characteristics  
Infoprint 12 printer  
Infoprint 20 printer  
Infoprint 21 printer  
Infoprint 32 printer  
Infoprint 40 printer  
2
3
3
3
3
Infoprint 40 188  
Infoprint 4000–ID1/ID2 printer 189  
Infoprint 4000–ID3/ID4 printer 189  
Infoprint 4000–ID5/ID6 printer 189  
Infoprint 4000–IR1/IR2 printer 189  
Infoprint 4000–IR3/IR4 printer 189  
Infoprint 4000–IS1 printer 189  
Infoprint 4000–IS2 printer 189  
Infoprint 60 printer 188  
Infoprint Color 8 printer  
2
Network Printer 12  
Network Printer 17  
2
2
X
XOA-RRL replies 178  
Infoprint 62 printer 189  
Infoprint 70 printer 188  
Infoprint Color 100 printer 189  
Infoprint Color 130 Plus printer 189  
Infoprint Color 8 printer 187  
Infoprint Manager for AIX 186  
Index 213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
214 Printer Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Readers’ Comments — We’d Like to Hear from You  
IBM Printing Systems: Printer Information  
Publication No. S544-5750-00  
Overall, how satisfied are you with the information in this book?  
Very Satisfied  
Satisfied  
Neutral  
Dissatisfied  
Very Dissatisfied  
Overall satisfaction  
h
h
h
h
h
How satisfied are you that the information in this book is:  
Very Satisfied  
Satisfied  
Neutral  
h
Dissatisfied  
Very Dissatisfied  
Accurate  
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
Complete  
h
Easy to find  
h
Easy to understand  
Well organized  
Applicable to your tasks  
h
h
h
Please tell us how we can improve this book:  
Thank you for your responses. May we contact you?  
h Yes  
h No  
When you send comments to IBM, you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or distribute your comments in any  
way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.  
Name  
Address  
Company or Organization  
Phone No.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cut or Fold  
Along Line  
Readers’ Comments — We’d Like to Hear from You  
S544-5750-00  
ꢀꢁꢂꢃ  
Fold and Tape  
Please do not staple  
Fold and Tape  
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _  
NO POSTAGE  
NECESSARY  
IF MAILED IN THE  
UNITED STATES  
BUSINESS REPLY MAIL  
FIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO. 40 ARMONK, NEW YORK  
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE  
IBM Corporation  
Information Development  
IBM Printing Systems  
Department H7FE Building 003G  
PO Box 1900 Boulder, CO 80301-9817  
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _  
Fold and Tape  
Please do not staple  
Fold and Tape  
Cut or Fold  
Along Line  
S544-5750-00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢀꢁꢂꢃ  
File Number: S370-40  
Printed in the United States of America  
on recycled paper containing 10%  
recovered post-consumer fiber.  
S544-5750-00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Grizzly Grinder H3172 User Manual
Grizzly Musical Instrument Amplifier H6015 User Manual
Haier Microwave Oven EB 2080EG User Manual
Healthrider Treadmill HRTL06900 User Manual
Heart Home Collectables Indoor Fireplace MHC36 User Manual
Honeywell Fan L6064A User Manual
Honeywell Humidifier DH 835 User Manual
HP Hewlett Packard PDAs Smartphones 430se User Manual
HTC Lawn Mower Accessory 968 999732 User Manual
Humminbird Fish Finder 531571 1_C User Manual